JP2020039551A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: In a game machine, an MPU 51 displays a music piece selection image 83 for allowing a player to select a music piece to be outputted from a speaker 26 from plural music pieces on a pattern display part 341. The MPU 51 allows the speaker 26 to output a selection music piece in determination of a music piece to be outputted from the speaker 26 by normal determination operation or special determination operation to an operation button 20 by a player for selecting a music piece to be outputted from the speaker 26, displays a special selection music piece image 839 for indicating that a selection music piece is a special selection music piece selected by special determination operation in determination of the music piece by the special determination operation on the pattern display part 341, and outputs the special selection music piece from the speaker 26 in selection of the special selection music piece by the player on the basis of the special selection music piece image 839.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 113

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

  Generally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a music piece selected by a player from a plurality of music pieces may be output as an effect during a jackpot game (for example, see Patent Literature 1).

JP 2016-49375 A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the level of interest in the game and the interest in the game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of interest in a game and the interest in the game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Main control means (41) for determining whether to shift the game state to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341) during a music selection effective period, and the music selection image (83) is displayed. 83) an effect executing means (51) for outputting the selected music piece selected by the player to the audio output means (26),
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
A normal determination operation (for example, a single-hit operation) or a special determination operation (for example, a long press operation) different from the normal determination operation on the operation unit (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output unit (26) When the selected music to be output by the audio output means (26) is determined from the plurality of music by the continuous tapping operation), the selected music is output from the audio output means (26);
When the selected music is determined by the special determination operation on the operation means (21), a specially selected music image (839) indicating the selected music selected by the special determination operation is displayed on the image display means (839). 341), and
When the player selects the specially selected music piece based on the specially selected music piece image (839), the specially selected music piece is output to the audio output means (26).

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of interest in a game and the interest in the game and improving the player's willingness to play the game.

FIG. 1 is an exemplary perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exemplary development view illustrating an example of the configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an exemplary development view illustrating an example of the configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The figure which shows an example of the various tables used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the various tables used by a main control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a storage area of a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the performance information display device of a main control apparatus typically. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display example on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device. The figure which shows the example of a display in the set value display part of a performance information display apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a first hold command setting process executed in the start winning process shown in FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a main process executed by the main control device. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of a variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 16. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a data setting process executed in the variable game control process of FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a change start process executed in the change game control process of FIG. 17. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 16. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 16; FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27. 9 is a table showing a relationship between a detection pattern and an operation status. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a command determination process performed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27. FIG. 32 is a view showing an example of various tables used when a fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 31. FIG. 32 is a view showing an example of various tables used when a fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 31. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a jackpot game effect determination process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 31. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a jackpot game effect process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection image display process executed in the big hit game rendering process of FIG. 35. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of a music selection image display screen on a symbol display section of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The figure which shows the example of an initial display of a music selection image. The figure which shows the example of a change of the temporary selection music image in a music selection image. The figure which shows the other example of the temporarily selected music image in the music selection image. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a music selection counter data table used in the music selection image display processing of FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a selected music list table and an unselected music list table used in the music selection image display processing of FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an initial arrangement order data table for a plurality of songs used in the song selection image display processing of FIG. 36. The figure which shows an example of the initial arrangement | sequence of a music selection image. The figure which shows an example of the initial music selection image display screen in a symbol display part. The figure which shows the other example of the initial arrangement | sequence of a music selection image. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an initial provisionally selected song determination process executed in the song selection image display process of FIG. 36. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a temporarily selected song lottery table used in the initial temporarily selected song determination process of FIG. 47. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an initial provisionally selected music piece output process executed in the big hit game rendering process of FIG. 35. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a melody pattern table used in the initial provisionally selected music piece output process of FIG. 49. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection process performed in the jackpot game rendering process of FIG. 35. FIG. 52 is an exemplary flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a tentatively-selected song output process executed in the song selection process of FIG. 51. FIG. 52 is an exemplary flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a selected song output process executed in the song selection process of FIG. 51. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a music selection button effect process executed in the music selection process of FIG. 51. FIG. 52 is an exemplary flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a 5R certain-variable song selection button effect determination process executed in the song selection button effect process of FIG. 51. FIG. 56 is an exemplary view showing an example of a music selection button effect table used in the 5R certain variable music selection button effect determination process of FIG. 55. FIG. 56 is a view showing an example of a 5R certain variable selection button effect lottery table used in the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination process of FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a view showing an example of a 5R certain variable selection button effect lottery table determination table used in the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination process of FIG. 55. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process executed in the song selection button effect process of FIG. 51. FIG. 60 is a view showing an example of a 16R certain variable selection button effect lottery table used in the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process of FIG. 59. FIG. 60 is a view showing an example of a 5R certain variable selection button effect lottery table determination table used in the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process of FIG. 59. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a music selection counter data update process executed in the music selection process of FIG. 51. FIG. 63 is a view showing an example of various tables used in the music selection counter data updating process of FIG. 62. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a game setting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in a symbol display part. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in a symbol display part. The figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen in a symbol display part. The figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen in a symbol display part. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game start standby process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 64. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a top menu screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 64. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game setting screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 64. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting item selection process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 64. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a melody pattern setting screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 64. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in a symbol display part. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a music list display setting screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 64. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in a symbol display part. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in a symbol display part. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a music selection button effect setting screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 64. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in a symbol display part. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting history selection process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 64. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a melody pattern setting history screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 64. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in a symbol display part. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a music list display setting history screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 64. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in a symbol display part. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a music selection button effect history screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 76. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in a symbol display part. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used by the audio ramp control device of the game machine concerning the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a tentatively selected music piece output process performed by the audio lamp control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a selected music piece output process performed by the audio lamp control device. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used by the audio ramp control device of the game machine concerning the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a tentatively selected music piece output process performed by the audio lamp control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a selected music piece output process performed by the audio lamp control device. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button production process performed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection button production process performed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed by the audio ramp control device of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 95 is a view illustrating an example of a game type table referred to in the big hit game rendering process of FIG. 95. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game production process performed by a sound lamp control device. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of processing during the open / close execution mode executed in the big hit game effect processing of FIG. 97. The figure which shows an example of the music opening flag storage area which stores the setting status of the music opening flag for a plurality of music pieces. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a tentatively selected music piece determination process executed in the music selection image display process of FIG. 36. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an initial provisionally selected music piece output process executed in the big hit game rendering process of FIG. 35. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an open / close execution mode process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the example of updating of a music selection counter data table. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a music selection image display process executed in the big hit game rendering process of FIG. 97. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in which the initial music selection image is displayed on a symbol display part. 102 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection process performed in the open / close execution mode process of FIG. 102. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a selected music piece output process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the example of update of the selected music storage area in a music selection effective period. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a music selection counter data update process executed in the music selection process of FIG. 51. The figure which shows the example of update of the music ranking data of the selected music in the music selection counter data table. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a music selection counter data update process executed by the audio ramp control device of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the example of update of the display order of a non-selection music in a music selection counter data table. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part in the music selection effective period of the gaming machine concerning 10th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection process performed in the jackpot game rendering process of FIG. 35. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection process performed in the jackpot game rendering process of FIG. 35. FIG. 114 is an exemplary view showing an example of favorite music list ranking data used for displaying a favorite music list image on the display screen shown in FIG. 113. The figure which shows the other example of the display screen in the symbol display part in a music selection effective period.

  Hereinafter, the first to tenth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. Further, the following embodiments are merely examples embodying the present invention and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, rear, left and right and up and down used in the present embodiment are defined by the front and rear direction D1, the vertical direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall. When the outer frame 14 is fixed, it is installed in a game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, other machines such as a spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a jiya ball gaming machine are described. The present invention can also be applied to the above-mentioned gaming machines.

  The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the inner frame 12. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the inner frame 12.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
1 and 2, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determining unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like. .

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. Thus, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is used to reflect the intention of the player in the big hit game effect in a variable game effect process (to be described later, step S1709 in FIG. 27).

  The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the position in front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the position can be operated by the player. The number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Furthermore, the operation switch 20a is not limited to a contact switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player.

  It is also conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key instead of the operation button 20 and receives an operation of the touch key by a player is provided as an operation unit. Further, instead of the operation button 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a touch operation of the player on the panel 25 may be provided as operation means. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the effect in the variable game effect process (step S1709 in FIG. 27) described later.

  The selection determining unit 21 is operated by the player, and performs a pressing operation of the player in a later-described music selection process (step S2220 in FIG. 35) and a later-described game setting process (step S1711 in FIG. 27). Push button to accept. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

  The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by a player to temporarily select a desired item from options (items) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 described later in the music selection process and the game setting process. An upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214 are included. These selection buttons 211 to 214 include operation switches 211a to 211d (see FIG. 5) for switching input signals to the audio lamp control device 5 described later. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the selection buttons 211 to 214.

  On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. The enter button 21B includes an operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 described later. Thus, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the determination button 21B.

  Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B, a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives an operation by the player of the touch key may be provided as an operation unit. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided as operation means. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial in place of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214).

  The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 32 described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the shooting handle 22 is operated by the player, the driving of the game ball firing mechanism 32 is controlled such that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 seconds.

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 (see FIG. 3) of a payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in one row. It is used to guide the game ball firing mechanism 32 in an aligned state. The lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store excess game balls in the upper plate 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows a player to visually recognize the gaming board 31 (see FIG. 2) of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11 as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. (See 35) is performed. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. The illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and performs a lamp effect in a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking. Note that the speaker 26 is an example of the audio output means of the present invention, and constitutes the directing means of the present invention.

[Configuration of Inner Frame 12]
The inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33, as shown in FIGS. In FIG. 2, the illustration on the game board 31 is omitted for simplicity of illustration.

  The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, various commands (control signals) for instructing control contents are transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. , A variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, and a main display unit 37.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending out the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. Is done.

  Here, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeder 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The shooting rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 is sent to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. To guide. The ball feeder 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that fires the game ball supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the game board 31. In addition, the game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches the game ball using another driving unit such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are formed with openings penetrating the gaming board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entrance of a game ball corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 5) are provided. The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) capable of individually detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the player hits right, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317.

  The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. Note that the ball sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, proximity sensors of an electromagnetic induction type, but may be any sensors capable of individually detecting the ball entry of a game ball by another detection method.

  Further, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on entering a game ball into the second winning opening 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the gaming board 31, the opening of the electric accessory 315b enables the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315, and the closing of the electric accessory 315b allows the entry of gaming balls into the second winning opening 315. The sphere is restricted.

  Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on a game ball entering the variable winning opening 316. The door 316b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the gaming board 31, the opening of the opening / closing door 316b enables the entry of gaming balls into the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening / closing door 316b limits the entering of gaming balls into the variable winning opening 316. You.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is detected by the entering ball sensor 314a or the entering ball sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 determines whether or not a jackpot is determined. (Hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “big hit lottery”). Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display on the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result. The jackpot lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entrance of a game ball to the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entrance sensors 313a to 316a, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, and the variable winning opening 316 is entered. In this case, the number of prize balls is 15. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, the game machine shifts to the special game state, and the variable winning opening 316 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) a predetermined number of times ( By repeating this (for example, 5 times or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls are paid out, and the player is given a gaming value.

  Further, when a game ball wins in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. Then, if the result of the win / fail determination is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot gaming state includes an open / close execution mode in which a round winning game 316 is opened five times until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls or more enter the variable winning game port 316. State. The 16R probability change jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game is performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be paid out than the 5R jackpot game state, and is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot game state. Game state.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display which is arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, a fluctuating game effect including a symbol fluctuating display corresponding to a result of a jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in accordance with a ball entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. Various displays such as display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display unit of the present invention, and constitutes the rendering unit of the present invention. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be a dot matrix, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Further, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is arranged, for example, at the upper or lower part of the symbol display unit 341 or at the left or right part. The sub display unit may be movable between a position where the symbol display unit 341 is covered and a position where the symbol display unit 341 is not covered. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23. The sub display unit may constitute the image display unit of the present invention alone or together with the symbol display unit 341.

  For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols numbered “1” to “9” vertically or horizontally. In addition, a sub-design such as another character or a design may be displayed between the main designs. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are no sub-designs and the main design types are "1" to "9".

  In the gaming machine 10, in the fluctuating game, after the elapse of a preset fluctuating display time from the start of the fluctuating display in the symbol display unit 341, the fluctuating display is executed so that the fluctuation of all the main symbols is stopped. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all main symbols fluctuate along a preset variation direction (horizontal or vertical), and the variation of a plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the symbol fluctuation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which main symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stop state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variable jackpot”, “16R probability variable jackpot” or “5R regular jackpot”, a state where the main symbols of the same symbol are arranged in an activated line is displayed, and the jackpot is determined. Is specified. In addition, the jackpot type may be specified by a combination of main symbols in the activated line, but is not necessarily specified. Specifically, for example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “16R probability changing jackpot”, a symbol combination of, for example, “777” set as a symbol combination indicating the 16R probability changing jackpot among the main symbols is arranged in an active line. Or a state in which the same symbol combinations other than "777" are arranged in an effective line. When the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R probable jackpot”, a state in which symbol combinations such as “333” set in advance as a symbol combination indicating the 5R probable jackpot in the main symbols are arranged in an active line. A state is displayed in which the same symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations indicating the 16R probability change jackpot or the 5R probability change jackpot such as “777” or “333” are arranged in the active line. When the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R normal jackpot”, a combination of symbols indicating a probable variable jackpot such as “222” or “444” set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main symbols, for example. A state is displayed in which combinations of the same symbols other than are arranged in an activated line. When the jackpot lottery result is “out”, a state in which combinations of different main symbols are arranged in an active line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  In addition, the symbol display section 341 displays a variable game effect indicating the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, along with a symbol change display in the variable game. If the result of the jackpot lottery is “16R probable jackpot”, when a state in which the jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination indicating the 16R probable jackpot are arranged on the activated line is displayed, the 5R as a variable game effect A suggestion effect indicating that it is a probability variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot is executed. In this case, in the variable game effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery of the variable game is a 16R variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R probable jackpot”, when a state in which the jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination indicating the probable jackpot are arranged on the activated line is displayed, as a variable game effect, 5R A suggestion effect that usually indicates a jackpot is executed. In this case, in the variable game effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery of the variable game is a 5R certain variable jackpot is executed.

  Further, when the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot gaming effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect. In the present embodiment, a predetermined period (eg, from the start of the first round game to the end of the first round game in the open / close execution mode) elapses in the symbol display unit 341 from the start of execution of the opening / closing execution mode effect. Up to this point, a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 37) that allows selection of music output from the speaker 26 as a jackpot game effect is displayed. Hereinafter, a period during which the music selection image 83 is displayed may be referred to as a music selection validity period. On the other hand, when the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect are not displayed (in the case of the non-game state), the game setting image can be displayed by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player, and the game setting image can be selected based on the game setting image. By operating the determination unit 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B), it is possible to perform game settings. The details of the song selection process in the big hit game effect (big hit game state) (step S2220 in FIG. 35) and the game setting process in the non-game state (step S1711 in FIG. 27) will be described later.

  The magnet sensor 35 is provided around the first winning opening 314 and on the back side of the game board 31. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. Thus, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to the first winning port 314 using the magnet is performed, the illegal act can be detected.

  The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 and on the back side of the gaming board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. Accordingly, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave to the ball entry sensor 314a or the ball entry sensor 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

  The main display section 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374 arranged on the upper right portion of the game board 31. The LED pair 371 displays a result of a lottery in the main control unit 331 as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b in a lighting pattern, triggered by winning in the through gate 317. On the 7-segment display 372, the symbol change display is performed with the winning in the first winning opening 314 as a trigger, and the symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. On the 7-segment display 373, a symbol change display is performed with the winning in the second winning opening 315 as a trigger, and the symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the number N of holdings and the number M of holdings of the variable display generated by winning the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 are displayed by a plurality of LED lighting patterns.

[Back pack unit 13]
The back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140, as shown in FIG.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball games supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9 (see FIG. 5). The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the power to various control devices and various driving units provided in the gaming machine 10. I do.

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, a system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 5, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of a game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a predetermined jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

  The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes various processes according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4. In addition, the input / output I / F 42 is connected with ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, and the like. The MPU 41 determines whether or not the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 have a ball based on the detection signals from the ball sensors 313 a to 317 a. Judge. Further, the MPU 41 determines the presence or absence of a fraudulent act using a magnet or a radio wave based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to a sound lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, a power control device 9, and the like.

  Then, the MPU 41 outputs various commands to the audio ramp control device 5, such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command. For example, the variation pattern command is a command indicating the result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time, and is stored in a later-described holding storage area 412b when the symbol variation display is started by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37. It is determined on the basis of the information which is output to the audio lamp control device 5. When the number of holds N or the number of holds M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases, the hold number command is used to notify the number of holds N or M after the increase. Is output to The first hold command and the second hold command are output to the voice lamp control device 5 when the number of hold N or the number of hold M currently stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases, and the shift command is When the number N or the number of holdings M decreases, the number is output to the audio lamp control device 5 to notify the number of holdings N or the number M of holdings after the decrease. The jackpot start command is output to the audio ramp control device 5 when shifting to the jackpot game state. The big hit end command is output to the sound lamp control device 5 when the big hit game state ends. In addition, other various commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5, but the description thereof is omitted.

  The main controller 4 also includes an oscillation circuit and a frequency dividing circuit as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, an execution cycle of a main timer interrupt process described below executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider.

  In the present embodiment, the clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec). It is assumed that the loading process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply operation clocks of various control entities in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of various processes executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting various commands transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the power saving hold area 412c of the RAM 412 to execute a jackpot lottery and a setting of a variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining a missed type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining a fluctuation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. It is. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, an ordinary random number counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 is to be in the electrical open state and an initial value setting of the ordinary random number counter C4 are set. And a normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for the above. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching the preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 at the time of the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

  The suspension storage area 412b includes a first suspension storage area REA, a second suspension storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first hold storage area REA, and the type of the variable game that the seven-segment display 372 displays and stops is referred to as a first special symbol game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second hold storage area REB, and the type of the variable game that the seven-segment display 373 displays and stops is referred to as a second special symbol game. is there.

  When a game ball enters the first winning port 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. The information is acquired as the success / failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in any one of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a big hit. The information is acquired as the success / failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in any one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB. The acquisition process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination unit of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. In addition, the lottery counter 412a (the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, etc.) is individually associated with each of the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. May be provided.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the change type counter CS1 includes the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA of the first holding storage area REA. It is stored in any one of the REA4 and the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery for the variable game executed based on the success / failure information stored in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 and the second reserved storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning port 314, the winning / failing information is vacant in the priority order of the first reserved area REA1, the second reserved area REA2, the third reserved area REA3, and the fourth reserved area REA4. Is stored in the area. In the number-of-reservations storage area NAA, the number of pieces of the rejection information stored in the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4 is stored as the number of reservations N.

  Also, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the winning / failing information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. Stored in the area. In the number-of-reservations storage area NAB, the number of the rejection information stored in the first to fourth reservation areas REB1 to REB4 is stored as the number of reservations M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first winning area 314 is formed by the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. In addition, it is possible to suspend up to four pieces of winning / failing information as a winning history to the second winning opening 315, respectively.

  It is to be noted that, as another embodiment, it is conceivable as another embodiment that the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 are provided with a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 in common. It is possible to suspend the winning / losing information as a winning history. The storage process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

  When the symbol change display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started, the execution area AE is the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA or the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB. Is a storage area used to move the pass / fail information stored in the storage area. Specifically, the hit information of the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the hit information does not exist in the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB. When the number-of-reserves storage area NAB is 0, the success / failure information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  The difference between the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the number N of holds in the number-of-holds storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In the case of, it is conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Another embodiment is also considered in which the success / failure information of the first holding area REA1 of the first holding area REA and the first holding area REB1 of the second holding area RB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, when one variable game is started, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like based on the numerical information stored as the hit / failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second holding area REA2 is shifted to the first holding area REA1, and the third holding area REA1 is shifted to the third holding area REA1. The rejection information stored in the reservation area REA3 shifts to the second reservation area REA2, and the rejection information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 shifts to the third reservation area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second holding area REB2 is shifted to the first holding area REB1, and the third holding area REB1 is shifted to the third holding area REB1. The rejection information stored in area REB3 is shifted to second reservation area REB2, and the rejection information stored in fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to third reservation area REB3.

  For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 65535, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 65535) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  Two types of random number values for the jackpot winning are set according to the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode in the certainty-variable game state, based on a winning / failing table stored in a winning / failing table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B, as the low-probability mode success / failure table and the high-probability mode success / failure table, the probability (small jackpot probability) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is set as the game setting value. A plurality of different hit / fail tables are provided depending on the situation. The low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table include six success / failure tables respectively corresponding to the six stages of game setting values 1 to 6. In the order of the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2, and the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

  In the game setting value 1, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 206 (0 to 205) in the low probability mode success / failure table, There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/79. 9 (820/65536).

  In the game setting value 2, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 212 (0 to 211) in the low probability mode success / failure table, and There are 845 (0 to 844) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability of the low probability mode is about 1 / 309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high probability mode is about 1/77. 6 (845/65536).

  In the game setting value 3, out of the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 218 (0 to 217) in the low probability mode success / failure table, and high There are 869 (0 to 868) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

  In the game setting value 4, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 224 (0 to 223) in the low probability mode success / failure table, and high There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/229 / 2.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

  In the game setting value 5, out of the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 230 (0 to 229) in the low probability mode success / failure table, and high. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability mode success / failure tables. In other words, with the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

  In the game setting value 6, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 236 (0 to 235) in the low probability mode success / failure table and high. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

  If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be out of order.

  Here, in the low-probability mode success / failure table and the high-probability mode success / failure table, the random numbers with which the lottery results in the jackpot lottery with the same set value are the same are common, but the random numbers with the big hits may not be common. . In addition, the random number which is a big hit may not be a continuous value, and may be a value in which a part or the whole is discrete.

  In addition, the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table are provided six each according to the game setting value of six stages, but at least one success / failure table for each mode may be provided. That is, the game setting value is not limited to six levels. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low probability mode success / failure tables corresponding to game setting values of a plurality of stages, while providing one high probability mode success / failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of game setting values for the low probability mode, and not to provide stepwise game setting values for the high probability mode, thereby making the jackpot probability uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be made uniform, and a plurality of game setting values may be provided for the high probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the assignment table stored in the assignment table storage area of the ROM 411.

  Here, FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (C), when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by a prize in the first winning opening 314, the number of random numbers that can be a 5R probability change jackpot is 0 to 10 The number of random numbers that will be 16R probability variable jackpots is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are usually 5R jackpots is 5 to 15 from 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by a prize in the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers that can be a 5R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and a 16R probability variable jackpot. The number of the fourth random numbers is 5-14, and the number of random numbers that are usually 5R jackpots is 5-15. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability changing machine in which the probability of the probability change jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability change jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, the jackpot lottery in the probability-changing game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) is shorter than the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) and the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). In the case where the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the expected value of obtaining the game ball is set high. Here, the high-frequency support mode is a state in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high, and a game ball is likely to enter the second winning opening 315. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is lower than in the high frequency support mode, and it is difficult for game balls to enter the second winning opening 315.

  In the present embodiment, separate winnings are provided for each of the first winning opening 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning and the second winning opening 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the gaming ball has won the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol. It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same for the game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop-type change machine, and may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-type two-type mixer, or the like.

  Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variable jackpot”, “16R probability variable jackpot”, “5R normal It is determined which of “big hit” and “missing”.

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, an open / close execution mode in which a round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times is executed. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

  In the case of the 5R probability changing jackpot or the 16R probability changing jackpot, the high probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is high after the end of the jackpot game and the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b are set to be high, so that the game ball is provided in the second winning opening 315. Shifts to a probable change game state, which is a high-frequency support mode in which is easily entered. In the present embodiment, the probability changing game state is continued until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability changing jackpot”, “16R probability changing jackpot”, or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal big hit, after the big hit game ends, the game shifts to the time-saving game state in which the winning probability of the big hit is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) notifies the player of a lottery result in a predetermined number of jackpots of a predetermined number of times such as 50 times or 100 times. The process is terminated when the player is notified that the lottery result of the jackpot is a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of the loop probability changing machine, after the big hit game at the time of the probability changing big hit, the predetermined number of big hits (for example, 50 times, 100 times) is completed. When the lottery is executed in the probable changing game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and the lottery result in the big hit lottery does not become a big hit by a predetermined number of times, the low probability mode and the opening of the electric accessory 315b. When the probability is set to be low, the game state shifts to the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode in which game balls are hard to enter the second winning opening 315, and the high-frequency support mode ends. Further, in the variable game, it is also conceivable as another embodiment to carry out a lottery from the certain variable game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is off, the state is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. In the present embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types, that is, a 5R jackpot, a 16R jackpot, and a 5R jackpot, will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round normal jackpot, 16R normal jackpot.

  The reach random number counter C3 is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, according to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the reach occurs, the last stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the deviation. After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of reach, ie, reach other than before and after the stop where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and complete miss where no reach occurs.

  Here, FIG. 7D is a diagram illustrating an example of the departure type table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (D), the random number value to reach out of order is 0 to 8, the random number value to reach other than out of order is 9 to 38, and the random number value to completely out of reach is 39. 238. Note that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game that wins the 5R certain jackpot, 16R certain jackpot, or 5R regular jackpot, that is, the variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, the reach indicates a state in which a symbol combination of a decorative symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won is likely to be displayed between the time when the symbol change display is started on the symbol display unit 341 and the time when the symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the activated line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one of the stop positions fluctuates. Also, while the reach is fluctuating in the symbol display unit 341, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest a degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation buttons 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. A user participation type operation effect process is executed. During the execution of the effect processing, the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

  For example, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed based on the value of the electric auditors product opening counter C4 stored in the electric auditors holding area 412c to determine whether or not the electric auditors product 315b is to be opened for a predetermined time. For example, it is conceivable that the winning is performed when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 199, and that when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is out of order.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variable display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. By determining the type of the fluctuation pattern in this way, the sound ramp control device 5 allows the rough fluctuation game effects such as high-speed fluctuation effects (basic effects, non-reach effects), normal reach effects, super reach effects, and special reach effects. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing described later is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main processing. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of the variation pattern while referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, or the outlier variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these change tables may be provided separately for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 8A, FIG. 8B and FIG. 8C are diagrams showing examples of the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the deviation variation table. As shown in FIG. 8A, FIG. 8B and FIG. 8C, in the normal jackpot variation table, the probable variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table, the variation pattern is previously determined according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Corresponding. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R ordinary jackpot”, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result is a normal jackpot variation table, and if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot”, the probability variation jackpot variation table. If the result is "out", the type of the fluctuation pattern is specified by referring to the outlier fluctuation table.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, the variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern in which the variable display time is 30 s as the variation type (effect pattern type). Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach effect. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern in which the variable display time is 60 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the super reach effect in the symbol display unit 341. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a super reach effect. Further, when the fluctuation pattern “03” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a special reach effect pattern in which the fluctuation display time is the longest, that is, 90 s, as the fluctuation type (effect pattern). The effect pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a special reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (C), in the departure variation table, the departure type counter CS1 is provided for each departure stop type determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (departure before and after departure, reach other than departure before and after departure, complete departure). And the corresponding relationship with the fluctuation pattern are defined. More specifically, in the case where the stop type at the time of departure is the out-of-reach reach or the reach other than the out-of-reach reach, any of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, if the stop type at the time of departure is completely departure, either the fluctuation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the fluctuation pattern “04” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the fluctuation display time is 7 s as the fluctuation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. In the section 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed. When the fluctuation pattern “05” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a reachless effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the fluctuation display time is 10 s as the fluctuation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. In the section 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "04", the variation display is released without a notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, and the like, and the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped at a design. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the variation display of the variation pattern is released with a notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, etc. Be executed. In addition, in the case of the variation display at the time of the disconnection corresponding to the variation pattern "05", a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

  Note that the type of the variation pattern is not limited to the examples illustrated in FIGS. 8A, 8B, and 8C. In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a normal reach production performed in the normal reach production pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "01", a plurality of types of normal reach productions with different characters, stories, and the like are prepared, The normal reach production is performed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach effect executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", a plurality of types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and selected from among them. One of the super reach productions performed is performed. Super reach production is a reach production that has a longer fluctuating time than normal reach production, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is higher than normal reach production, and the big hit is won than the special reach production This is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (degree of expectation) is low.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach effects with different characters and stories are prepared as special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "03", and are selected from among them. One of the performed special reach productions is performed. The special reach effect is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach effect, and is, for example, an effect that evolves from a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach production is executed when the player is informed that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than that of the normal reach production or the special reach production.

  The effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern includes an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single-stroke operation effect in which a single-stroke operation is reflected in the effect, and the operation button 20 by the player. A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which a continuous hit operation is reflected in an effect and a long press operation effect in which a long press operation of the operation button 20 by a player is reflected in the effect may be included.

  When the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 41 issues a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Input to the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal big hit”, the MPU 41 determines that the fluctuation pattern command “A” indicating that it is a 5R normal big hit is added before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. A01 ”to“ A03 ”are output. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is a 5R probable change jackpot before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. To “B03”. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, the MPU 41 sets the change pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating the 16R probability change hit before the change patterns “01” to “03”. To “C03”. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D05” to which “D” indicating that the lottery is out is added before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. Is output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result, the symbol display unit 341. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed by are determined. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn off the light.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341. Will run. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

  Here, FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. In the game information storage area 412d, game information relating to a game history, payout performance, and the like are stored. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as the game information, the “number of out-balls”, “the number of general payout payouts”, “the first payout number payouts”, and “the second payout number payouts”. , "Variable winning opening payout number", "set value", "base information", "continuous bonus ratio information", "accessory ratio information", "cumulative jackpot lottery count", "unit jackpot lottery count", "The number of jackpots" and "the number of consecutive misses" are stored. Of these game information, “set value”, “base information”, “continuous bonus ratio information”, “principal ratio information”, and “unit jackpot lottery count” are gaming information (performance information) relating to payout performance. Corresponds to.

  The “number of outgoing balls” is an integrated value of the number of gaming balls fired on the gaming board 31 in the normal gaming state (the state in which the mode is the low-probability mode and not the high-frequency support mode). The “number of out-balls” is stored as a value obtained by counting the out-balls detected by the out-ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG.

  The “number of general winning port payout balls” is an integrated value of game balls paid out for a winning in the general winning port 313 in a normal game state (a state in which the low probability mode is set and the high frequency support mode is not set). This “general winning port payout ball number” is set when a winning in the general winning port 313 is detected by the ball input sensor 313a in the normal game state, and the prize ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. In the processing, when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to perform the payout of the number of prize balls according to the winning in the general winning opening 313, the value is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current prize. You.

  The “number of first winning port payout balls” is an integrated value of gaming balls paid out for winning in the first winning port 314 in a normal gaming state (a state in which the mode is the low-probability mode and not the high-frequency support mode). . This “number of first payout opening payout balls” is determined when the winning sensor 314a detects a winning in the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state, and a winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later. In setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the first winning port 314 in the command setting process, a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current prize. Update to

  The “number of second winning port payout balls” is an integrated value of gaming balls paid out for winning in the second winning port 315 in a time-saving gaming state (a state in which the mode is the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode). . The “number of second winning opening payout balls” is the winning prize ball in step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 16 described later when the winning sensor 315a detects a winning in the second winning opening 315 in the time saving game state. In setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize to the second winning port 315 in the command setting process, a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current prize. Update to

  The “variable winning opening payout number” is an integrated value of gaming balls paid out for winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot game state (the state of being in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode). This “variable winning opening payout ball number” is set when a winning in the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the ball input sensor 316a in the jackpot game state, as described later in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to perform the payout of the number of prize balls according to the winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the processing, the number of payout balls by the current prize is updated to a value added. .

  The "set value" is used to select a low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) used in the jackpot lottery (win / fail judgment). In other words, the “set value” defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, as described above, the set values in six stages (six types of low probability mode success / failure tables (see FIG. 7A) and high probability mode success / failure tables (see FIG. 7B) having different jackpot probabilities) Is prepared. The “set value” is updated in a set value changing process of FIG. 20 described later.

  The “base information” is information relating to “base” which is a payout rate (payout rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and the “base” is the “number of out-balls” in the normal game state. Is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the “general winning opening payout number” to the “first winning opening payout number”. When the “base” is represented by a mathematical formula, “base” = 100 × (“the number of payout balls to be paid out in general” + “the number of payouts to pay out the first winning opening”) / “the number of outgoing balls”. The “base information” includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the previous-last 60,000-ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the previous-last 60,000-ball base B2 are updated each time the number of out-balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information updating process of FIG. 21 described later (steps S1647 and S1648). Specifically, the “base” when the latest number of out-balls reaches 60,000 ball is the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the “base” when the previous out-ball number reaches 60,000 ball is The base information is stored in the game information storage area of the RAM 412 as “base information” as the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before. The current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out-balls reaches 60000 balls (step S1643), and the current base BL is stored as “base information” in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. Further, when the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out-balls reaches 60000, the “base information” includes the “number of general payout-payout balls” and “first prize-winning mouth” described above. In addition to the "number of payout balls" and "the number of outgoing balls", the "number of general payout opening payout balls", "the number of first winning opening payout balls", and "the number of outgoing balls" for base calculation are stored.

  In the present embodiment, the “base information” includes the “current base BL”, the “previous 60,000-ball base B1”, and the “previous 60,000-ball base B2”. However, a base of 60,000 coins for the past three times or more may be left as a history. Further, the “base information” may include an accumulated base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

  The “continuous role ratio information” is the total number of payout balls by winning in all winning ports (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, and variable winning port 316) with payout of prize balls. In this example, the information on the “continuous bonus ratio”, which is a ratio of the number of variable payout opening payout balls. When the “continuous bonus ratio” is represented by a mathematical formula, “continuous bonus ratio” = 100 × “variable winning opening payout ball count” / “total payout ball count”. The “continuous accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in a specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous bonus ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous bonus ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The “continuous bonus ratio information” is a period for a certain period (for example, a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), and a period until a certain number of big hits in a normal game state (for example, 1000 times) are executed. Alternatively, the ratio may be a continuous accessory ratio with respect to a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the “continuous bonus ratio information” may include both the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio for a certain number of periods.

  The “principal ratio information” is the total payout number of balls to be paid out to all winning ports (general winning ports 313, first winning ports 314, second winning ports 315, and variable winning ports 316) for which prize balls are paid out. In addition, it is information on the “government ratio”, which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the second payout hole payout ball and the variable payout mouth payout ball. When the "combination of bonuses" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "combination of bonuses" = 100 * ("the number of payouts of the second winning opening" + "the number of payouts of the variable winning opening") / "the total number of payouts". The “accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in a specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later. In the present embodiment, the “accessory ratio information” is stored as an accumulated accessory ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. Note that the “principal ratio information” is for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of big hits are drawn (for example, 1000 times) in the normal game state, The ratio of the accessory to the outgoing ball may be a fixed number (for example, a period until the number of outgoing balls reaches 60,000). Of course, the “continuous bonus ratio information” may include both the cumulative bonus ratio and the bonus ratio for a certain number of periods.

  The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” indicates that a jackpot lottery was performed in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the gaming hall until the present. It is the number of times. In other words, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is the cumulative change display count at which the symbol change display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is triggered by winning in the first winning port 314 in the normal gaming state. is there. The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is incremented by 1 each time the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 is started in step S1613 in the variation start process in FIG. The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is cleared from the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  The “unit jackpot lottery count” refers to the number of jackpot lotteries that have been triggered by a prize in the first winning port 314 for a certain number of minus balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) (main This is the number of times the symbol variation display is executed on the 7-segment display 372 of the display unit 37). In the present embodiment, the predetermined number is “250 balls”, and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting “the number of general payout payouts” and “the first payout payout number” from the “outside payout”. In other words, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is the symbol change display count of the 7-segment display 372 of 1000 yen average in the normal gaming state when 250 ball lending is received for 1000 yen in the game hall (the jackpot lottery Number of times). Note that the “unit jackpot lottery count” may be the number of times a large number of jackpot lotteries have been received for a certain number of “out balls” in the normal gaming state. The “unit jackpot lottery count” is updated in step S1645 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is stored as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The “unit jackpot lottery count” refers to a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot counts (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in a normal game state, It may be for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the “unit jackpot lottery count”, both the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count and the unit jackpot lottery count in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

  The "number of jackpots" is the number of times the lottery results in the jackpot lottery performed from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the start of the business of the gaming hall to the present until the present have become a jackpot. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by one each time the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state in the game state shift processing executed in step S1305 in the main processing of FIG. The "number of jackpots" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  The “number of consecutive misses” is the number of times the lottery results in the jackpot lottery have been consecutively missed in the low probability mode (normal game state (low frequency support mode) and time saving game state (high frequency support mode)), If the lottery result is a big hit, it is cleared to 0 times. The “number of consecutive misses” is determined by determining whether or not the winning / failing determination based on the low-probability mode success / failure table in step S1603 is to start the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 in step S1613 of the variation start process in FIG. If it is off, it is incremented by one, and if the result of the hit determination is a big hit, it is cleared to zero. In the present embodiment, the “number of consecutive misses” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10. Of course, the “number of consecutive misses” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 5, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” and “set value” stored as game information (performance information) in a game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. . The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display unit 45, a set value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the performance information display device 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the performance display monitor 43 displays "base information" on the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a position where the inner frame 12 can be viewed when the inner frame 12 is expanded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 includes a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a four-digit seven-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. May be provided. It is also conceivable to display “base information” using the two 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37.

  The seven-segment displays 431 to 434 can display numbers “0” to “9” and alphabets “A” to “F”. In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when displaying the alphabet “B”, a dot is turned on to display “8.” to distinguish it from the number “8”, and the alphabet “D” is displayed. When displaying, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number “0” and “0.” is displayed. Also, when displaying any one of the alphabets “A” to “F”, it is also conceivable to turn on a dot to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

  In the performance display monitor 43, the left seven-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are identification segments in which the “base type” is indicated by an abbreviation symbol, and the right two seven-segments. The display units 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, if the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation symbol “BL” of the current base BL is “8.” and “L” in the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 that are the identification segments. , And the base value “31” is displayed as “3” and “1” on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 as the ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, "8.", "L", "3", and "1" are displayed in order from the left.

  The performance display switch 44 switches on and off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) collectively by a pressing operation. (See FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When an operation of turning on the power is performed on the performance display switch 44, power is supplied to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when an operation of turning off the power is performed on the performance display switch 44, the power supply to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed. . The performance display switch 44 may be provided other than the main control device 4.

  Here, FIGS. 11A to 11D are display examples on the performance display monitor 43. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so that the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 11B to 11D, when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 is used as “base information” unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. The ball base B1 → the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous time → the current base BL is sequentially looped, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 11C, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 34%, and FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the 60,000-ball base B2 is 32% twice before the previous game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

  A program required to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program for calculating the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the previous 60,000-ball base B2, A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the previous-last 60,000-ball base B2 at regular intervals is stored in the ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main controller 4. As a result, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in the ROM 411. Further, a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

  In the performance display monitor 43, instead of or in addition to the “base information”, the game information is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as “continuous role ratio information” or “ratio ratio information”. Other performance information may be displayed.

  Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by another form of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, the setting value display unit 45 of the performance information display device 4 </ b> A displays the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7A) and the high probability mode success / failure table (FIG. 7B) referred to in the jackpot lottery. ) To display the above-mentioned set values for selecting the）, and is constituted by a 7-segment display. Note that the set value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display. The set value may be displayed.

  The set value change operation unit 46 switches on / off of the power of the 7-segment display by a pressing operation, and enables the change of the set value by being rotated when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The set value change operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches contacts by a rotating operation (rotation at a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a display example on the set value display unit 45 of the main control device.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed when the set value display unit 45 is turned off, the 7-segment display is energized and the set value display unit is turned on. A number is displayed at 45. The numbers displayed at this time are the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicate the current set values. In the illustrated example, the set value is “1”. On the other hand, if the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed when the set value display unit 45 is on, the power to the 7-segment display is cut off, and the set value display unit 45 is turned off. Become.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, when the setting value display section 45 is turned on and a rotation operation is performed on the setting value change operation section 46, the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is changed. . In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is increased by rotating the set value display section 45 clockwise, and displayed on the set value display section 45 by rotating the set value display section 45 counterclockwise. The numbers that are given are smaller. When the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed by rotating the set value display section 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as a set value. Therefore, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed to turn off the power of the 7-segment display while the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45, the power is turned off. The number displayed immediately before the setting is determined as the set value. As a result, the MPU 41 determines whether the low-probability mode appointment table (see FIG. 7A) or the high-probability mode appointment table (FIG. 7B) is selected in accordance with the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Jackpot lottery can be performed based on the same).

  The method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of rotating the set value change operation unit 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45. For example, the setting value is determined by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), and the setting is performed by repeatedly hitting or long pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). A method of changing the number displayed on the value display section 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45, and inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4 and rotating the key to display the set value. A method of changing the number displayed on the unit 45 and then removing the key may be used.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, a symbol change display and a symbol change display on the symbol display unit 341. It is an example of the sub-control means for executing the effect display.

[Sound lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sound or lamp lighting patterns used in various effects. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of various processes executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The sound lamp control device 5 executes processing in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that the display control device 6 is controlled based on various commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4. To input a command (control signal) to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 controls the reproduction audio output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when executing the variable game effect (step S1709 in FIG. 27) and the jackpot game effect (step S1710 in FIG. 27), the MPU 51 displays the symbol display unit 341 and outputs the reproduced sound from the speaker 26 and the illumination unit. 27 is controlled. In one example, the MPU 51 executes the output of the music from the speaker 26 and the display of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 37) on the symbol display unit 341 in the big hit game effect.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main controller 4 and the display controller 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, various commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold number command, a shift command, a big hit start command, and a big hit end command are input from the main control device 4 to the audio ramp control device 5. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives various commands from the main control device 4 and inputs the various commands to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. A configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also considered as another embodiment.

  The speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the illumination unit 27 based on various commands input from the main control device 4. It is. The input / output I / F 52 is connected to the operation switch 20, the upper selection operation switch 211a, the lower selection operation switch 211b, the left selection operation switch 211c, the right selection operation switch 211d, and the decision operation switch 21Ba. Thereby, the MPU 51 controls the sound output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the illumination unit 27 based on the operation of the operation button 20, the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214), and the determination button 21B. It is also possible.

  The MPU 51 determines a predetermined pattern based on various commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command that are input from the main controller 4. Perform arithmetic processing.

  More specifically, when a fluctuation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the fluctuation pattern command, changes the fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of the main symbol (see FIG. 32A)), the fluctuation display time, and the fluctuation type (FIG. 32). (See FIG. 33B) and the effect type (see FIGS. 33A to 33C)) (see steps S2003 and S2004 of the command determination process in FIG. 31), and the display variation corresponding to the variation pattern. The pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6, and the symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, if the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, the symbol display unit 341 displays a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command indicates the 5R normal jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when the fluctuation pattern command indicates the 5R certain variable jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R certain variable jackpot. Is displayed, and in the case of indicating the 16R probability change jackpot, a combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal change hit, the 5R probability change hit or the 16R probability change hit is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on various commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the audio lamp controller 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like. The audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 61 has a built-in ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes various circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for receiving an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes various processes according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The ROM 611 is used for various control programs as well as variable designs such as a main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, a miss effect image, and a jackpot game effect. A plurality of types of images such as an opening effect image, an opening / closing effect image, an ending effect image, a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 37), a top menu image used in game settings, and various setting images developed from the top menu image are stored. I have. Each image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image or a moving image. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes a variable display time of a variable symbol, in addition to a type of an image to be used and a display timing of each image. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays various images on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing symbol variation display and effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of various processes executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of various processes executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stopping member that switches whether or not to pay out game balls, A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the driving unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as a clogged ball of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to the amount set in advance within the range of the amount of money to be lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball rental device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71, and the predetermined number of game balls is Will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type recording medium incorporating an IC chip. The ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 while the firing handle 22 is being rotated, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 are fired by the firing rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the firing control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the firing handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation amount, so that the game ball on the shooting rail 321 is directed to the game board 31. Fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is fired toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

  The firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. Thereby, the launch control IC 81 sets the launch intensity of the game ball from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 as the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotary operation amount of the launch handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to be strong.

  Further, the firing handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to perform an operation for arbitrarily stopping the firing of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the firing handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or that the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 32 is stopped. Thereby, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game in a situation where the player does not touch the firing handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop firing the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12 V voltage for driving various sensors and driving units, a +5 V voltage for logic used in various control devices, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12 V or +5 V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 90 while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by electric power supplied from power supply equipment. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, information in the RAM provided in the various control devices is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, various control devices can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period.

  Further, when determining that the power supply has been interrupted, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24 V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches a preset less than 22 V. Is determined. When receiving the power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interruption process.

[Processing of Main Controller 4]
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is started up when the power is turned on, main processing executed after the start-up processing, main timer interrupt processing started periodically, and executed at the time of power failure. It performs NMI interrupt processing and the like. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process and the NMI interrupt process is omitted.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of various sensors or switches connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the like is determined. At this time, when the entry of a game ball into any of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and the counter value reaches the maximum value. In this case, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process, which will be described later, according to the winning in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005).

  The above-described firing control processing is performed under the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the firing handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for enabling firing. In addition, the above-mentioned firing control processing invalidates the firing of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player does not touch the firing handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the processing to be performed. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch game balls when the launch of gaming balls is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to bring the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 into the electric winning open state based on the ordinary random number counter C4 stored in the electric winning holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. The high frequency support mode flag is set to ON when the game mode is shifted from the jackpot game mode to the certain game mode, for example, in the game mode shift process (step S1305) of the main process in FIG. 16, and the other game mode is changed from the certain game mode. It is set to off when the transition is made to. When the normal random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, the MPU 41 determines that a normal symbol has been won, and when the normal random number counter C4 is 30 to 250, the MPU 41 fails. Is determined to be. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that a normal symbol has been won when the ordinary random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and deviates when the ordinary random number counter C4 is 200 to 250. Is determined to be. If the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol has been won in the through gate process, the MPU 41 keeps the electric accessory 315b open for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes possible to win a game ball in the second winning opening 315 at the upper right of the gaming board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is juxtaposed.

[Start winning process of main controller 4]
Here, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first winning port 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the gaming ball has won the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and determines that the gaming ball has not won the first winning opening 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of holds (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106. On the other hand, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number N if the reserved number N is not the maximum reserved number (step S1102: No) (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 checks the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 13, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the main processing described later (step S1302 in FIG. 16). And S1312) are stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the hit / failure information before the hit / failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 is subjected to the jackpot success / failure determination in the later-described change start process (S1408 in FIG. 17). Then, a first hold command setting process of setting a first hold command based on the confirmation result is executed. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second winning opening 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the processing shifts to step S1107, and determines that the game ball has not won the second winning opening 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of holds (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holdings M is the maximum number of holdings (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process, and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number M if the reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No) (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 compares the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 13, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later. The data is stored in the first free reserved area of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the content of the hit / failure information before the hit / failure information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is to be determined as a jackpot success / failure in a later-described change start process (S1408 in FIG. 17). Then, a second hold command setting process for setting a second hold command is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 15, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, the first hold command setting process of FIG. 15 may be replaced with “first hold command” with “second hold command” and “number of holds N” with “number of hold M”. Good.

[First hold command setting process of main controller 4]
Here, the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or out of order), the variation pattern, and the number of holds N. .

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the number of holds N from the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high-probability mode. If the mode is the high-probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high-probability mode (step S1202) : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag that can be set to ON in a game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 16) described later. The high-probability mode flag is set to ON by the MPU 41 when shifting to the high-probability mode, and is set to OFF when shifting to the low-probability mode.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning, based on the high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7B). Perform a pass / fail decision. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the low-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7A). Is performed.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1206. If it is determined that the read value is not the value corresponding to the jackpot (Step S1205: No), the process proceeds to Step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the hit / fail information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 of FIG. 14, the values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 included in the hit / non-hit information stored in the third holding area REA3. Is read. It should be noted that, among the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4, the reserved area in which the pass / fail information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 14 can be determined by the value of the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NA. is there.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of holds N in the first hold command. As described above, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 receiving the first hold command transmits the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to the number N, it is possible to recognize which one of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 corresponds to the validity information stored in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result is out of order, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of holds N in the first hold command (step S1209).

  The first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 in step S1301 of a main process (see FIG. 16) described later. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with another command, and then deleted. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to the above description as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing, main control processing of the game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed with the remaining time.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 performs an external output process of transmitting output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process or the previous main process to each control device such as the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Execute For example, when various commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command are set in the RAM 413, the sub control unit 332 Send the command to In step S1001 of FIG. 13, it is determined whether or not the prize detection information is stored in the RAM 413. If the prize detection information is stored in the RAM 413, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a winning ball command to be output to the payout control device 7. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has occurred in the general prize port 313 or the like based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 413. Then, if a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the variable game. Although the variable game control processing will be described later, in the variable game control processing, the above-described jackpot lottery is executed, and a variable pattern command required for symbol variable display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 13, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1309. Is set based on the respective values of the above, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation display time.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a game state shift process for shifting the game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery (see step S1604 in FIG. 19). In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 changes the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot game state including the opening / closing execution mode, the probable variable time short game state that is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the high frequency The game mode is shifted to a normal time saving game state that is a support mode, a normal non-time saving game state that is not a high frequency support mode in a low probability mode, and the like.

  For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable game for the jackpot, and executes the jackpot game including the open / close execution mode. Specifically, when the 5R certain variable jackpot flag, 16R certain variable jackpot flag, or 5R normal large jackpot flag that is set to ON in step S1607, S1608 or S1609 of FIG. After the end of the variable game for the jackpot, the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state. Then, in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 opens the opening / closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316 and thereafter, when the maximum opening time of the opening / closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316 has elapsed, or in the variable winning opening 316. When a predetermined upper limit number of prizes has been won, one round of opening / closing processing for closing the opening / closing door 316b of the variable prize port 316 is repeatedly executed five or sixteen times depending on the type of big hit.

  In addition, after the execution of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the jackpot game state to the short-change time short game state when the jackpot type is the 5R probability jackpot or the 16R probability jackpot, and the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot. In this case, the game state is shifted from the big hit game state to the normal time reduction game state.

  Further, when shifting the transition of the gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a flag corresponding to the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high-probability mode flag to ON when the gaming state is shifted to the probable-variation time-saving gaming state, and sets the time-saving mode flag to ON when the gaming state is shifted to the normal time-saving gaming state. I do. When the time reduction mode flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 sets a predetermined number of times of reduction (50 times or 100 times) as the number of times of execution of the variable game in the time reduction mode in the time reduction counter.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a display control process of the main display unit 37. By this display control process, the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 execute the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a main symbol indicating a lottery result. Will stop at the combination of Further, by the display control process, the symbol variation display is executed by the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37 only during the predetermined ordinary symbol variation display time, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating whether or not the symbol has been normally won. Will stop. In addition, in the case of the normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second winning opening 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a setting value changing process. In this set value change process, a process of controlling the display or non-display of the set value or the change of the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d in accordance with an operation on the set value change operation unit 46 is executed. The details of the setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the set value changing process is executed in the main process, but is limited to a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or a period from after the start-up process until the launch of the game ball is started. It is also conceivable that it is executed. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the set value cannot be changed until the next power-on, so that the set value can be prevented from being changed within the business hours of the game hall. .

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a specific performance information update process of the game information. In the present embodiment, the base information, the number of jackpot lotteries, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes a display control process of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. The details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has come (step S1310: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301, and executes each process from S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. During the remaining time, the steps S1310, S1311, and S1312 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has come (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, the variable game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1304 of FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is playing a big hit game. If the big game is being played (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process and is not playing a big hit game. In this case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. For example, the presence or absence of the execution of the big hit game is determined based on the big hit game execution flag that the MPU 41 sets on at the start of the big hit game and turns off at the end of the big hit game. In addition, when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game, the MPU 41 sets a big hit game start command, and transmits the big hit game start command to the voice lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the big hit game start flag is turned off at the end of the big hit game, the MPU 41 sets a big hit game end command, and transmits the big hit game end command to the audio lamp control device 5.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed. If the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not being performed. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1407. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is set to ON in step S1614 (see FIG. 19) of the variation start process described later, and is OFF in step S1405 when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes). Is determined based on the variable display flag that is set to.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process ends.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (Step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the combination of the main symbols according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game on the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37. It is displayed (step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405). When the processing of step S1405 ends, the MPU 41 ends the variable game control processing.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 determines whether both the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA and the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the hold storage area 412b are 0. I do. Here, when both the hold number N and the hold number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, when one of the number of hold N and the number of hold M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 performs a data setting process on the data of the success / failure information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the processing in step S1407 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform a variation display based on the winning / failure information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 in FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of reservations M corresponding to the second special figure game is 0, and if the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. I do. On the other hand, when the hold number M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
The MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of holds N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves the success / failure information from the first hold area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the contact information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the contact information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the contact information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the processing in step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is executed when the number of holdings M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is executed when both or one of the number of holdings M and the number of holdings N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: Yes). Therefore, when the number of holds M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 determines that the number of holds N is not 0, and executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507.

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit / fail information of the second to fourth holding areas REB2 to REB4 one by one (Step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the hit / fail information of the second holding area REB2 is moved to the first holding area REB1, the hit / fail information of the third holding area REB3 is moved to the second holding area REB2, and the hit information of the fourth holding area REB4 is moved. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the processing in step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Step S1508 and Step S1509>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving mode flag that can be set to on in the game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 16) is set to on, and the time-saving mode flag is set to on. If yes (step S1508: YES), the counter value of the time reduction counter is decremented by one (step S1509). On the other hand, when the time saving mode flag is not set to ON (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 ends the data setting process.

<Steps S1510 and S1511>
In step S1510, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510). Here, when the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time reduction mode flag to off (step S1511), and when the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S1510: No), After terminating the data setting process, the process proceeds to step S1408 in FIG. 17 to execute a change start process.

[Change start processing]
Here, an example of the change start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 in FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not a high-probability mode flag that can be set to on in the game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 16) is set to on (step S1601), and the high-probability mode flag is turned on. Is set (Step S1601: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S1602, and if the high probability mode flag is not set to ON (Step S1601: No), the process proceeds to Step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the jackpot information currently stored in the execution area AE corresponds to the jackpot, based on the high-probability mode hit table (see FIG. 7B). A determination is made as to whether the value is a value. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit information currently stored in the execution area AE based on the low probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 7A). A determination is made as to whether the value is a corresponding value.

<Steps S1604 to S1610>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a jackpot. If the result of the hit determination is a jackpot (step S1604: YES), the jackpot type is determined (steps S1605 and S1606). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is 5R-variable jackpot based on the jackpot type counter C2 included in the hit / fail information currently stored in the execution area AE and the distribution table (see FIG. 7C). Is determined (step S1605), and it is determined whether or not it is a 16R probability change jackpot (step S1606).

  If the jackpot type is the 5R probability variable jackpot (step S1605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON (step S1607). The 5R probability change jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R probability change jackpot. In step S1607, the result of stopping the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R-variable jackpot is also set based on the hit / failure information. In addition, the 5R certain change big hit flag is set to off at the end of the change start processing. When the processing in step S1607 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

  If the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to ON (step S1608). The 16R probability variable jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 16R probability variable jackpot. In step S1608, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is the 16R probability variable jackpot is also set based on the hit / failure information. It should be noted that the 16R probability-change big hit flag is set to off at the end of the change start processing. When the processing in step S1608 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

  If the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: No), the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag provided in the RAM 412 to ON (step S1609). The 5R normal jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R normal jackpot. In step S1609, the result of stopping the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R regular jackpot is also set based on the hit / failure information. The 5R normal big hit flag is set to off at the end of the change start processing. When the processing in step S1609 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

  On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not a jackpot (step S1604: NO), the MPU 41 sets the disconnection flag to ON (step S1610). The miss flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit information currently stored in the execution area AE is miss. In step S1610, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not set is also set based on the hit / failure information. Note that the off flag is set to off at the end of the change start process. When the processing in step S1610 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

<Step S1611>
In step S1611, the MPU 41 sets a variable display time counter on the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variable pattern of the variable game. Specifically, when the normal big hit flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the change pattern based on the change type counter CS1 and the normal big hit change table (see FIG. 8A). In addition, when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8B). Further, when the deviation flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 8C).

<Step S1612>
In step S1612, the MPU 41 sets a fluctuation pattern command including the result of the jackpot lottery in the fluctuation game and the fluctuation pattern identified in step S1611, and stores the command in the RAM 512. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice ramp control device 5 displays a symbol based on the variation pattern command. The symbol variation display and the like by the unit 341 are executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 sets “A01” to “A01” in which “A” indicating the 5R normal jackpot is added to the variation patterns “01” to “03”. A03 "is set as the variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 selects any one of “B01” to “B03” in which the variation pattern “01” to “03” has “B” indicating that it is a 5R probable jackpot. Is set as a fluctuation pattern. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 selects any one of “C01” to “C03” in which the variation patterns “01” to “03” have “C” indicating that it is a 16R probable jackpot. Is set as a fluctuation pattern. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes any one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “08”. Set as a command. Further, when the lottery result is “missing”, the MPU 41 includes in the variation pattern command information on whether the reach is out of order, the reach other than the out of order, or completely out of reach.

<Steps S1613 and S1614>
The MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 (step S1613), and sets the variation display flag to ON (step S1614). The symbol variation display started here stops after the variation display time set in step S1611 has elapsed, with the stop result set in any of steps S1607 to S1610.

[Setting value change processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the set value changing process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the setting value changing process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1621>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1621, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed, and if the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1621: Yes), the setting value change process ends. If the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1621: No), the process proceeds to step S1622. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag set to ON in step S1614 in the variation start process in FIG.

<Step S1622>
If the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1621: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game state is set (step S1622). If the symbol jackpot game state is set (step S1622: Yes), the set value is set. When the change process is completed and the game is not in the jackpot gaming state (step S1622: No), the process is shifted to step S1623. For example, whether or not the game is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1623>
If neither the symbol change display nor the jackpot game state is present (No in both steps S1621 and S1622), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1623), It is determined whether or not an operation of turning on the power of the set value display unit 45 is performed on the value change operation unit 46. That is, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is being performed (Step S1621: Yes) or the jackpot game state (Step S1622: Yes), the set value is not displayed and the set value cannot be changed. Here, when the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1623: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1624, and switches the power of the set value display unit 45 from off to on. If not (step S1623: NO), the process proceeds to step S1627.

<Steps S1624 to S1626>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1623: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1630 described below (step S1624). Then, a number indicating the read set value is displayed on the set value display section 45 (step S1625). As a result, the current setting value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the set value displaying flag indicating that the set value is displayed on the set value display section 45 to ON (step S1626), and ends the set value changing process.

<Step S1627>
If the power of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1623: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the set value display flag is set to on (step S1627). The set value display flag indicates that the set value is displayed on the set value display section 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1626. When the setting value displaying flag is set to ON (step S1627: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1628, and when the setting value displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1627: No). That is, when the power is not turned on while the set value display unit 45 is in the light-off state, the set value changing process ends.

<Step S1628>
If the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1627: YES), the MPU 41 determines whether the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1628). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a rotation operation for changing the set value has been performed. If the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1628: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1629, and if the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S1628: No), The process moves to step S1631.

<Step S1629>
When the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1628: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S1629). For example, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before the rotation, and vice versa. Then, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle, a number smaller than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 by one before the rotation is displayed.

  When the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is “6”, when the set value change operation section 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the set value change operation section 46 is displayed on the set value display section 45. Is changed to “1”, and if the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is “1”, the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle. The number displayed on the value display section 45 is changed to “6”. Further, when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is “6”, it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is “1”. Alternatively, it may not be rotated further to the left.

<Step S1630>
In step S1630, the MPU 41 overwrites and saves the number displayed on the set value display section 45 as the set value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and ends the set value changing process. As a result, when the power of the set value changing operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the set value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally set as a valid set value and the game information in the RAM 412 is finally set. It is stored in the storage area 412d. Therefore, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. Then, by turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 in a state where the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45, the set value can be determined.

<Step S1631>
When the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1628: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1631), that is, the setting value change. It is determined whether or not an operation to turn off the power of the setting value display unit 45 is performed on the operation unit 46. When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1631: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1632, and the power of the set value display unit 45 is not switched from on to off. In this case (step S1631: No), the setting value change processing ends. If the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1631: Yes), the set value display unit 45 indicates the set value by cutting off the power to the set value display unit 45. The number is turned off, and the set value is determined as described above.

<Steps S1632 and S1633>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (Step S1631: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the low-probability mode corresponding table according to the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in Step S1630. (See FIG. 7A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1632). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value displaying flag to off (step S1633), and ends the setting value changing process.

  Here, in step S1632, a low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) according to the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Is selected. In other words, since the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table select the success / failure table having the same set value, the operation of changing the set value is easy. However, the set value in the low probability mode and the set value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, for example, the setting value of a different stage (numerical value) between the low probability mode and the high probability mode is set such that the setting value of the low probability mode is “1” and the setting value of the high probability mode is “4”. It becomes possible to do.

[Performance information update process]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. Hereinafter, the specific performance information update processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

<Steps S1641 and S1642>
As shown in FIG. 21, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out-balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1641), and the number of out-balls reaches 60,000. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S1642). If the number of out-balls has reached 60,000 (step S1642: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1645. If the number of out-balls has not reached 60,000 (step S1642: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1642. The process moves to S1643.

<Steps S1643 and S1644>
If the number of out-balls has not reached 60000 (step S1642: No), the MPU 51 reads out the number of general payout-port payout balls and the number of first payout-port payout balls for base calculation of the base information (step S1648). Then, the MPU 51 determines the number of outgoing balls for base calculation of the base information read in step S1641, the number of general winning opening payout balls and the number of first winning opening payout balls for base calculation of the base information read in step S1643. Based on this, the current base BL is calculated, and the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is overwritten and updated (step S1644) (see FIG. 22A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (the number of general winning opening payout balls + the number of first winning opening payout balls) / the number of outgoing balls.

<Steps S1645 to S1648>
If the number of out-balls has reached 60,000 (step S1642: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1645-S1647). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the 60,000-ball base two times before in the base information (step S1645), and The BL is shifted to the previous 60,000-ball base B1 (step S1646), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1647). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of general winning opening payout balls, the number of first winning opening payout balls, and the number of outgoing balls for base calculation stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S1648). ).

<Step S1649>
When the processing in step S1644 or S1648 is completed, the MPU 51 reads out various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performance, and updates the other specific performance information to the calculated value (step S1649) ), And ends the specific performance information update processing. In this case, the specific performance is, for example, the number of lotteries per unit big hit, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
Here, FIGS. 23 to 26 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1661>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1661, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current status base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1666 described later or step S1690 in FIG. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1661: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1668 in FIG. 24, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1661: No) ) And the process moves to step S1662.

<Step S1662>
When the BL display flag is set to off (step S1661: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1662). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1672 in FIG. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1662: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1677 in FIG. 25, and if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1662: No). ) And the process moves to step S1663.

<Step S1663>
If the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1662: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1663). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 is displayed two times before on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1681 in FIG. When the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1663: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1686 in FIG. 26, and when the B2 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1663: No) ) And the process moves to step S1664.

<Step S1664>
If the B2 display-in-progress flag is set to off (step S1663: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1664). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1664: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1665, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1664: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends.

<Steps S1655-S1667>
When the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1664: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1665). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22A, “8.”, “L”, and “L” indicating that the current base BL is 29% "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. When the base information is an example shown in FIG. 22B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1666), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a fixed time (step S1667), and performs the display control process. To end.

<Steps S1668 and S1669>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1661: YES), as shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1667 of FIG. In step S1668, it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1669). When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1669: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1670, and when the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1669: No) ) And the process moves to step S1674.

<Steps S1670 to S1673>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1669: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1670), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000-ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1671). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22A, “8.” and “1” indicating that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 33% , "3", and "3" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “1”, “2”, and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1672), and sets a B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000-ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1673). The display control processing ends.

<Step S1674>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1669: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1674). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1674: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1675, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1674: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends. If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1674: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 to indicate the alphabet indicating the current base BL. And the number are turned off.

<Steps S1675 and S1676>
If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1674: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1675), and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1675). S1676), and ends the display control processing.

<Steps S1677 and S1678>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1662: Yes), as shown in FIG. 25, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1673 of FIG. In step S1677, it is determined whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1678). If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1678: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1679, and if the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1678: No) ) And the process moves to step S1683.

<Steps S1679 to S1682>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1678: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1679), and stores the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The 60,000-ball base B2 included two times before in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1680). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22A, "8.", "2." , "3", and "2" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1681), and sets a B2 display time counter corresponding to a certain time for displaying the 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S1682). Then, the display control process ends.

<Step S1683>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (Step S1678: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (Step S1683). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1683: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1684, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1683: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends. If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1683: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the previous 60,000-ball base B1 Are turned off.

<Steps S1684 and S1685>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1683: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1684), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1684). S1885), and ends the display control processing.

<Steps S1686 and S1687>
When the B2 display-in-progress flag is set to ON (step S1663: Yes), as shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1682 in FIG. In step S1686, it is determined whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1687). When the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1687: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1688, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1687: No) ) And the process moves to step S1692.

<Steps S1688 to S1691>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1687: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1688), and stores the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current state base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1689). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22A, “8.”, “L”, and “L” indicating that the current base BL is 29% "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. When the base information is an example shown in FIG. 22B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1690), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a fixed time (step S1691), and performs the display control process. To end.

<Step S1692>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1687: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1692). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1692: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1693, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1692: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends. When the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1692: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 is used two times before. Are turned off.

<Steps S1693 and S1694>
If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1692: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1693), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1693). S1694), and ends the display control processing.

[Process of Voice Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 51 in the audio ramp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Note that another or another embodiment in which part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 is also considered. Further, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes a control process of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, a startup process when the audio lamp control device 5 starts up, an NMI interrupt process when the power failure occurs, and the like. The description of those processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a cycle of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in the sub-timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 detects an operation button operation detection processing (step S1701), an operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1702), a selection button operation detection processing (step S1703), a selection operation detection Pattern determination processing (Step S1704), determination button operation detection processing (Step S1705), determination operation detection pattern determination processing (Step S1706), counter update processing (Step S1707), command determination processing (Step S1708), variable game effect processing ( (Step S1709), a jackpot game effect process (step S1710), and a game setting process (step S1711) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1701) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, a process for detecting the operation state of the operation button 20 and sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection processing is executed by the MPU 51, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interruption cycle of the sub timer interruption processing. Will be determined.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S1801, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S1802, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Thereafter, in step S1803, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag, and ends the operation detection processing.

  As described above, in the operation button operation detection processing, the processing states of steps S1801 to S1803 are executed, so that the operation states of the three most recent operations at 1 msec intervals as the operation history of the operation button 20 are the first detection flag to the third detection state. The flag is stored in the RAM 512. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the immediately preceding operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the immediately previous operation state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation button detection pattern judgment processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation button detection pattern determination process (step S1702) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation button detection pattern determination process, an operation for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag Set the pattern flag. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 30A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. When only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started. If only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been completed. If all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has not been performed.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S1901, the MPU 51 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1902 when the first operation detection flag is on (step S1901: Yes), and executes the processing when the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No). It moves to step S1905.

<Step S1902>
In step S1902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1903, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. It moves to step S1908.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 has been set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1904 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1903: Yes), and executes the processing when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1903: No). The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1904>
In step S1904, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times, and sets the second operation pattern The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 30A). The first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued.

<Step S1905>
If the MPU 51 determines in step S1901 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S1901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. A determination is made (step S1905). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1906 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1905: Yes), and executes the processing when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1905: No). The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1906: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1907. When the third operation detection flag is off (step S1906: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1907>
In step S1907, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times, and sets the first operation pattern The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 30A). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Or, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is not reflected on the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1908>
If the MPU 51 determines in step S1902 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on. (Step S1908). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1910 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1908: Yes), and executes the processing when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1908: No). It moves to step S1909.

<Step S1909>
In step S1909, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as three operation states of the operation button 20, and sets the first operation pattern The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 30A). The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been completed). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Or, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of the operation of the operation button 20 is not reflected on the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1910>
In step S1910, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. (See FIG. 30A). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state.

[Selection button operation detection processing]
In the selection button operation detection process (step S1703 in FIG. 27), the MPU 51 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 28, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the upper selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “up selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation histories of the past three times. Here, the lower selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 28, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the lower selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “lower selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation histories for the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 28, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the left selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “left selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 28, and thus detailed description is omitted. It should be noted that the right selection button operation process may be replaced with the “right operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1704 in FIG. 27), the MPU 51 performs the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, and the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing. Execute.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the upper selection button 211 based on the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 29, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “upper selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “upper selection operation pattern” Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 30B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times. When this occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing.

  The MPU 51 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” are generated as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times, and The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). Used.

  Further, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operation state.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the lower selection button from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the key 212 is set. Here, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 29, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “lower selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “lower selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 30C, in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 for three times. When this occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times, and The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times, and The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). Used.

  In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operation state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the 213 is set. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 29, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 29, the “operation detection flag” is set to “left selection operation detection flag”, and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “left selection operation pattern”. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 30D, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times. When this occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The first left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

  The MPU 51 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, and The first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, and The first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). Used.

  In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the left selection button 213 is not operated.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the operation 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 29, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “right selection operation detection flag”, and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “right selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 30 (E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times. When this occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

  The MPU 51 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, or “ON” occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 for three times, and The first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occur as the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times, and The first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). Used.

  In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the right selection button 214 is not operated.

[OK button operation detection process]
In the determination button operation detection processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the determination button operation detection processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 28, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the determination button operation detection process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “determination button operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Determination operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the operation state of the determination button 21B based on the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. Set an operation pattern flag for determining Here, the determination operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 29, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “determination operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 30 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 generates the operation patterns “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the three operation states of the determination button 21B. In this case, the first decision operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the determination button 21B is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occur as the operation states of the determination button 21B for three times, and performs the first determination. The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to off. The second determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been started). .

  Further, when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the determination button 21B for three times, the MPU 51 sets the third determination operation pattern flag to ON, and performs the first determination. The operation pattern flag and the second decision operation pattern flag are set to off. The third determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the determination button 21B has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been completed). .

  When an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the three operation states of the determination button 21B, the MPU 51 sets all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags. Set to off. When all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the determination button 21B is in the non-operation state.

[Counter update processing]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 27, in the counter update process (step S1707), the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter and the variation display counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the change type and the effect type based on the change pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 100. On the other hand, the MPU 51 decrements the variable display counter by one. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display unit 341. The counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is being changed, that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 has been completed, and the like. In the present embodiment, for example, the variation display counter determines whether or not the variation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 65A) in which the variation display of the main symbol on the symbol display unit 341 has been stopped in step S3401 of FIG. In this case, the process is referred to when determining whether or not the variable display of the main symbol has been started on the symbol display unit 341 in step S3501 in FIG. 69, step S3601 in FIG. 70, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the command determination process (step S1708 in FIG. 27). In the command determination processing, a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 31, in step S2001, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (Step S2001: Yes), the processing shifts to Step S2002. On the other hand, if no command has been received (step S2001: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in step S2001, and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when the command has been processed. For example, the command is stored in the processing work storage area. It is memorized.

<Step S2002>
In step S2002, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation pattern command. Here, if the command is a variation pattern command (step S2002: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S2003, and if the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2002: No), the processing proceeds to step S2006.

<Step S2003>
In step S2003, the MPU 51 determines a fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbol, fluctuation type and effect type) based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the change pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 32A), the change type table (see FIG. 32B), and the effect type table (see FIG. 32B) stored in the ROM 511 in advance. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512 and the values of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512 (see FIGS. 33A to 33C). Further, when the fluctuation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R certain variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R positive variable jackpot, Is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a main symbol that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is a second main symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the last stopped symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design that The effect type table includes a normal reach effect table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 33A), a super reach effect table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 33B), and a special reach effect table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 33B). FIG. 33C).

  FIG. 32A is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 32A, in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341 is determined. In FIG. 32A, a symbol combination indicating that the main symbol is “1” to “9” and “333” is a probable jackpot (either 5R probable jackpot or 16R probable jackpot), “777” "Is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and that the zoro eyes other than" 333 "and" 777 "are either a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, or a 16R probability variable jackpot. It is assumed.

  When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from a main symbol other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R regular jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stopped and displayed.

  Also, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, there is no “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from a main symbol other than “7”. That is, when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, the symbol combination of “777” indicating the 16R probability change hit is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of “333” indicating the 5R probability change jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even when the lottery result is “5R probable big hit”, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination “333” whose main symbol stop display result indicates a 5R normal big hit can be stopped and displayed. When the lottery result is “5R probable big hit” and the main symbol other than “3” other than “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the first promotion effect flag to ON. . The first promotion effect flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute a 5R certain-change promotion effect that clearly indicates a 5R certain-change big-hit in a state suggesting a 5R normal big-hit, as shown in FIG. Step S2103 in the game effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial tentatively selected song output process in FIG. 49, step S2701 in the tentatively selected song output process in FIG. 52, and step S2803 in the selected song output process in FIG. 53.

  In addition, when the lottery result is "16 probable jackpot", there is a distribution to all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop is performed at a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of “777” indicating the 16R probability change jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is "16R probable big hit", the main symbol stop display result indicates that the symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 5R probable big hit or 5R normal big hit is stopped. Can be done. When the lottery result is “16R probable big hit” and “3” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the second promotion effect flag to ON, and sets “3” as the first stop symbol. When the main symbol other than “7” is determined, the MPU 51 sets the third promotion effect flag to ON. The second promotion effect flag is referred to when judging whether or not to execute a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates a 16R probability change jackpot with a suggestion of a 5R probability change jackpot (the jackpot game of FIG. 34). Step S2106 in the effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial tentatively selected song output process in FIG. 49, step S2701 in the tentatively selected song output process in FIG. 52, and step S2803 in the selected song output process in FIG. 53). The third promotion effect flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute a 16R certain-change promotion effect that clearly indicates a 16R certain-change big hit in a state suggesting that it is a 5R normal big-hit (the big hit in FIG. 34). Step S2109 in the game effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial tentatively selected song output process in FIG. 49, step S2701 in the temporarily selected song output process in FIG. 52, and step S2803 in the selected song output process in FIG. 53).

  Then, when determining the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. Thereby, the stop symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated line of the symbol display unit 341 for the variable game is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is "out", there is a distribution to all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". Is done. If the lottery result is “missing” and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol selected based on the miss type table (FIG. 7D) and the first stop symbol determined previously. The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, in the case where the out-of-off type is out-of-reach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the disengagement type is reach other than disengagement, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. The pattern is determined. In addition, when the departure type is completely deviated, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined irrespective of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the audio lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 32B is a diagram illustrating an example of a fluctuation type table. As shown in FIG. 32 (B), in the variation type table, the content of the variation display time and the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, the fluctuation pattern command “A01” in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot” and the fluctuation pattern is “01” is associated with the fluctuation display time “30 s” and the fluctuation type “normal reach”. In addition, a fluctuation display time “60 s” and a fluctuation type “Super Reach” are associated with the fluctuation pattern command “B02” in which the lottery result is “5R probable big hit” and the fluctuation pattern is “02”. A fluctuation pattern command “C03” having a result “16 probable big hit” and a fluctuation pattern “03” is associated with a fluctuation display time “90 s” and a fluctuation type “special reach”. Further, the fluctuation pattern command “D04” in which the lottery result is “out” and the fluctuation pattern is “04” is associated with the fluctuation display time “7s” and the fluctuation type “no reach”. The fluctuation pattern command “D05” that is “out” and the fluctuation pattern is “05” is associated with the fluctuation display time “10 s” and the fluctuation type “no reach”.

  Furthermore, FIGS. 33A to 33C are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect type table. The effect type table is defined for each change type. FIG. 33 (A) is a normal reach effect table when the change type is normal reach, FIG. 33 (B) is a super reach effect table when the change type is super reach, and FIG. 33 (C) is It is a special reach effect table when the variation type is special reach. Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example where the effect types corresponding to each of the variation types are five, but the effect types may be six or more. In FIG. 33, the effect type table when the change type is no reach is omitted.

  In the normal reach effect table shown in FIG. 33 (A), in accordance with the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability change jackpot, 16R probability change jackpot, and miss), the effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter is “effect X1” to "Direction X5" is defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is normal reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the normal reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  In the super reach effect table shown in FIG. 33 (B), “effect Y1” to “effect Y5” are determined as effect types corresponding to the value of the effect type counter in accordance with the lottery result. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is super reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the super reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  Further, in the special reach effect table shown in FIG. 33C, "effect Z1" to "effect Z5" are determined as effect types corresponding to the value of the effect type counter in accordance with the lottery result. If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is special reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the special reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  Then, the MPU 51 sets a variation pattern command, a variation type table, a rendering type table, and a display variation pattern command indicating a variation symbol and a rendering type, which are determined based on the main symbol stop symbol combination determined based on the rendering type counter. Remember. This display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2005 described later. On the other hand, the display control device 6 that has received the display variation pattern command executes the symbol variation display and the effect display using the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command. The display variation pattern command may include information on the presence or absence of the jackpot.

<Step S2004>
Returning to the description of FIG. 31, in step S2004, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. The variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process (step S1707) of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27. Based on the variable display counter, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol variable display is being performed, and displays the variable display. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2005>
In step S2005, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the content of the stop symbol combination, the variation type, and the effect type of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341 and ends the command determination process. Let it. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the combination of the stop symbols, the variation type, and the effect type of the main symbol determined in step S2003. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a main symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command, an effect image, and the like. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the combination of the stop symbol of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses. Of the main symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed. When all the main symbols are stopped and the jackpot lottery result is displayed, a process corresponding to the symbol change display of the next variable game or the jackpot game is executed. Here, during the fluctuation display of the main symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the fluctuation type and the effect type specified by the display fluctuation pattern command are executed.

<Step S2006>
In step S2006, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The big hit game start command is a command indicating that a big hit game is started, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2006: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2007, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2006: No), the process proceeds. Shifts to step S2009.

<Step S2007>
When receiving the jackpot game start command, the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game effect determination process (step S2007). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the gaming state has shifted to the jackpot game state. The details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON. The jackpot game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether to execute the opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 35 described later (step S2201).

<Step S2009>
In step S2009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The big hit game end command is a command for ending the big hit game, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is turned off at the end of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, when the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S2009: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2010, and when the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2009: No), the processing is performed. Shifts to step S2011.

<Step S2010>
In step S2010, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON, for example, in step S2013 described below, and is referred to when determining whether to execute the ending effect end process in the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. (Step S2216).

<Step S2011>
In step S2011, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a hold command. The suspension command includes the first suspension command and the second suspension command as described above. The first hold command includes information for specifying a jackpot type or a miss, a change pattern, and the number N of change display reservations generated by winning the first winning opening 314. The second hold command includes information for specifying a jackpot type or a miss, a change pattern, and the number M of change display suspensions M generated by winning the second winning opening 315. Here, if the received command is a hold command (Step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S2012. If the received command is not a hold command (Step S2011: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S2013. Transition.

<Step S2012>
In step S2012, when the received hold command is the first hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or the outage, the change pattern, the number of holds N, and the like specified by the first hold command in the change type area of the RAM 512. . Similarly, when the received hold command is the second hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or the outlier, the change pattern, the number of holds M, and the like specified by the second hold command in the change type area of the RAM 512.

<Step S2013>
In step S2013, the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process. For example, the MPU 51 sets the opening / closing execution mode start flag to ON when receiving the opening / closing execution mode start command, and sets the opening / closing execution mode end flag to ON when receiving the opening / closing execution mode end command. In addition, the opening / closing execution mode start flag is referred to when deciding whether to end the opening effect and start the opening / closing execution mode effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 35 described later (steps S2206 to S2208). . On the other hand, the open / close execution mode end flag is referred to in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 35 described later when ending the open / close execution mode effect and determining whether to start the ending effect (steps S2212 to S2214). .

[Big hit game production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process (Step S2007 in FIG. 31). In the jackpot game effect determination processing, the effects executed in the jackpot game such as the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening / closing execution mode effect performed in the jackpot game are determined.

<Step S2101>
In step S2101, the MPU 51 determines an opening effect to be executed from the transition to the jackpot game to the start of the open / close execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect according to the symbol combination (or the first stop symbol) of the main symbol stopped and displayed, for example, based on the opening effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information of the determined opening effect type to the display control device 6 as an opening effect command. Here, as the opening effect, the MPU 51 specifies that the symbol combination is “777” and the 16R probable change jackpot, and that the symbol combination is “333” and the 5R probable change jackpot. If the suggested effect or the symbol combination is a slot other than “777” and “333”, the effect indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is determined. That is, the opening effect is determined not according to the jackpot type but according to the symbol combination (or the first stop symbol) of the stopped and displayed main symbol.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines an ending effect to be performed after the open / close execution mode ends and before the big hit game ends. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an ending effect according to the jackpot type based on, for example, an ending effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information of the determined ending effect type to the display control device 6 as an ending effect command.

  Here, the ending effect is to inform the player that the big hit game is finished after the opening / closing execution mode is finished. In the ending effect, for example, information such as a jackpot lottery result in the variable game that has led to the jackpot game (clearly indicating a game state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, in the ending effect, in the normal time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) or the normal non-time-saving game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode), the lottery result is a big hit. When the hit is a 5R probability change jackpot or a 16R probability change jackpot, an image that clearly indicates that the game is to be shifted to the probability change time short game state, which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In the case of a big hit, an image that clearly indicates that the game mode shifts to the normal non-time saving game state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates that the game state shifts to the probable change time saving game state is, for example, “OORUSH rush”. On the other hand, the image that clearly indicates the transition to the normal non-time saving gaming state is, for example, “entering a chance zone”, and the number of times of saving is displayed together. Further, in the ending effect in a case where the lottery result is a big hit in the probabilistic short time gaming state, an image that clearly indicates that the game is to shift to the probabilistic short time gaming state again is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates that the game mode is to shift to the probable change time reduction gaming state again is, for example, “continue XXRUSH”. In addition, the ending effect is an image showing the number of transitions to the certain-variable time-saving gaming state (for example, the number of RUSH continuations) with respect to one initial hit, and an image of a character appearing in the big hit effect in the variable game leading to the big hit game. The information may be displayed on the display unit 341. An image indicating the number of transitions to the certainty-saving time-saving gaming state or a character image is determined in step S2102.

  Further, in the ending effect, an image relating to payouts such as the number of payouts in the jackpot game and the total number of payouts in the extended villa is displayed on the symbol display section 341. In addition, the ending effect may be such as to display a confirmed image or the like that clearly indicates that a later-described holding villa is to be executed. These images are determined, for example, in step S2214 of the jackpot game rendering process described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first promotion effect flag is set to on. If the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2104, and the process proceeds to step S2104. If the 1 promotion effect flag is off (step S2103: No), the process proceeds to step S2106. The first promotion effect flag indicates that the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot during or after execution of the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect indicating that the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot. Is performed. In the first promotion effect flag, a symbol combination (a symbol combination other than “333” and “777”) indicating that the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot” and that the main symbol stop display result indicates a 5R normal jackpot is determined. In this case, it is set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect indicating a 5R normal big hit (5R normal big hit opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, the 5R normal big hit opening / closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 5R normal big hit opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the type information of the determined 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect to the display control device 6 as an opening / closing execution mode effect command.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 determines a 5R certainty change promotion effect. The 5R certain change promotion effect is determined based on, for example, a 5R certain change promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits the information of the determined type of the 5R certainty promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a certainty promotion effect command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second promotion effect flag is set to on. If the second promotion effect flag is on (step S2106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2107, and the process proceeds to step S2107. If the 2 promotion effect flag is OFF (step S2106: NO), the process proceeds to step S2109. The second promotion effect flag indicates that the lottery result is a 16R probability change jackpot during or after the execution of the 5R probability change jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect indicating that the lottery result is a 5R probability change jackpot. This indicates whether or not to execute. When the lottery result is “16R probable jackpot” and the symbol combination indicating the 5R regular jackpot or 5R probable jackpot is determined as the stop display result of the main symbol, the second promotion effect flag is determined by the command determination in FIG. It is set to ON in step S2003 in the processing.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests the 5R probability change jackpot (5R probability change hit opening / closing execution mode effect) as the effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, the opening / closing execution mode effect for the 5R probability change jackpot is determined based on the 5R probability changing jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits the type information of the determined 5R likelihood change jackpot open / close execution mode effect to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 determines a 16R promotion effect. The 16R promotion effect is determined based on the 16R promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the information of the type of the selected 16R promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a 16R promotion effect command.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third promotion effect flag is set to on. If the third promotion effect flag is on (step S2109: Yes), the process shifts to step S2110. If the 3 promotion effect flag is off (step S2109: No), the process proceeds to step S2112. The third promotion effect flag indicates whether the lottery result is a 16R certain-variable jackpot, which indicates that the lottery result is a 16R certain-variable big hit, during or after the 5R normal big-hit suggestion effect, which indicates that the lottery result is a 5R normal big-hit. No. When the lottery result is “16R probable jackpot” and a symbol combination indicating the 5R normal jackpot is determined as the stop display result of the main symbol, the third promotion effect flag is determined in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. Is set to on.

<Step S2110>
In step S2110, similarly to step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect indicating a 5R normal jackpot (5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode, and determines the determined 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution. The mode effect type information is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines a 16R certain change promotion effect. The 16R certain change promotion effect is determined based on, for example, a 16R certain change promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the information on the determined type of the 16R certain-change promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a 16R certain-change promotion effect command.

<Step S2112>
In step S2112, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 5R certain variable jackpot flag set to on in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to on. If the 5R certain variable jackpot flag is on (step S2112) : Yes), the process moves to step S2113, and if the 5R certain-variable-big-hit flag is off (step S2112: No), the process moves to step S2114.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, similarly to step S2107, the MPU 51 determines an effect indicating the 5R probability change jackpot (5R probability change jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect executed in the opening / closing execution mode, and determines the determined 5R probability change jackpot opening / closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an opening / closing execution mode effect command, and the 5R certain change big hit flag is set to off.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 16R certain variable jackpot flag set to on in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to on. If the 16R certain variable jackpot flag is on (step S2114) : Yes), the process proceeds to step S2115, and if the 16R certain-variable-big-hit flag is off (step S2114: No), the process proceeds to step S2116.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests the 16R probability-change jackpot (effect of opening and closing the 16R probability-change jackpot execution mode) as the effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, the opening / closing execution mode effect for the 16R certain-variable big hit is determined based on the 16R certain-variable big-hit opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined type information of the 16R certain-variable big hit opening / closing execution mode effect to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command, and sets the 16R certain variable big hit flag to OFF.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, similarly to step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect indicating a 5R normal jackpot (5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode, and determines the determined 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command, and the 5R normal big hit flag is set to off.

[Big hit game production process]
Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game rendering process (Step S1710 in FIG. 27). In the jackpot game effect process, the opening effect, the ending effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, and the like determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 34 are executed.

<Step S2201>
In step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to on in step S2008 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to on. If the jackpot game effect start flag is on ( Step S2201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2202, and if the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Steps S2202 and S2203>
If the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an opening effect start process (step S2202), and sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S2203). In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illuminator 27 to execute the sound effect and the lamp effect as the opening effect determined in step S2101 in FIG. A command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute an image effect is transmitted.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a so-called holding series is executed after the end of the jackpot game. The reservation consecutive cottage is a jackpot (5R) as hit information in any one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB when the jackpot game ends and the game state shifts to the time saving mode. This is executed when information indicating that there is a probable jackpot, a 16R probable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot is included. In other words, the holding series means that a jackpot game occurs within a variable game having the upper limit of the number of holdings M at the end of the jackpot game. For example, when the number of reservations M at the end of the jackpot game is 4, a case where a jackpot occurs in a variable game within four times is referred to as a hold series. Whether or not the hold series is executed can be determined, for example, by referring to the change type area of the RAM 512 and determining whether or not the jackpot type specified by the second hold command is stored.

  However, in step S2204, at the stage of starting the opening effect, the change type area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the holding extended villa is executed. That is, if the result of the jackpot lottery from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the opening / closing execution mode effect is a jackpot, it is not the target of determination of the reserved retreat in step S2204. Note that the start winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the opening / closing execution mode effect is suspended, for example, in an ending effect start process in step S2214 described later. In the case of executing the reserved extended-village determination effect by determining whether or not to perform the reserved extended-village determination effect that clearly indicates that the extended holiday is performed, in step S2102 of the jackpot game rendering determination process (see FIG. 34). In the determined ending effect, a reserved extended-village effect is executed.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 51 sets the hold extended-village flag to ON, and ends the jackpot game rendering process. The reserved consecutive cottage flag is determined in step S2904 and step S2906 of the music selection button effect processing of FIG. 54 to be described later by a 5R certain variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 57) or a 16R certain variable selection button effect lottery for determining the music selection button effect. Referenced when selecting a table (see FIG. 60). More specifically, the reserved consecutive villa flags are determined in steps S3003, S3008, S3013, and S3017 in the 5R sure variable selection button effect determination processing in FIG. Referenced in step S3118. In other words, in the held extended villa finalizing effect described later, the reserved extended villa finalizing effect is executed for the reserved extended villa where the result of the jackpot lottery before the opening effect is started is the big hit. It should be noted that the determination of the previous step S2204 is based on the steps S3003, S3008, S3013, and S3017 of the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination processing of FIG. It may be performed in S3117. In this case, since the determination as to whether or not the hold extended villa is executed is made at the stage of determining the music selection button effect, the hold extended villa at the lottery during the jackpot game is also the one until the music selection button effect is started. Since it is a target, the possibility that the reserved extended-village effect is executed is higher than in the case where it is determined whether or not the reserved extended-village is executed at the stage of starting the opening effect (step S2204). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved for the player who wants to know during the jackpot game that the reserved series is executed. In addition, the reserved extended villa effect may be executed in the ending effect as described above. In this case, the reserved extended villa finalizing effect is performed when the player has set not to execute the reserved extended villa finalizing effect as a music selection button effect (step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen process in FIG. 78 described later, or described later). It may be performed as a limited effect of the case where the holding extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON in step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen processing of FIG. 85. Thereby, even when the player has set the non-execution of the reserved extended-village confirmation effect, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the reserved extended-village is to be executed.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 determines whether the open / close execution mode start flag set to on in step S2013 of FIG. 31 is set to on, and if the open / close execution mode start flag is on (step S2206: Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S2207. If the open / close execution mode start flag is OFF (step S2206: No), the process proceeds to step S2212.

<Steps S2207 and S2208>
When the opening / closing execution mode start flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an opening effect ending process (step S2207), and executes an opening / closing execution mode effect start process (step S2208). That is, the MPU 51 ends the opening effect and starts the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in step S2104, S2107, S2110, S2113, S2115 or S2116 in the jackpot game effect determining process of FIG.

<Steps S2209 to S2211>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 executes a music selection image display process of displaying a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 37) for allowing the player to select a music output in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game effect. Next, the MPU 51 outputs the music (initial provisionally selected music image) corresponding to the provisionally selected music image 832 (initial provisionally selected music image) first displayed as the provisionally selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83. An output process is performed (step S2210). The tentatively selected music image 832 is selected by a player's determination operation on the determination button 21B from among a plurality of music (in this embodiment, 20 music) that can be output from the speaker 26 by the player's selection in the jackpot state as described above. It is an image which shows that it is a possible provisionally selected music piece. Further, the MPU 51 sets the opening / closing execution mode start flag to off (step S2211), and ends the big hit game rendering process. Details of the music selection image display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. The details of the initial provisionally selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2212>
In step S2212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode end flag set to on in step S2013 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to on. In step S2212, the process proceeds to step S2213. If the open / close execution mode end flag is OFF (step S2212: No), the process proceeds to step S2216.

<Step S2213>
When the open / close execution mode end flag is on (step S2212: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an open / close execution mode effect end process (step S2213). In the opening / closing execution mode effect ending process, the MPU 51 ends the execution of the image effect on the symbol display unit 341 and the output of the music from the speaker 26, for example.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
The MPU 51 executes the ending effect start process (step S2214), sets the open / close execution mode end flag to off (S2215), and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26 to start the ending effect determined in step S2102 (see FIG. 34) of the above-described jackpot game effect determination process. Note that, when the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display an image related to the number of balls to be played in the jackpot game or the total number of balls to be played in the extended game as the ending effect, the image related to the number of balls to be played before the ending effect is started. decide. In addition, when executing the reserved extended-village confirmation effect in the ending production, the MPU 51 displays the reserved extended-village confirmation image on the symbol display unit 341 before the ending production starts, outputs the reserved extended-village confirmation sound from the speaker 26, and the like. To determine the holding rendezvous.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect ending flag set to on in step S2010 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to on. If the jackpot game effect ending flag is on ( Step S2216: Yes), the process moves to step S2217, and if the big hit game effect end flag is off (step S2216: No), the process moves to step S2219.

<Steps S2217 and S2218>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an ending effect end process (step S2217), sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218), and sets the jackpot game. The production process ends.

<Steps S2219 and S2220>
In step S2219, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection processing flag set to on in step S2306 in the music selection image display processing of FIG. If it is on (step S2219: Yes), the music selection processing is executed (step S2220), and if the music selection processing flag is off (step S2219: No), the big hit game production processing ends. The details of the music selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Song selection image display processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection image display processing (step S2209 in FIG. 35). In the music selection image display processing, a music selection image 83 for allowing the player to select music output in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game effect is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 37). FIG. 37 is an example of a music selection image display screen 82 including a music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341. FIG. 37 shows a state in which an unselected song described later in the song selection image 83 is temporarily selected. In the following, an example of the music selection image display screen 82 will be described first with reference to FIG. 37, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 37, on the music selection image display screen 82, a music selection image 83, a selection determination section image 84, an operation explanation image 85, and a lyrics telop image 86 are displayed. It is not essential to display images other than the music selection image 83 on the music selection image display screen 82, and some or all of the images other than the music selection image 83 may not be displayed. Other images may be displayed in place of some or all of the other images.

  The music selection image 83 is for allowing the player to select music to be output by the speaker 26 from a plurality of music pieces (20 music pieces A to T in this embodiment) prepared in advance to be output from the speaker 26. It is. A prescribed number (“10” in the present embodiment) is provided in advance for the number of the music selection images 83 displayed on the symbol display section 341, and a part of the plurality of music (in this embodiment, 20 music) The music selection image 83 corresponding to (the ten songs in the middle) is displayed in a display area 837 preset in the symbol display unit 341. In other words, the number of the plurality of music pieces is larger than the number of the music piece selection images 83 (the total number of the selected music piece images 831, the temporarily selected music piece images 832, and the unselected music piece images 833). In FIG. 37, music pieces that are not displayed in the display area 837 among a plurality of music pieces are indicated by virtual lines (reference numeral 838 in the figure). In addition, the number of the plurality of songs that can be output in the jackpot game is larger than the display upper limit number of the plurality of songs prepared in advance to be output from the speaker 26. The number may be the same.

  The music selection image 83 includes a selected music image 831, a temporarily selected music image 832, and an unselected music image 833 displayed so as to be distinguishable from each other. Here, being distinguishable from each other is not limited to the case where the already selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 themselves can be distinguished. For example, the selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 have the same display mode, and these images 831, 832, and 834 are marked (for example, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 in FIG. 37). This also includes the case where the images can be distinguished from each other by adding an image.

  The already-selected music image 831 is an image indicating that the already-selected music has already been selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 37, the music selection images 83 for the music A, the music J, and the music D correspond to the selected music image 831. The tentatively selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the tentatively selected music image is a tentatively selected music piece that can be selected by a determination operation on the determination button 21B by the player. In the example of FIG. 37, the music selection image 83 for the music H corresponds to the tentatively selected music image 832. The unselected music image 833 is an image that is a music other than the already selected music and is an unselected music that has not been selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 37, the music selection images 83 for the music K, the music L, the music M, the music I, the music B, and the music C correspond to the unselected music images 833. However, as described later, an upper limit number (three in the present embodiment) is provided for the already-selected songs. It is processed not as a song but as an unselected song.

  In the music selection image 83, the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed by the player performing an operation on the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. Note that details of the already-selected music image 831, the temporarily-selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833, and details of an example of changing the temporarily-selected music image 832 by a player's operation on the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 will be described later. I do.

  Note that FIG. 37 shows a case where the selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the non-selected music image 834 are simultaneously displayed as the music selection image 83 for the sake of convenience. As described later, the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed in the music selection image 83 initially displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 38).

  These music images 831 to 833 (music selection images 83) are displayed in a display area 837 set on the left side of the symbol display unit 341. The display area 837 is set to, for example, １ ／ or less of the area of the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display unit 341, preferably １ ／ or less, more preferably １ ／ or less. Is set to the area of The display area 837 may be set in a part of the music selection image display screen 82, and does not necessarily have to be set on the left side of the music selection image display screen 82. It may be on the lower side or the like.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a music selection image is displayed on the entire or substantially entire area of a display screen. For example, there is an image in which a plurality of rectangular music selection images are displayed in a matrix over the entire area or substantially the entire area of the display screen. In such a conventional gaming machine, the open / close execution mode effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 cannot be visually recognized while the song selection image is displayed on the display screen, and the open / close execution mode effect performed while the song is selected. Can not enjoy.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the display area 837 is set to a part (the left side in the present embodiment) of the music selection image display screen 82. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, even when the music selection image 83 is displayed, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the opening / closing execution mode effect, and to enjoy the opening / closing execution mode effect even during music selection. Can be.

  In the display area 837, the already-selected music image 831, the tentatively-selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 are displayed vertically in this order. Specifically, in the music selection image 83, up to the third in the display area 837, the selected music image 831, the fourth is the tentatively selected music image 832, and the remaining six are the unselected music images 833. . In the music selection images 83 arranged in this manner, the tentatively selected music image 832 is displayed between the already-selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833. Note that the music selection image 83 is not limited to the display mode in which the plurality of music selection images 83 are vertically arranged in the display area 837, but may be a display mode in which the music selection images 83 are horizontally, diagonally, or in a matrix.

  The already-selected music image 831 is an image indicating that the already-selected music has already been selected by the player. The already-selected music image 831 includes a temporarily selected music image 832 and an unselected music image depending on the color, size, shape, and the like of the outline portion such as a frame, the character portion, the character background portion, the effect around the outline portion, and the like. It is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the selected music image 833. In addition, the upper limit number is predetermined for the number of the selected music images 831 in the music selection image 83. In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of the selected music image 831 is three. The upper limit is not limited to three, and may be one, but is preferably selected from two or more. However, the upper limit number of the selected music images 831 is determined in consideration of the number of images 831 to 834 displayed as the music selection images 83, ease of selection when selecting the selected music based on the selected music images 831, and the like. In this case, it is preferable to select from the range of 2 to 5.

  The selected music image 831 is given a display order (music order). In the present embodiment, the display order is made higher in the order of the newest music selection date and time, and the already-selected tune having the higher display order is displayed closer to the tentatively-selected music image 832 in the initial music selection image 83. In the example of FIG. 37, the selected music images 831 for the selected music, that is, the music A, the music J, and the music D, are displayed in the display area 837 at the third to highest positions in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83. ing. In other words, the song selection date and time of song A, song J and song D of the plurality of songs are new in this order. In the present embodiment, the already-selected music image 831 is displayed in a predetermined area while the music selection image 83 is displayed. Specifically, the already-selected music image 831 is fixedly displayed at the third position from the top in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83, and is displayed when the temporarily selected music image 832 described later is changed. Also, the position of the selected music image 831 does not change. However, when the already-selected music piece is provisionally selected, the music selection image 83 corresponding to the temporarily-selected music piece is displayed as the temporarily-selected music image 832 instead of the already-selected music image 831 as described later (FIG. 39 (A) to FIG. 39 (C)).

  The display order of the selected music image 831 may be given based on a condition other than the selection date and time, for example, the selection frequency. The selection frequency is, for example, the cumulative number of selections, the number of selections in the latest predetermined number (for example, 10), and the selection rate in the latest predetermined number of times. In the following, “selection frequency” is used in the same meaning.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined mark (in the example of FIG. 37, “good”) is attached to the side of the already-selected music image 831 to distinguish the temporarily selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833 from each other. Has been facilitated. However, the selected music image 831 only needs to be distinguishable from the tentatively selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833, and the predetermined mark may be omitted, or the already selected music image 831 may be temporarily selected. The display form may be the same as that of the music image 832 or the unselected music image 833 and may be distinguished only by the predetermined mark, and there is no limitation on the display form.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the image for the tentatively selected music piece is distinguishable from other music pieces, but the image for the tentatively selected music piece is displayed in the same manner, including music pieces selected in the past. . On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selected music image 831 for the selected music is distinguished from the unselected music image 833 for the unselected music. The selected music piece with the mark can be distinguished from the unselected music piece. This makes it possible to easily find the already-selected music piece and to easily perform the operation of selecting the already-selected music piece. When the display position of the selected music image 831 is set to a predetermined area and the temporarily selected music image 832 is displayed below and adjacent to the already selected music image 831, the player selects the music selection image 83. In this case, the most recently selected music piece can be easily found out by selecting the most recently selected music piece, and the most recently selected music piece can be selected again by operating the selection determining section 21. Furthermore, the display order is given to the selected music pieces, and the music pieces are displayed in the initial music selection image 83 at positions closer to the tentatively selected music image 832 in the descending order of display order. Will not be. Therefore, for example, when the same music piece is repeatedly selected and the user wants to select a selected music piece other than the music piece, the player can easily find the selected music piece to be selected. Thereby, the operation burden on the player when selecting the previously selected music piece again is reduced.

  In addition, as described later, in the present embodiment, a plurality of songs are selected for a single jackpot game during a predetermined song selection effective period (for example, a round game execution period of the first round of the open / close execution mode). Although it is possible, when a plurality of music selections are performed in one jackpot game, only the last selected music piece selected last is set as the already-selected music piece (step S2813 of the selected music piece output process in FIG. 53). ). When the number of selected songs is less than the upper limit number, for example, when the number of selected songs is 1 or 2, the number of selected song images 831 corresponding to the number of selected songs is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of the selected music pieces is 0, or when the player has set not to display the selected music piece image 831 as described later (step S4013 of the music list display setting screen processing in FIG. 75). Alternatively, if the selected music image non-display setting flag is set to ON in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing in FIG. 83), the selected music image 831 is not displayed. At this time, if the number of the selected music pieces is less than the upper limit number, the unselected music image 833 other than the non-selected music image 834 is displayed. Thus, even when the number of the selected music images 831 to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is less than the upper limit, the unselected music images 833 are displayed instead of the selected music images 831. The specified number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without excess or shortage.

  The tentatively selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the tentatively selected music image is a tentatively selected music piece that can be selected by a determination operation on the determination button 21B by the player. In the example of FIG. 37, the tune H is the tentatively selected tune, and the tentatively selected tune image 832 can be distinguished from the already-selected tune image 831 and the unselected tune image 833. A predetermined mark (in the present embodiment, an indicator image 835 of the character “temporary”) is attached to the tentatively selected music image 832, and a cursor image 836 for emphasizing that it is the tentatively selected music image 832. Is surrounded by

  The temporarily selected music image 832 may be any type as long as it can be distinguished from the already-selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833, and the predetermined mark may be omitted. The display mode may be the same as that of the music image 831 or the unselected music image 833, and only the predetermined mark may be used. There is no limitation on the display mode.

  Further, the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed in accordance with an operation performed by the player on the selection determining unit 21. In the present embodiment, when the selected music image 831 is displayed, a predetermined area, that is, the selected music image 831 is displayed at the third to highest positions in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83. Therefore, the manner of changing the temporarily selected music image 832 differs between the case where the already selected music is temporarily selected and the case where the unselected music is temporarily selected. Here, FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of an initial display of the music selection image 83, and FIGS. 39A to 39C are diagrams illustrating a modification example of the temporarily selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83. It is. 38 and FIGS. 39 (A) to 39 (C) show only the display area 837 in the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display unit 341.

  As shown in FIG. 38, when temporarily selecting music from unselected music, the lower selection button 212 is operated. By doing so, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are kept as they are, and the unselected music image 833 is scrolled downward. In the example shown in FIG. 38, by operating the lower selection button 212, the tentatively selected music is changed in a loop of music P → music T → music S → ... → music F → music E → music P. . In addition, when the desired unselected song is provisionally selected, by operating the determination button 21B, the unselected song can be output from the speaker 26 as the selected song.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341 first, in the music loop when the music is temporarily selected from the non-selected music, the non-selected music (non-selected music image 834) is displayed. ) Are located farthest from the initial temporarily selected music image 832 (the initial temporarily selected music).

  On the other hand, when temporarily selecting a music piece from the already selected music pieces, the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 is operated. Specifically, first, by operating the upper selection button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. 38, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are changed from the music selection image 83 for the music P as shown in FIG. The program moves to the music selection image 83 for the music A displayed immediately above the music P. Thereby, the music selection image 83 for the music P is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the unselected music image 833, while the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. Is done. Further, by performing an operation on the determination button 21B, it is possible to select the tentatively selected song A (the already-selected song).

  By operating the upper selection button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. 39A, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are changed from the music selection image 83 for the music A to the music J as shown in FIG. Move to the music selection image 83 for. Thereby, the music selection image 83 for music A is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the already selected music image 831, while the music selection image 83 for music J is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. Is done. Further, by performing an operation on the determination button 21B, it is possible to select a tentatively selected song J (selected song).

  Similarly, by operating the upper operation button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. 39 (B), the music selection image 83 for the music J is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the music selection image as shown in FIG. 39 (C). While being changed to the image 831, the music selection image 83 for the music D is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. Thus, by performing an operation on the enter button 21B, it is possible to select the tentatively selected music D (the already selected music). Even if the upper selection button 211 is operated from the state shown in FIG. 39C, the temporarily selected music image 832 is not changed, and the state where the music D is temporarily selected is maintained.

  On the other hand, by operating the lower operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 39B or 39C, the indicator image 835 and the indicator image 835 are displayed as shown in FIG. 39A or FIG. The cursor image 836 moves to the music selection image 83 corresponding to the music immediately below, and the tentatively selected music is changed. By operating the enter button 21B, the tentatively selected music A or music J is selected. It becomes possible to do.

  By operating the lower operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 39 (A), the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 move to the music selection image 83 corresponding to the music P which is the unselected music immediately below. While moving, the tentatively selected song is changed. Thus, as described with reference to FIG. 38, the user operates the lower selection button 212 to temporarily select a song from among the unselected songs, and operates the determination button 21B to select the unselected song. It can be output from the speaker 26.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine such as the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment in which a music to be output during a jackpot game can be selected from a plurality of music. The number of selectable songs in the jackpot game varies depending on the model, but some of them can select songs to be output during the special game from 20 or more songs. When the number of selectable songs is large, the range of song selection becomes large, so that not only can various songs be enjoyed, but also the possibility that a song that matches the taste of the player is included increases. Therefore, in gaming machines that allow users to select songs during a jackpot game, the player can listen to various songs and let the player find their favorite songs, thereby increasing the attention to the jackpot game and the interest in special games By doing so, the willingness to play can be improved.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the image for the tentatively selected music is displayed separately from the images for other tunes. However, the images for the non-selected songs that are not selected by the player in spite of being displayed are displayed without distinction from each other. This makes it difficult to find the target song if you want to repeatedly select the player's favorite song or want to listen to the previously selected song again, even if you can find the target song. By the time you are involved. The difficulty of finding such a target song increases as the number of selectable songs increases. There are also gaming machines in which a period during which a song output during a jackpot game can be selected (song selection valid period) is set. For example, there is a gaming machine in which the music selection validity period is limited to a time when an opening effect in a jackpot game or a first round of a round game (opening / closing execution mode) ends. In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to search for the target music within a limited period which is not so long, so that it becomes more difficult to find the target music. In addition, when the selection of the target music in the jackpot game is bothersome and difficult, there is a concern that the player may not perform the music selection in the jackpot game. In this, we will prepare a plurality of songs and let the player select a song and listen to various songs, and also let the player find the favorite song to improve the attention and interest in the jackpot game The purpose of improving the willingness to play is buried.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the music selection image 83 for allowing the player to select a music, the already-selected music that has already been selected by the player is selected. The music image 831 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 so as to be distinguishable from the unselected music image 833. As described above, since the selected music image 831 can be distinguished from the unselected music image 833, the player can select a previously selected music that has been selected before from the music selection image 83. , The selected music can be provisionally selected based on the selected music image 831 and selected. Specifically, the player operates the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 of the selection deciding unit 21 while checking the position of the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83, so that the selected music is selected. It can be temporarily selected and displayed as a temporarily selected music image 832. In this state, by operating the determination button 21B, the selected music can be output again from the speaker 26 as the selected music. Therefore, when the player wants to repeatedly select a favorite song or wants to listen to a previously selected song again, the player can easily find the selected song even if the number of selectable songs is large. Can be. In addition, it is possible to efficiently select the previously selected music piece and output the selected music piece from the speaker 26 with a small number of operations on the selection determining section 21.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the tentatively selected tune image 832 is displayed between the selected tune image 831 and the unselected tune image 833 in the tune selection image 83, and the tentatively selected tune image 832 is displayed as the tentatively selected tune image 832. Both the image 831 and the unselected music image 833 are displayed adjacent to each other. Therefore, the player changes the tentatively selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, thereby selecting the previously selected music that has been selected before and the previously selected music. Even when selecting any of the unselected songs that have not been performed, the target song can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. As a result, the gaming machine 10 corresponds to various types of players, such as a player who tends to repeatedly select an already-selected music piece and a player who tends to select an unselected music piece. The target music can be selected with a small number of operations.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 37, the unselected music image 833 is an image indicating that it is a music other than the already-selected music. In the example of FIG. 37, music K, music L, music M, music I, music B, and music C are unselected music. The unselected music image 833 is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the already selected music image 831 and the temporarily selected music image 832. The unselected music image 833 includes a non-selected music image 834 indicating that it is a non-selected music. The non-selected tune is a tune that has not been selected by the player even though it was initially displayed as the tentatively selected tune image 832 in the tune selection image 83. In the example of FIG. 37, the music I, the music B, and the music C are non-selected music. The non-selected music image 834 includes, for example, an outline portion such as a frame, a character portion, a character background portion, a color, a pattern, and a pattern, and a color, a size, and a shape of an effect around the outline portion. The non-selected music image 834 is displayed so as to be distinguishable. In the present embodiment, a predetermined mark (in this embodiment, the character “dislike”) is attached to the side of the non-selected music image 834, so that it is easy to distinguish the non-selected music image 834. However, the non-selected music image 834 only needs to be distinguishable, and the predetermined mark may be omitted, or the image may be distinguished only by the predetermined mark. Absent.

  In addition, an upper limit number is predetermined for the number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83. In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of the non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 is three. Note that the upper limit number of the non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 may be other than 3 as in the case of the already-selected music image 831. When the number of unselected songs is less than the upper limit number, for example, when the number of unselected songs is 1 or 2, the number of unselected song images 834 corresponding to the number of unselected songs is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of non-selected music pieces is 0, or when the player has set not to display the non-selected music piece image 834 as described later (step S4013 of the music list display setting screen processing in FIG. 75, Alternatively, when the non-selected music image non-display setting flag is set to ON in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing in FIG. 83), the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed. If the number of unselected songs is less than the upper limit when displaying the unselected song images 834, the unselected song images 833 other than the unselected song images 834 are displayed for the shortage. As described above, even when the number of the non-selected music images 834 to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is less than the upper limit, the non-selected music images other than the non-selected music image 834 are used instead of the non-selected music images 834. By displaying the image 833, the specified number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without excess or shortage.

  The selection deciding section image 84 is an image imitating the selection deciding section 21, and indicates that the temporarily selected music can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. The operation explanation image 85 indicates that the temporarily selected music can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, and that the temporarily selected music can be determined as the music to be output from the speaker 26 by operating the determination button 21B. Things. The lyrics telop image 86 displays the lyrics of the tentatively selected tune output from the speaker 26 or the tune selected by the player in accordance with the output of the tune. However, the selection determination section image 84, the operation explanation image 85, and the lyrics telop image 86 are not essential images, and all or some of them may be omitted.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which music is selected using the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212. In addition to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213 and a right selection button The music may be selected using the 214. For example, the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are used to select music from unselected music, and the left selection button 213 and right selection button 214 are used to select music from already selected music. Is also good. In this case, for example, by operating the upper selection button 211, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are kept as they are, the unselected music image 833 is scrolled upward, and by operating the lower selection button 212, The selected music image 833 is scrolled downward, and the music selection image 83 moved to the position of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 is changed from the unselected music image 833 to the temporarily selected music image 832. On the other hand, when the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 move upward or downward, and the music selection image 83 for the already-selected music becomes the temporary selection music image 832. It may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the display position of the selected music image 831 is predetermined, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 40, the operation of the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 leaves the selected music image 831 unselected. The selected music image 833 may be scrolled in the upward direction A1 or the downward direction A2. In this way, compared to the case where the temporarily selected music is changed by the method described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, the selected music and the unselected music can be used without using the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 properly. Since the music can be provisionally selected from any of the selected music, the operability in the case of temporarily selecting the music is improved. As shown in FIG. 40, even when the selected music image 831 is scrolled in the upward direction A1 or the downward direction A2 together with the unselected music image 833 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, first, In the music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display section 341, it is preferable that the non-selected music (non-selected music image 834) is arranged at a position farthest from the initial provisional selection music image 832 (initial provisional selection music).

<Steps S2301 and S2302>
Returning to the description of the music selection image display processing in FIG. 36, first, in S2301, the MPU 51 creates a selected music list in order to display the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 also creates a non-selected music list (step S2302). The already-selected music list and the non-selected music list are referred to when creating an initial arrangement order data table (see FIG. 43) for the music selection image 83 described later, and are stored in, for example, the RAM 512 shown in FIG. It can be created from the music selection counter data table.

  Here, FIG. 41 is an example of a song selection counter data table for a plurality of songs that can be output from the speaker 26 in a jackpot game effect. As shown in FIG. 41, the music selection counter data table includes a selection counter, history data on the selected music, and history data on the non-selected music. In the music selection counter data table, the music for which the selected flag is set to off is data relating to the unselected music, and the data for which the non-selection flag is set to on is the non-selected music. It is data about. This music selection counter data table is updated by a music selection counter data update process of FIG. 62 described later. Details regarding updating of the music selection counter data table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63.

  The selection number counter is selected by the player as the music to be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game effect from a predetermined starting point (for example, when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) to the present, for the 20 music pieces of the music pieces A to T. It shows the number of selections made. In the present embodiment, the music rank of the selected music piece is determined based on the selection date and time. However, when the music rank of the selected music piece is determined by the selection frequency, the music rank is determined with reference to the selection frequency counter. .

  The history data relating to the selected music includes music ranking data for each of the music A to music T and a selected flag.

  The music piece ranking data specifies the display position of the selected music piece image 831. The music piece ranking data is assigned a younger rank in order of the date and time of the most recently selected music piece, and the display rank is made higher. Specifically, the display order of the selected songs is assigned the first to third ranks for the top three songs, and the remaining songs are not ranked. In the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 41, "1", "2", or "3" is described according to the display order, and "0" is shown when there is no order. That is, the display order of the already-selected music pieces is such that the first place is the music piece A, the second place is the music piece J, the third place is the music piece D, and the remaining pieces of music other than the music pieces A, J and D have no rank. If there is no song corresponding to the top three songs (in a state where no song is selected), all the songs are not ranked. If the top three songs are two songs, only the first and second places are determined without determining the third place. Similarly, if the top three songs are one song, Only the first place is determined without determining the second and third places.

  The already-selected flag is a flag indicating whether or not to be displayed as the already-selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 determines that any one of the first to third display ranks is assigned in the music selection counter data update processing of FIG. It is determined that the already-selected flag is set to off for a song having no. Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data relating to the selected music in the music selection counter data table, and displays the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83 as shown in FIG. Create a list of selected songs.

  On the other hand, the history data relating to the non-selected music pieces includes music ranking data and non-selection flags for each of the music pieces A to T.

  The music rank data specifies the display position of the non-selected music image 834, and the rank is assigned in ascending order of date and time that was not selected most recently, and the display rank is increased. As the display order of the non-selected songs, the first to third ranks are assigned to the top three songs, and the remaining songs are not ranked. In the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 41, the display order of the non-selected music is as follows: music C is first, music B is second, music I is third, and music other than music C, music B, and music I The remaining songs have no ranking. If there is no song corresponding to the top three songs, all songs are ranked without. If the top three songs are two songs, only the first and second places are determined without determining the third place. Similarly, if the top three songs are one song, Only the first place is determined without determining the second and third places.

  The non-selection flag is a flag indicating whether or not to be displayed as the non-selected music image 834 on the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 determines that any one of the first to third display ranks is assigned in the music selection counter data update processing of FIG. 62 to be described later, and sets the non-selection flag to ON for the music. It is determined that the already-selected flag is set to off for a song having no. Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data regarding the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table, and according to the music ranking data, displays the non-selected music image 834 in the music selection image 83 as shown in FIG. 42 (B). Create a non-selected song list.

  Note that the MPU 51 may assign younger rankings to the selection data (for example, the cumulative number of selections or the selection rate at a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) from the latest) in the history data regarding the selected music and the non-selected music. The display order may not be limited to three songs as in the illustrated example, but may be another number. For example, priorities may be assigned to all songs.

<Step S2303>
Returning to the description of FIG. 36, in step S2303, the MPU 51 determines an initial provisional music piece (initial provisional selection music piece) when the music selection image 83 is first displayed on the symbol display section 341 after the transition to the jackpot game. Execute the selected music determination process. Details of the initial provisionally selected music piece determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2304 and S2305>
When the initial provisionally selected music piece determination processing in step S2303 has been completed, the MPU 51 stores the initial provisionally selected music piece determined in step S2303 in the RAM 512 (step S2304), and executes an initial music selection image display processing (step S2305). The initially provisionally selected music stored in step S2304 is referred to when it is determined whether or not the initially provisionally selected music has been selected in step S3202 in the music selection counter data updating process of FIG. 62 described below. Further, in the initial music selection image display processing in step S2305, the MPU 51 determines an initial arrangement for a plurality of music pieces and transmits initial arrangement order data relating to the initial arrangement to the symbol display unit 341. The initial arrangement is determined based on, for example, the already-selected music list table shown in FIG. 42A, the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 42B, and the initial provisionally selected music determined in step S2303 in FIG. You.

  Here, FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of an initial arrangement order data table regarding the initial arrangement order for a plurality of songs for displaying the song selection image 83, and FIG. 44 is an example of the initial arrangement of the song selection image 83. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the initial array order data table is a table of the initial array order data, and includes array order data relating to the initial array order and additional data.

  The arrangement order data defines the initial arrangement order for a plurality of music pieces A to T. The initial arrangement order is from the first place to the twentieth place, and the first to third places are assigned to the already-selected music pieces, and the eleventh to thirteenth places are assigned to the non-selected music pieces. Specifically, the first to third places in the initial arrangement order are respectively assigned to the third, second, and first places in the already-selected music list order in the already-selected music list table shown in FIG. . According to the order of the already-selected music list table shown in FIG. 42A, the first to third places of the initial arrangement order are respectively assigned to the music D, the music J, and the music A. The eleventh to thirteenth ranks of the initial arrangement rank are respectively assigned to the first, second, and third ranks of the non-selected music ranking in the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. According to the order of the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 42 (B), music I, music B and music C are assigned to the eleventh to thirteenth ranks of the initial arrangement order, respectively. In addition, the fourth place of the initial arrangement order is assigned to the tentatively selected music piece. The example illustrated in FIG. 43 indicates that the music piece P has been determined as the temporarily selected music piece in step S2303 in FIG. The 5th to 10th and 14th to 20th places of the initial arrangement order are assigned to unselected songs other than the non-selected songs. Then, unselected songs other than the non-selected songs are assigned in ascending order of the song number to the younger one of the fifth to tenth and the fourteenth to twentieth. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the song E is in the fifth position in the song ranking, the song F is in the sixth position in the song ranking, the song G is in the seventh position in the song ranking, the song H is in the eighth position in the song ranking, and the song K is the fifth in the song ranking. The tune 9 is in the ninth place, the tune L is in the 10th place in the tune rank, the tune M is in the 14th place in the tune rank, the tune N is in the 15th place in the tune rank, the tune O is the 16th place in the tune rank, and the tune Q is The song R is assigned to the song ranking 17th, the song R is assigned to the song ranking 18th, the song S is assigned to the song ranking 19th, and the song T is assigned to the song ranking 20th.

  On the other hand, the additional data includes music type data indicating whether the music is a selected music, a tentatively selected music, a non-selected music, and an unselected music other than the non-selected music, and a non-display setting for the selected music and the non-selected music. Includes data indicating whether the flag is set to ON or OFF. Here, the non-display setting flags for the selected music piece and the non-selected music piece are displayed in the same manner as the unselected music piece image 833 other than the non-selected music piece image 834 for each of the selected music piece image 831 and the non-selected music piece image 834. This is a flag that is set to ON when display is set by the player. In the present embodiment, the non-display setting flag is a non-selected music image, and the selected music image non-display setting flag that displays the selected music image 831 in the same display mode as the unselected music image 833. A non-selected music image non-display setting flag that is displayed in the same display manner as the unselected music image 833 other than 834 is included. The selected music image non-display setting flag and the non-selected music image non-display setting flag are set in step S4013 of the music list display setting screen processing shown in FIG. 75 described later or in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing shown in FIG. Is set to on.

  In the example of FIG. 43, based on the additional data, the MPU 51 determines that the music A, the music J, and the music D are the selected music, that the non-display flag for the selected music is set to off, the music M, It is possible to specify that the music I and the music B are non-selected music, that the non-display flag for the already-selected music is set to off, and that the music P is a temporarily selected music.

  Then, according to the initial arrangement order shown in FIG. 43, the initial arrangement for a plurality of music pieces is in the order shown in FIG. 44. Displayed in a simple manner. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit number of the music selection images 83 displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 is 10, the music selection images 83 for the first to tenth music in the initial arrangement order are displayed. You. Since the non-display flag for the selected music piece is set to off, the music selection image 83 is displayed as including the selected music image 831. The unselected songs are initially arranged at the farthest position from the tentatively selected song because the initial arrangement order is assigned from the 11th to the 13th. That is, when creating the initial arrangement order data, the MPU 51 arranges the non-selected songs at the position where the minimum number of operations on the selection button 21A necessary for making the non-selected songs the temporarily selected songs is the largest. Further, the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the non-selected music is not displayed when the music selection image 83 is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and the lower selection button 212 is operated by the player and the unselected music is not displayed. The image 833 is displayed by scrolling.

  In the present embodiment, the selected songs are assigned to the first to third places of the initial arrangement order, and the non-selected songs are assigned to the 11th to 13th positions of the initial arrangement order. There is no need to combine the number of selected songs into one place, and similarly, it is not necessary to combine the upper limit number of non-selected songs into one place. For example, as shown in FIG. , And an upper limit number of non-selected songs may be discretely assigned. In the example shown in FIG. 46, a plurality of music pieces are arranged with the music numbers as they are, and the initial arrangement order of the plurality of music pieces is determined such that the initial arrangement order of the music piece P determined as the tentatively selected music piece is fourth. Have been.

<Step S2306>
Returning to the description of FIG. 36, in step S2306, the MPU 51 sets the music selection processing in-progress flag to ON, and ends the music selection image display processing. For example, the music selection processing flag is referred to when determining whether or not to continue the music selection processing (step S2219 in the jackpot game rendering processing in FIG. 35) and whether or not the music selection effective period has elapsed (FIG. 35). Step S2608 in the music selection process of No. 51).

[Initial tentative selection music determination processing]
Here, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the initial provisionally selected song determination processing (step S2303 in FIG. 36). In the initial tentatively selected music piece determination process, the initial tentatively selected music piece corresponding to the initial tentatively selected music piece image 832 to be displayed first as the tentatively selected music piece image 832 of the music selection image 83 is determined based on the value obtained from the tentatively selected music piece lottery counter. decide.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
The MPU 51 acquires the value of the initial provisionally selected music lottery counter to select the initial provisionally selected music piece (step S2401), and refers to the provisionally selected music lottery table and corresponds to the value of the provisionally selected music lottery counter acquired in step S2401. The music to be performed is provisionally determined as the initial provisionally selected music (step S2402).

  FIG. 48 is an example of the tentatively selected music lottery table. As shown in FIG. 48, the temporary selection music lottery table associates the values of the temporary selection music lottery counters with the music pieces A to T. For example, when the value of the acquired initial provisionally selected song lottery counter is “0”, the MPU 51 tentatively determines the music A as the initial provisionally selected song, and the acquired value of the obtained initial provisionally selected song lottery counter is “88”. In the case of, the music I is provisionally determined as the initial provisionally selected music, and if the acquired value of the initial provisionally selected music lottery counter is “155”, the music P is provisionally determined as the initial provisionally selected music.

<Steps S2403 and S2404>
Returning to the description of FIG. 47, in step S2403, the MPU 51 determines whether the music provisionally determined as the initial temporarily selected music is a selected music or a non-selected music (disliked music), that is, whether the music is an unselected music. If the tentatively determined tune is a selected tune or a non-selected tune (if it is not an unselected tune) (step S2403: Yes), the initial tentatively selected tune is determined without determining the initial tentatively selected tune. The determination processing ends. That is, in the next sub-timer interruption process (see FIG. 27), the MPU 51 executes the initial provisionally selected music determination process again, and tries to determine the initial provisionally selected music. On the other hand, if the temporarily determined music is not a selected music or a non-selected music (unselected music) (step S2403: No), the MPU 51 determines the music temporarily determined in step S2402 as the initial temporarily selected music. Then (step S2404), the initial provisionally selected song determination processing ends. For example, whether or not the selected music piece or the non-selected music piece can be determined by referring to the music selection counter data table (see FIG. 41) and determining whether the selected flag or the non-selection flag is set to ON. In the example of FIG. 41, when the music piece temporarily determined by the lottery in step S2402 is the music piece A, the music piece D, or the music piece J, it is determined that the music piece is the already-selected music piece, and the music piece that is temporarily determined is the music piece B If it is C or music I, it is determined to be a non-selected music. By this, until the music other than the selected music (music A, music D, and music J) and the non-selected music (music B, music C, and music I) are determined as the initial tentatively selected music (step S2403: No), The initial provisionally selected song determination processing is repeatedly performed.

  By the way, the already-selected music is a music that the player has previously listened to by selection by the player, and the non-selected music is a music that the player has previously listened to by being output as an initial temporarily selected music. It is. When the initial tentatively selected music piece is determined from the already-selected music piece or the non-selected music piece, the music piece that the player has listened to before is output, so that the opportunity for the player to listen to the unselected music piece is reduced. In addition, the non-selected music is a music that the player has not previously selected, and if such a music is output again as the initial tentatively selected music, the player may have a feeling of disgust, and the jackpot game may be sufficiently performed. Can not entertain.

  In contrast, in step S2403, a lottery of the initial provisionally selected music is performed until a music other than the already-selected music and the non-selected music is selected. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player. Can give an opportunity to communicate. In addition, the player is bothered by the fact that a song that was previously selected as a tentatively selected song in step S2404 but was not selected by the player is selected again in step S2404 and displayed as the tentatively selected song image 832. You will be free from it.

  It should be noted that when a non-display setting described later is made by the player for the already-selected music image 831 (step S4013 in the music list display setting screen processing in FIG. 75 or step S4413 in the music list display setting history screen processing in FIG. 83). , The non-display setting flag is set to ON), the music piece including the already-selected music piece may be selected as the initial provisionally selected music piece. Similarly, when the non-display setting is made by the player for the non-selected music image 834, the music including the non-selected music may be selected as the initial temporarily selected music. That is, the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 may not be selected as the initial tentatively selected music only when those images 831 and 834 are displayed as the music selection image 83. .

[Initial temporary selection music output processing]
Here, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the initial provisionally selected music piece output processing (step S2210 in FIG. 35). In the initial provisionally selected music output process, when the temporarily selected music image 832 is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341 after the transition to the jackpot game, the initial provisionally selected music corresponding to the initial provisionally selected music image 832 is output from the speaker 26. Processing. In this initial tentatively selected tune output process, the initially tentatively selected tune is normally output from the speaker 26 in a melody pattern of default settings. The melody pattern defines an output start portion when music is output from the speaker 26.

  Here, FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a melody pattern table in which default settings of melody patterns are determined for each of a plurality of songs (songs A to T) for each of the tentatively selected song and the selected song. In the example of the melody pattern table shown in FIG. 50, a melody pattern 1 and a melody pattern 2 are defined as melody patterns. In the melody pattern 1, the basic unit is “A melody (starting singing part) → B melody → chorus part”, the output of music starts from the A melody (starting singing part), and the basic unit is repeatedly output. That is, in the case of melody pattern 1, "A melody (starting singing part) → B melody → chorus part → A melody (starting singing part) → B melody → chorus part → A melody (starting singing part) → ..." Becomes It should be noted that the basic unit of the melody pattern 1 may further include an intro part (prelude part), that is, “intro part (prelude part) → A melody (starting singing part) → B melody → chorus part”. Can be In this case, the output start of the melody pattern 1 is not the A melody (song start portion) but the intro portion. The melody pattern 2 has a basic unit of “chorus portion → A melody (starting singing portion) → B melody”, the output of music starts from the chorus portion, and the basic unit is repeatedly output as in the melody pattern 1. In the tentatively-selected tune including the initial tentatively-selected tune, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that all of the tunes A to T are set to the melody pattern 2, that is, the output start from the chorus portion. In the tentatively selected tune, the melody pattern 2 is the default setting for all of the tunes A to T, but the melody pattern 1 may be the default setting for some or all of the tunes. The default setting of the melody pattern of the selected music will be described later in the selected music output processing of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a melody pattern different from the default setting can be set by the player as described later with respect to the output of the temporarily selected music including the initial temporarily selected music (the melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. 73). 81, or the melody pattern setting history screen processing in FIG. 81), when a melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the speaker 26 in the melody pattern set by the player. You.

  Further, in the initial tentatively selected music output process, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the big hit game effect), a melody pattern is randomly selected. May cause inconsistency in the melody pattern of the initial tentatively selected song. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default, the output start portion of the initial temporarily selected song is a rust portion, and if the promotion effect flag is set to ON, the output start of the initial temporarily selected song is started. The part may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, a music start part (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing start part)). Note that randomly selecting a melody pattern is equivalent to performing a contradictory output lottery (step S2804 of the selected music output process in FIG. 53 described later).

  When the output contradiction (contradiction of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the initial provisionally selected song occurs, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is output as the initial provisionally selected song. It is determined that the result is more advantageous for the player than the result suggested before. Therefore, at the time when the output contradiction (contradiction of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the initial provisionally selected music piece occurs, for example, the current gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot gaming state. It can be known that the game state is any of the gaming state and the 16R probability variable jackpot game state, or that the 16R probability variable jackpot game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variable jackpot game state.

  By the way, there is no conventional gaming machine that causes inconsistency in the melody pattern when the initial provisionally selected music is output. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine cannot make the player interested in the effect of outputting the initial provisionally selected music. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp in advance that the promotion effect will be executed by the fixed effect in which the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music piece has a contradiction. Therefore, the player can check whether the fixed effect is executed by paying attention to the melody pattern of the initial tentatively selected music, and even if the effect is not interested in the player with the conventional gaming machine, Since the effect can be noticed, the player can enjoy the jackpot game effect. On the other hand, whether or not a melody pattern contradiction occurs is determined by randomly selecting a melody pattern. Therefore, even when no melody pattern contradiction occurs, there is a possibility that a promotion effect is executed. Therefore, even if there is no inconsistency in the melody pattern of the initial tentatively selected song, the promotion effect may be performed after the temporarily selected song is output, and thus the player performs the promotion effect after outputting the temporarily selected song. You can enjoy the jackpot game while expecting that.

  The initial provisionally selected music piece output processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2501>
The MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag that are set to on in step S2003 of the command determination process in FIG. 31 is set to on. Determine whether or not. If the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2507, and if the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 executes the process. The process moves to S2502.

<Steps S2502 to S2506>
When the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 selects the provisional selection set in step S3913 of the melody pattern setting screen processing of FIG. 73 or S4313 of the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 81. It is determined whether the music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2502).

  Here, the MPU 51 determines that the melody pattern setting flag for the tentatively selected music piece is the default melody pattern 2 for the tentatively selected music piece when the melody pattern setting flag for the tentatively selected music piece is off (Step S2502: No), that is, when the melody pattern is not set by the player. (Refer to FIG. 50) (step S2503), the speaker 26 outputs the tentatively-selected tune from the chorus portion (step S2504), and ends the tentatively-selected tune output process.

  On the other hand, when the tentatively selected melody pattern flag is ON (step S2502: YES), that is, when the melody pattern is set by the player, the MPU 51 determines the melody pattern 1 ( 50 is selected (step S2505), and the speaker 26 is caused to output the initial tentatively selected tune from the melody (starting singing part) (step S2506), and the initial tentatively selected tune output process ends.

<Step S2507>
If the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the melody pattern from a plurality of predetermined melody patterns (two in this embodiment) for outputting the initial provisionally selected music from the speaker 26. Are randomly selected (step S2507). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a melody pattern (temporary output start portion) of the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music is different from the default melody pattern by the player when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed. Is determined by random lottery of the melody pattern regardless of whether or not is set. Thereby, the MPU 51 can generate a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music piece determined in step S2507 is the melody pattern 1. When the melody pattern 1 is selected (Step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial provisionally selected music piece from the A melody (starting singing part) (Step S2506), and performs the initial provisionally selected music piece output process. finish. On the other hand, when the melody pattern 2 is selected (step S2508: No), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial provisionally selected music from the chorus portion (step S2504), and ends the initial provisionally selected music output processing.

  In the initial provisionally selected music piece output process of FIG. 49, the melody pattern is randomly selected (step S2507) on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes). Instead of selecting a pattern at random, whether output contradiction (contradiction of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the initial tentatively selected tune of the melody pattern should be performed as in step S2804 in the selected tune output process of FIG. May be performed.

[Song selection process]
Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection processing (step S2220 in FIG. 35). In the music selection processing, the player selects a music to be output in the jackpot game, and executes processing such as output of the selected music when the music is selected by the player.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the upper selection button 211 has been operated based on the upper selection button operation data (see FIG. 30B).

  The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2602 when the upper selection button 211 has been operated (step S2601: Yes), and shifts the processing to step S2603 when the upper selection button 211 has not been operated (step S2601: No). I do.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 executes a cursor movement display process of moving the cursor image 836 indicating the temporarily selected music piece upward. For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated in the initial music selection image 83 shown in FIG. 37, the cursor image 836 and the indicator image 835 (marked with “temporary” characters) are displayed on the music P as shown in FIG. To the next higher music A. Thereby, the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the already-selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. Upon ending the cursor movement display processing, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2605.

<Step S2603>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether the lower selection button 212 has been operated based on the lower selection button operation data (see FIG. 30C).

  If the lower selection button 212 has been operated (step S2603: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2604. If the lower selection button 212 has not been operated (step S2603: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2606. I do.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 executes an unselected music image movement display process of moving the unselected music image 833 downward. For example, when the lower selection button 212 is operated in the song selection image 83 shown in FIG. 38, the MPU 51 moves the unselected song images 833 for the songs E, F, G, H, and K downward. . At this time, while the unselected music image 833 for the music L is deleted, the music selection image 83 for the music T is newly displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832, so that the temporarily selected music is changed from the music P to the music T. Be changed.

  As described above, the player can change the tentatively selected music piece to the already selected music piece by operating the upper selection button 211, and can select the temporarily selected music piece from the unselected music pieces by operating the lower selection button 212. Therefore, as described above, the player changes the tentatively selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, thereby selecting the previously selected music that has been selected before. , And unselected songs that have never been selected before, the target song can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations.

<Step S2605>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 executes a temporarily selected song output process for outputting the temporarily selected song from the speaker 26, and ends the song selection process. The details of the temporarily selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated based on the enter button operation data (see FIG. 30F). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation on the determination button 21B has been started based on whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and determines whether or not the determination button 21B has been operated. to decide. When the determination button 21B is operated (Step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S2607, and when the determination button 21B is not operated (Step S2606: No), the processing shifts to Step S2610.

<Steps S2607 to S2609>
When the determination button 21B is operated (Step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the determination operation counter (Step S2607). The determination operation counter determines whether or not it is the first music determination in the effective song selection period of the jackpot game (the execution period of the first round game in the open / close execution mode) in step S2802 in the selected music output process of FIG. Is referred to when judging. Further, the MPU 51 executes a selected music output process for outputting the music selected by the player from the speaker 26 (step S2608), and executes a music selection button effect in response to an operation on the determination button 21B at the time of selection. The processing is executed (step S2609). The details of the selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the music selection button effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether the music selection valid period has elapsed. When the music selection effective period has elapsed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2611. On the other hand, when the music selection valid period has not elapsed (step S2610: No), the MPU 51 ends the music selection processing. That is, until the music selection validity period elapses, the music selection processing flag that is set on in step S2306 in the music selection image display processing of FIG. 36 is not set to off (step S2612), and thus the music selection is effective. During the period, the determination of the presence or absence of an operation on the determination button 21B in step S2606 is repeatedly performed. In other words, it is possible to select a song a plurality of times (change the selected song) during the song selection valid period. In addition, during this music selection valid period, the selection of the music is made effective by the operation on the determination button 21B. Therefore, the music selection button production (the production of the expectation degree suggestion 1 to the production 1 8), it is also a period during which the certain variation fixed effect (fixed effect 1 to fixed effect 4) and the reserved extended house fixed effect (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 4) can be executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the expectation degree suggesting effect, the probable change determining effect, and the holding extended guesthouse determining effect are limited to within the music selection validity period. In this way, by restricting the execution timing of the music selection button effect, it is possible to prevent the determination button 21B from being operated unnecessarily to confirm whether the music selection button effect is to be executed.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
When the music selection validity period has elapsed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a music selection counter data update process for updating data based on the music selection by the player in order to display the already selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. At the same time (step S2611), the music selection processing flag is set to off (step S2612), and the music selection processing ends. The details of the music selection counter data updating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Temporary selection music output processing]
Here, FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the temporarily selected music piece output process (step S2605 in FIG. 51). In the temporarily selected music output processing, when the temporarily selected music is changed by the player operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, the temporarily selected music is output from the speaker 26. In this temporarily selected music output process, the temporarily selected music is normally output from the speaker 26 in the melody pattern of the default setting. The melody pattern defines the output start portion when the temporarily selected music is output from the speaker 26 as described above (see FIG. 50), and a melody pattern different from the default setting can be set by the player. (Melody pattern setting screen processing of FIG. 73 or melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 81). When a melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the initial temporarily selected music is output from the speaker 26 in the melody pattern set by the player.

  Furthermore, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect) and the tentatively selected song is an unselected song, a melody pattern is randomly selected. Therefore, inconsistency may occur with respect to the melody pattern. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default and the output start portion of the temporarily selected song is a rust portion, the promotion effect flag is set to ON, and if the temporarily selected song is an unselected song, The output start portion of the tentatively selected song may be a portion different from the chorus portion, for example, a song start portion (intro portion (prelude portion) or A melody portion (singing start portion)). Note that randomly selecting a melody pattern is equivalent to performing a contradictory output lottery (step S2803 of the selected music output process in FIG. 53 described later).

  When the output contradiction (contradiction of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the tentatively selected song occurs, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the jackpot lottery result is output before the tentatively selected song is output. It is determined that the result is more advantageous for the player than the suggested result. Therefore, when the output contradiction (inconsistency of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the provisionally selected music piece occurs, for example, the current game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state. It is possible to know that the state is any one of the state and the 16R probability variable jackpot game state, or that the 16R probability variable jackpot game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variable jackpot game state.

  By the way, there is no conventional gaming machine that causes inconsistency in the melody pattern when the tentatively selected music is output. For this reason, the conventional gaming machine has not been able to give the player sufficient interest in the act of temporarily selecting a music or the effect of outputting the temporarily selected music, and as a result, Sometimes the song is not changed from the initial tentatively selected song.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp in advance that the promotion effect will be executed by the fixed effect in which the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music piece causes inconsistency. Therefore, the player performs an act of temporarily selecting a song, and at that time, can check whether the finalized performance is performed by paying attention to the melody pattern of the temporarily selected song, so that the player can fully enjoy the conventional game machine. The act of provisionally selecting a song that could not be performed can be sufficiently enjoyed. In addition, even if the effect is not interested in the player in the conventional gaming machine, the effect can be noticed, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. Also, by generating an inconsistency in the melody pattern on the condition that the temporarily selected music is an unselected music, the player is motivated to actively perform the act of temporarily selecting the music, and to the player An unselected song can be positively temporarily selected. Thereby, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible to motivate the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and to give the player An opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected songs can be secured.

  The temporarily selected music output process having such a technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2701>
As shown in FIG. 52, in step S2701 of the tentatively selected music piece output process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag that are set to on in step S2003 of the command determination process in FIG. 31 is set to on. Determine whether or not.

  Here, if the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2702, and if the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2701: No), The processing moves to step S2703.

<Step S2702>
In step S2702, the MPU 51 determines whether an unselected song has been provisionally selected. If an unselected song is provisionally selected (step S2702: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2703. If an unselected song is not temporarily selected (step S2702: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2708. I do.

<Steps S2703 to S2707>
In step S2703, the MPU 51 determines whether the tentatively selected music melody pattern setting flag set in step S3913 of the melody pattern setting screen processing of FIG. 73 and S4313 of the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 81 is set to ON. .

  Here, when the melody pattern setting flag of the provisionally selected music piece is off (step S2703: No), that is, when the melody pattern is not set by the player, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern 2 of the default setting for the provisionally selected music piece. (Refer to FIG. 50) (step S2704), the speaker 26 is caused to output the tentatively selected tune from the chorus part (step S2705), and the initial tentatively selected tune output process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag is ON (step S2703: YES), that is, when the melody pattern is set by the player, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern 1 different from the default setting (FIG. 50). Is selected (step S2506), and the speaker 26 is caused to output the tentatively selected tune from the melody portion (starting singing portion) (step S2707), and the initial tentatively selected tune output process ends.

<Step S2708>
When the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes) and the temporarily selected song is an unselected song (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the temporarily selected song. A melody pattern is randomly selected from a plurality of melody patterns (two in this embodiment) (step S2708). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to generate a contradiction of the melody pattern (output start portion) on the condition that an unselected song is temporarily selected when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed. Regardless of whether the melody pattern of the selected music piece is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting, the melody pattern is determined by random lottery of the melody pattern. Thereby, the MPU 51 can generate a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed.

  In the provisionally selected music output process shown in FIG. 52, the melody pattern is randomized on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON and an unselected music is temporarily selected (step S2701: Yes and step S2702: Yes). (Step S2708), but instead of randomly selecting a melody pattern, a lottery is performed to determine whether to perform output contradiction (contradiction of melody pattern) at the output start portion of the initial tentatively selected tune of the melody pattern. You may do so. Further, in the present embodiment, when an unselected song is selected, a melody pattern is randomly selected regardless of whether or not the temporarily selected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON by the player. When the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, the player setting may be prioritized, and the tentatively selected music may be output with a melody pattern different from the default setting. That is, in the non-default state in which the tentatively-selected tune melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, output inconsistency of the tentatively-selected tune is prevented from occurring, and only in the default state in which the player is not set for the melody pattern. Pattern inconsistencies may occur. Conversely, in the non-default state where the tentatively-selected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, output inconsistency of the tentatively-selected song occurs, and in the default state where the player setting for the melody pattern is not made May not cause a melody pattern inconsistency.

  In the tentatively selected tune output process shown in FIG. 52, a melody pattern is randomly selected each time an unselected tune is temporarily selected. However, an upper limit may be set for the number of times to select a melody pattern at random. Although there is no particular limitation on the upper limit, it is, for example, about 1 to 5 times. By setting the upper limit on the number of times that the melody pattern is randomly selected, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly selecting unselected songs. In the provisionally selected music output process shown in FIG. 52, inconsistencies may occur in the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music on condition that the unselected music is temporarily selected. A contradiction may be generated in the pattern. For example, a contradiction may be generated in the melody pattern on condition that the already-selected music piece is temporarily selected. In addition, a contradiction in the melody pattern may be generated regardless of whether the selected music piece or the unselected music piece is provisionally selected. In this way, even if a player who does not know the conditions under which the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music in the gaming machine 10 causes inconsistency is played, it is possible to cause inconsistency in the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music. Because it can be done, the fun of jackpot games is improved.

[Selected music output process]
Here, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music piece output process (step S2608 in FIG. 51). In the selected music output process, a process of outputting the selected music from the speaker 26 is performed when a music is selected by the player's determination operation on the determination button 21B. In this music output process, the selected music is normally output from the speaker 26 in a melody pattern of a default setting. The melody pattern defines an output start portion when the music is output from the speaker 26 as described above (see FIG. 50). Is stipulated. In the selected tune, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that all the tunes A to T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody (song start portion). In an unselected song, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that all of the songs A to T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 2, that is, the chorus portion. In the selected music, the melody pattern 1 is the default setting for all the tunes A to T, but the melody pattern 2 may be the default setting for some or all of the tunes. In the unselected songs, the default setting for all songs A to T is melody pattern 2, but the default setting for some or all songs may be melody pattern 1.

  Further, the melody pattern of the selected music can be set to a melody pattern different from the default setting by the player for each of the selected music and the unselected music (the melody pattern setting screen processing of FIG. 73 or FIG. 81 melody pattern setting history screen processing). When a melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 in the melody pattern set by the player. For example, when the selected music is a selected music, the output is started from a melody pattern 2 different from the default setting, and when the selected music is an unselected music, the output is started from a melody pattern 1 different from the default setting. .

  Furthermore, in the selected music output process, the selected music is an unselected music in the first music selection in the music selection valid period (for example, the execution period of the first round of the opening and closing execution mode), and the promotion effect flag is turned on. If the melody pattern is set to (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game performance), the melody pattern is randomly selected by performing the contradictory output lottery, and the contradiction regarding the melody pattern is performed. Can occur. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default, if the output start portion of the selected song is a rust portion, the promotion effect flag is set to ON, and if the selected song is an unselected song, the selected The output start part of the music may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, a music start part (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing start part)). Performing the contradictory output lottery is equivalent to selecting a melody pattern at random (step S2507 of the initial temporarily selected music output process of FIG. 49 and step S2708 of the temporarily selected music output process of FIG. 52).

  When output contradiction (inconsistency in melody pattern) occurs in the output start portion of the selected music in this way, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the jackpot lottery result is suggested before the selected music is output. It is determined that the result is more advantageous for the player than the result of the game. Therefore, when the output inconsistency (inconsistency in the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the selected music occurs, for example, the current game state is a 5R certain-variable jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot gaming state. And the 16R probable jackpot game state, or the 16R probable jackpot game state which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probable jackpot game state.

  By the way, there is no conventional gaming machine that causes inconsistency in the melody pattern when the selected music is output. For this reason, the conventional gaming machines have not been able to give the player sufficient interest in the act of selecting music and the effect of outputting the selected music, and as a result, the player cannot even select the music. Sometimes not.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to know in advance that the promotion effect is to be executed by the fixed effect in which the melody pattern of the selected music piece causes inconsistency. For this reason, the player performs an act of selecting a music, and at that time, can check whether the fixed effect is performed by paying attention to the melody pattern of the selected music, so that the conventional gaming machine can enjoy enough. The act of selecting songs that could not be performed can be sufficiently enjoyed. In addition, even if the effect is not interested in the player in the conventional gaming machine, the effect can be noticed, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. Also, by generating a contradiction of the melody pattern on condition that the selected music is an unselected music, the motivation to actively perform the act of selecting the music is given to the player, and the player is not selected. Music can be provisionally selected positively. As a result, the player can be motivated to listen to the unselected music piece, and the opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player can be secured.

  The selected music output process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 53, in step S2801 of the selected music output process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected music selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is an unselected music. If the selected song is an unselected song (step S2801: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2802, and if the selected song is not an unselected song, that is, if the selected song is a selected song (step S2801: No), the process moves to step S2810.

<Step S2802>
In step S2802, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first song determination in the song selection effective period of the jackpot game. More specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 in FIG. 51) that is incremented by one by the music determination operation on the determination button 21B is one.

  Here, if it is the first music determination (step S2802: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2803, and if it is not the first music determination, that is, if it is the second or subsequent music determination (step S2802). : No), the process moves to step S2809.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether any one of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag set to on in step S2003 of the command determination process in FIG. 31 is on. Judge. If any promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2803: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2804, and if any promotion effect flag is not set to ON (step S2803: No) ) And the process moves to step S2809.

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 performs a contradictory output lottery. Inconsistent output means that when the melody pattern is set to the default setting, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 with a melody pattern different from the default setting, and the melody pattern is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. Means that the selected music is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern of the default setting. In the present embodiment, the contradictory output lottery is executed by selecting an unselected song when any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2801 and step S2803: YES). ). For this reason, the inconsistency occurs in the output of the music when the unselected music is selected, and for example, the current game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state, and the 5R probable big hit game state and 16R It is possible to know that the state is either the probable jackpot game state or the 16R probable jackpot game state which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot game state. Therefore, the determination operation for selecting an unselected music piece can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting a music piece but as an act of confirming whether or not the player is in a jackpot game state more advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can be motivated to actively select an unselected song and listen to the unselected song, thereby securing an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected song to the player.

  In addition, by performing the contradictory output lottery only for the first song determination (step S2802: Yes), the player unnecessarily repeats the unselected song in the jackpot game state for the purpose of executing the song selection button effect. Can be suppressed. Note that the number of times the contradictory output lottery is performed in step S2802 is not limited to one time per one big hit game, and may be performed two times or more. However, it is preferable to set an upper limit for the number of inconsistent output lotteries per jackpot game from the viewpoint of suppressing unnecessarily repeated selection of unselected songs.

  In step S2804, the contradictory output lottery is that an unselected song is selected (step S2801: Yes), that it is the first song determination (step S2802: Yes), and that the first to third promotion effect flags Is set to ON (step S2803: YES). However, the fact that an unselected music piece is selected and that the first music piece is determined means that a contradictory output lottery is selected. Conditions can be excluded. In other words, the contradictory output lottery may be performed under the condition that at least one of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON. In this case, the contradictory output is changed from the 5R normal jackpot to the 5R probability variable jackpot. The promotion has a significance as a performance that clearly indicates that it is in a state advantageous to a player who has promoted the 16R from the 5R certain jackpot to the 16R certain jackpot and the 16R certain jackpot from the 5R regular jackpot to the 16R certain jackpot. In addition, by setting the selection of an unselected song as a condition of the contradictory output lottery, a player who wants to confirm that the inconsistent output is more advantageous will select an unselected song. The opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected songs to On the other hand, by setting the first song determination as a condition for the contradictory output lottery, it is not necessary to listen to the selected song sufficiently and to select a song unnecessarily to check whether the contradictory output is executed. It can be suppressed from being repeated.

<Step S2805>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the contradictory output lottery has been won. The process moves to step S2809.

<Steps S2806 to S2808>
If the contradiction output lottery is won (step S2805: YES), the MPU 51 is turned on in step S2806 in step S3913 of the melody pattern setting screen processing of FIG. 73 or in step S4313 of the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 81. It is determined whether or not the unselected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON. When the unselected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2806: Yes), that is, when the melody pattern 1 is set to a melody pattern 1 different from the melody pattern 2 which is the default setting (see FIG. 50). Then, the melody pattern 2 which is the default setting for executing the contradictory output is selected (step S2807). On the other hand, if the unselected song melody pattern setting flag is set to off (step S2806: No), that is, if the melody pattern 2 is set to the default melody pattern 2 (see FIG. 50), the MPU 51 executes contradictory output. To do so, a melody pattern 1 different from the default setting is selected (step S2808).

<Step S2809>
If the selected song is an unselected song (step S2801: Yes), it is not the first song decision (if it is the second or later song decision) (step S2802: No), or the first to third promotion effects If none of the flags is set to ON (step S2803: NO), the MPU 51 sets the unselected song melody pattern setting flag to ON without executing the contradictory output lottery (step S2804) in step S2809. It is determined whether or not there is. Also, in step S2809, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the unselected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON even when the contradiction output lottery has not been won (step S2805: No). The MPU 51 sets the unselected song melody pattern setting flag to ON (step S2809: YES), that is, sets the melody pattern 1 different from the melody pattern 2 which is the default setting (see FIG. 50). Then, the melody pattern 1 for outputting the selected music piece from the A melody (starting singing portion) without executing the contradictory output is selected (step S2808). On the other hand, if the unselected song melody pattern setting flag is set to off (step S2809: No), that is, if the melody pattern 2 is set to the default melody pattern 2 (see FIG. 50), the MPU 51 executes contradictory output. Instead, the melody pattern 2 of the default setting to be output from the chorus portion of the selected music is selected (step S2807).

<Step S2810>
If the selected music piece is not an unselected music piece (if the selected music piece is a selected music piece) (step S2801: No), in step S2810, the MPU 51 executes step S3913 of the melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. 73 or the melody pattern setting in FIG. It is determined whether or not the selected song melody pattern setting flag set in step S4313 of the history screen processing is set to ON. If the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2810: Yes), that is, if the melody pattern 2 is set to a melody pattern 2 different from the default setting, the MPU 51 does not execute the contradictory output, and The melody pattern 2 to be output from the rust portion is selected (step S2807). On the other hand, when the already-selected melody pattern setting flag is set to off (step S2809: No), that is, when the melody pattern is set to the default melody pattern, the MPU 51 does not execute the contradictory output, and The melody pattern 1 to be output from the A melody (song start portion) is selected (step S2808).

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the melody pattern of the selected music piece is selected (step S2807 or S2808), the MPU 51 outputs the selected music piece from the speaker 26 with the selected melody pattern (step S2811), and updates the storage of the selected music piece (step S2812). Then, the selected music output process ends. By updating the memory of the selected music piece when the music piece is selected, it is possible to specify the last selected music piece during the music piece selection period even if a plurality of music selections are made during the music selection period. . In addition, since the last selected song can be specified in the song selection validity period, the song ranking of the already selected song in the song selection counter data table (see FIG. 41) can be updated based on the finally selected song.

  In the selected music output process shown in FIG. 53, the contradictory output lottery is performed when an unselected music is selected. However, the contradictory output lottery may be performed when an already selected music is selected. Also in this case, if the contradictory output lottery is won, for example, the current game state is one of the 5R probability variable jackpot game state and the 16R probability variable jackpot game state that are more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state, or It is possible to know that the player is in the 16R certain-variable jackpot game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R certain-variable jackpot game state. Also, in the case where the contradictory output lottery is performed when the already-selected music piece is selected, it is preferable to set an upper limit on the number of contradictory output lotteries. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly selecting the selected music piece in the jackpot game state.

[Song selection button effect processing]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing (step S2609 in FIG. 51). In the music selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect flag set to on in step S2003 of the command determination processing in FIG. Is selected, a music selection button effect is determined, and the determined music selection button effect is executed. The music selection button effect is an expectation suggestion effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be executed, and a positive change confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the promotion effect is to be executed. That is, in the music selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect is executed later, the effect indicating the degree of expectation and the certain change confirmation effect are executed according to the music determination operation.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, when a decision operation is performed on a decision button 21B for deciding a song, a suggestion effect or a promotion effect indicating a degree of expectation that a promotion effect is executed is executed. There was no thing to execute a probable change definite production that clearly indicates. For this reason, conventional gaming machines have not been able to give the player sufficient interest in the act of selecting music and the performance when the selected music is performed, and as a result, the player has even selected the music. Sometimes not.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the music selection is performed at the time of music selection, it is possible to grasp in advance the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be performed by the music selection button effect. For this reason, the player performs an act of selecting a music, and pays attention to the music selection button effect performed at that time, so that the act of selecting a music that could not be sufficiently enjoyed with a conventional gaming machine can be performed. You can enjoy. In addition, even if the effect is not interested in the player in the conventional gaming machine, the effect can be noticed, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. Also, by generating a contradiction of the melody pattern on condition that the selected music is an unselected music, the motivation to actively perform the act of selecting the music is given to the player, and the player is not selected. Music can be provisionally selected positively. As a result, the player can be motivated to listen to the unselected music piece, and the opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player can be secured.

  The music selection button effect processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2901>
As shown in FIG. 54, in step S2901 of the music selection button effect process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected music selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B is an unselected music. If the selected song is an unselected song (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2902, and if the selected song is not an unselected song, that is, if the selected song is an already-selected song (step S2901: No), the music selection button effect processing ends without executing the music selection button effect.

  Here, by determining whether or not an unselected song has been determined in step S2901, a song selection button effect can be executed on condition that an unselected song is selected. Therefore, a music selection button effect (expected effect suggestive effect (suggestive effect 1 to suggestive effect 8) shown in FIG. 56 to be described later), a probable change confirmed effect (fixed effect 1 to fixed effect 4), and a reserved extended villa finalized effect (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 2) A player who wishes to perform the effect 4)) can be made to actively select an unselected song. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to widely listen to various songs prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

  In the present embodiment, the song selection button effect is executed on condition that an unselected song is selected. However, even when the already-selected song is selected, the song selection button effect may be executed. . Then, the operation on the selection deciding unit 21 for selecting a music can be enjoyed not only as an act for simply selecting a music, but also as an act for executing a music selection button effect. As a result, the player can be made to actively select a song, and the degree of interest in the jackpot game and the interest in the jackpot game can be increased, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

<Step S2902>
In step S2902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first song determination in the song selection effective period of the jackpot game. More specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 of the music selection process in FIG. 51) that is incremented by one by the music determination operation on the determination button 21B is one. If it is the first music determination (step S2902: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2903, and if it is not the first music determination, that is, if it is the second or subsequent music determination (step S2902: No). Then, the music selection button effect processing is terminated without executing the music selection button effect.

  Here, by determining whether or not it is the first music determination in step S2902, the number of times of executing the music selection button effect is limited to one time of the first music determination when an unselected music is selected. Is done. Thereby, when performing the music selection button effect, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly and unnecessarily selecting music without sufficiently listening to the unselected music in the jackpot game state.

  Note that the number of times the music selection button effect is executed is not limited to one per jackpot game, and may be executed two or more times. However, it is preferable to set an upper limit number (for example, 2 to 5 times) of the number of music selection button effects for one big hit game from the viewpoint of suppressing unnecessarily repeated selection of unselected music.

<Step S2903>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first promotion effect flag that is set to on in step S2003 of the command determination process in FIG. 31 is set to on. When the first promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2904, and when the first promotion effect flag is not set (step S2903: No), the MPU 51 executes the process. It moves to step S2805.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 51 selects the song selection button effect including a suggestion effect indicating the degree of expectation that the jackpot gaming state is the 5R certain jackpot game state, and a 5R certain change confirmation effect indicating that the jackpot gaming state is the 5R certain jackpot game state. Is executed. Details of the 5R likelihood tune selection button effect determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2905>
In step S2905, the MPU 51 determines whether the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag that is set on in step S2003 of the command determination process in FIG. 31 is set on. When the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2906, and turns on the second promotion effect flag and the third promotion effect flag. If it is not set (step S2905: No), the music selection button effect processing ends without executing the music selection button effect.

  In the music selection button effect processing of FIG. 54, the music selection button effect may be executed on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to on. However, when the promotion effect flag is set to off for this music selection button effect. May be executed. However, when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF, the song selection button effect executes only the suggestion effect indicating the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is the probability change jackpot game state, and executes the probability change jackpot game state. Is not executed.

<Step S2906>
In step S2906, the MPU 51 selects the song selection button effect including the suggestion effect indicating the degree of expectation that the jackpot gaming state is the 16R certain jackpot game state and the 16R certain change confirmation effect indicating that the jackpot gaming state is the 16R certain jackpot game state. Is executed. The details of the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<S2907>
When the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination processing or the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination processing has been executed (step S2904 or S2906), the MPU 51 sets the promotion effect flag set on to off (step S2907).

<Steps S2908 and S2909>
In step S2908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not no effect (see FIGS. 57 and 60) has been selected in the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination processing or the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination processing. When no effect is selected (step S2908: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect processing without executing the music selection button effect. On the other hand, when no effect is not selected (step S2908: No), the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect selected in the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination process or the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process (step S2909). The music selection button effect processing ends.

  Here, the music selection button effect processing is executed when the music selection processing flag is set to ON (step S2219 of the big hit game effect processing in FIG. 35: Yes and S2220). That is, the music selection button effect processing is executed for the first music determination operation until the music selection validity period elapses. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary selection of music for checking whether or not the music selection button effect is executed without sufficiently listening to the selected music.

[5R probable variable selection button production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination processing (step S2904 in FIG. 54). In the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination process, a song selection button effect (including no effect) to be executed when music selection is performed by a determination operation on the determination button 21B during the music selection effective period is determined. In the following, before describing the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination process, a song selection button effect table shown in FIG. 56 indicating the degree of expectation of various song selection button effects and a 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. 57 are determined. The 5R probable variable selection button effect lottery table will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the song selection button effect table defines suggested effects 1 to 8 and fixed effects 1 to 4 according to the degree of expectation (probable change expectation) for the probability change jackpot as the type of the music selection button effect. The suggestion effects 1 to 8 are expectation effect suggestion effects that indicate the expectation that the jackpot that has caused the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a probability change jackpot. On the other hand, the confirmed effects 1 to 4 are effects that clearly indicate that the jackpot that has caused the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a probability-change jackpot, and are the probability-change confirmation effects in which the probability of change probability is 100%.

  The suggestion effect 1 is an effect in which the mini-character A is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 10%.

  Suggested effect 2 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 37) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to blue by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and an effect with a probability of 10% change probability.

  The suggestion effect 3 is an effect in which the mini-character B is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 20%.

  The suggestion effect 4 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 37) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to yellow by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 20%.

  The suggestion effect 5 is an effect in which the mini-characters A and B are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 30%.

  The suggestion effect 6 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 37) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to red by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and is an effect with a probability of expected change of 50%.

  The suggestion effect 7 is an effect in which the mini-character C is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 66%.

  The suggested effect 8 is an effect in which the mini-characters A, B, and C are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection and the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. It is a production.

  The fixed effect 1 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 37) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to a rainbow color by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and is an opportunity to shift to the jackpot gaming state. This is a 5R certain change confirmed production that clearly indicates that the big hit is a 5R certain change big hit.

  The fixed effect 2 is an effect in which a special mini-character is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and that the jackpot that has caused the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 5R probability variable jackpot. It is a probable change confirmation effect to be specified. In addition, the determined effect 2 is a jackpot (5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, or 5R regular jackpot) in one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB as the success / failure information. Is displayed, that is, when the jackpot game ends and the gaming state shifts to the time-saving mode, the hold series that generates the jackpot due to the second hold is executed. It is also a definitive production.

  In the fixed effect 3, a special operation sound (for example, a high-pitched operation sound such as “picone”) whose operation sound is different from the normal operation sound when the determination button 21B is operated at the time of music selection is output by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. This is a 16R certain change confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the big hit that triggered the transition to the big hit gaming state is a 16R certain change big hit.

  The fixed effect 4 is an effect in which a special operation sound is output and a special mini-character is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and a big hit that has caused the transition to the big hit gaming state. Is a probable change confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the game is a 16R probability change jackpot. In addition, the confirmed effect 4 is a jackpot (5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, or 5R normal jackpot) in one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB as the success / failure information. Is displayed, that is, when the jackpot game ends and the gaming state shifts to the time-saving mode, the hold series that generates the jackpot due to the second hold is executed. It is also a definitive production.

  Note that the held consecutive villa finalizing effect also corresponds to a probability change finalizing effect, but a later-described song selection button effect setting screen process (see FIGS. 78 and 79) and a later-described song selection button effect setting history screen process (see FIG. 85 and FIG. 86) is defined separately from the probable change confirmation effect.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the 5R certain-variable song selection button effect lottery table is referred to when a decision operation is performed on the decision button 21B within the valid song selection period in the 5R certain-variable jackpot game state. The 5R certain variable selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51, and stores eight lottery tables A1 to A8. In each of the tables A1 to A8, the relationship between the music selection button effect lottery counter stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 and the effect type is determined, and the music selection button effect according to the value of the music selection button effect lottery counter can be determined. Have been. In the tables A1 to A4, there is no allocation of the music selection button effect lottery counter for the suggestion effects 1 to 8 indicating the probability of the probability that the jackpot is the jackpot. On the other hand, in the tables A5 to A8, there are allocations of the song selection button effect lottery counters for the suggested effects 1 to 8, and any of the suggested effects 1 to 8 may be determined. In the 5R-probable-variable-selection-button-effect lottery table, since the reference is made in the game state of the 5R-probable-variable-hit, there are no defined effects 3 and 4 for specifying the 16R-probable-variable-hit.

  Specifically, the table A1 is a table in which only the “no effect” in which the 5R certain variable song selection button effect is not executed by the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection is determined. That is, in the table A1, none of the "suggested effects 1" to "suggested effects 8", the "confirmed effects 1", and the "confirmed effects 2" are selected as the song selection button effects.

  The table A2 is a table in which, by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection, only “no effect”, or “determination effect 2”, which is a definite change finalizing effect and a reservation consecutive villa finalizing effect, is determined. That is, in the table A2, “suggested effect 1” to “suggested effect 8” and “fixed effect 1” are not selected as the song selection button effects.

  The table A3 is a table in which “no effect” or “confirmed effect 1”, which is a definite change effect, is determined by operating the enter button 21B during music selection. That is, in the table A3, “Suggested Effect 1” to “Suggested Effect 8” and “Fixed Effect 2” are not selected as the song selection button effects.

  The table A4 is a table in which “no effect”, “confirmed effect 1”, or “confirmed effect 2” is determined by operating the enter button 21B during music selection. That is, in the table A4, “Suggested Effect 1” to “Suggested Effect 8” are not selected as the music selection button effects.

  The table A5 is a table in which “No effect” or “Suggested effect 1” to “Suggested effect 8” is determined by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A5, the “determined effect 1” and the “determined effect 2” are not selected as the music selection button effects.

  The table A6 is a table in which “No effect”, “Suggested effect 1” to “Suggested effect 8” or “Fixed effect 2” is determined by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A6, the "determined effect 1" is not selected as the music selection button effect.

  The table A7 is a table in which “No effect”, “Suggested effect 1” to “Suggested effect 8” or “Fixed effect 1” is determined by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A7, the “determined effect 2” is not selected as the music selection button effect.

  The table A8 is a table in which “No effect”, “Suggested effect 1” to “Suggested effect 8”, “Fixed effect 1”, or “Fixed effect 2” is determined by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. . In other words, in the table A8, any of "Suggested Effect 1" to "Suggested Effect 8", "Confirmed Effect 1", and "Confirmed Effect 2" can be selected as the song selection button effect.

  Here, FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 5R certain variable selection button effect lottery table determination table defines conditions for selecting the tables A1 to A8, and is referred to in the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. The 5R likelihood tune selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game setting and the reserved extended-village flags and the tables A1 to A8. The game setting is a setting by the player as to whether or not to execute each of the expectation degree suggesting effect, the probable change confirming effect, and the hold extended guesthouse confirming effect. If the player has set not to execute the expected degree suggestion effect, the expected degree is determined in step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen processing in FIG. 78 or in step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen processing in FIG. The suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. Similarly, in accordance with the setting by the player, in step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen processing in FIG. 78 or in step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen processing in FIG. The fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. On the other hand, the reserved extended villa flag indicates that the reserved extended villa is to be executed, and is set to ON in step S2205 of the big hit game rendering process of FIG.

  In the 5R probable variation selection button production lottery table determination table, for example, in the table A1 in which only “no production” is determined, the expectation suggestion production non-execution setting flag is turned on as a game setting, the probabilistic decision production non-execution setting flag is turned on, If the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is ON and the reserved extended-village flag is ON, or the expected degree suggestive effect non-execution setting flag is ON, the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is ON, and the reserved extended-village flag is set Selected when off. Note that, similarly to the table A1, the tables A2 to A8 are selected when the game setting flag and the holding extended residence flag satisfy the conditions shown in FIG.

<Step S3001>
Returning to the description of FIG. 55, in the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination process, in step S3001, the MPU 51 turns on in step S4113 of the song selection button effect setting screen process of FIG. 78 or in step S4513 of the song selection button effect history screen process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag set to is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 does not execute the expectation suggestion effect indicating the expectation that the gaming state is the 5R certain-variable jackpot game state or the 16R certain-variable jackpot gaming state, even if the operation is performed on the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. It is determined whether the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set. If the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (if the expectation degree effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3002, and If the suggested effect non-execution is set to off (if the expected degree suggested effect non-execution is not set) (step S3001: No), the process proceeds to step S3012.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 51 sets the probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag set to on in step S4113 of the music selection button effect setting screen process of FIG. 78 or step S4513 of the music selection button effect history screen process of FIG. 85. It is determined whether or not. That is, the MPU 51 does not execute the probability change confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the game state is the 5R probability change jackpot game state or the 16R probability change jackpot game state even if the operation is performed on the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. It is determined whether or not the effect non-execution setting is made. When the probability-change-determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (when the probability-change-determined effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3003, When the execution setting flag is set to off (when the non-execution setting of the certain variation determination effect is not performed) (step S3002: No), the process proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold extended villa flag indicating that the hold extended villa set to be turned on in step S2205 of the jackpot game rendering process in FIG. 35 is to be executed is turned on. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3004 when the hold extended flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), and executes the processing when the hold extended flag is set to OFF (step S3003: No). Shifts to step S3005.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, when the hold series flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 51 performs step S4113 of the music selection button effect setting screen process of FIG. 78 or step of the music selection button effect history screen process of FIG. In S4513, it is determined whether or not the held extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag set to ON is set to ON. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the setting of the non-execution of the reserved extended villa effect, which is the setting not to execute the reserved extended villa effect, which indicates that the reserved extended villa is performed. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3005 when the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (when the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3004: Yes). If the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (if the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3004: No), the process proceeds to step S3007.

<Steps S3005 and S3006>
In step S3005, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A1 (see FIG. 57) for selecting “no effect” regardless of the value of any button lottery random number counter. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the certain-variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to ON (probable change). When the fixed production non-execution setting is performed (step S3002: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), and when the reserved extended-village fixed production non-execution setting flag is set to ON ( If the setting of non-execution of the held extended villa fixed effect has been made (step S3004: Yes), the table A1 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 58). In step S3005, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting) (step S3001: Yes), and turns on the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Even if the setting is made (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3002: Yes), the table A1 is used as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table even when the hold extended flag is set to off (step S3003: No). Is selected (see FIG. 58). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A1 has been performed (step S3005), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A2 (see FIG. 57) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting the “determined effect 2”, which is the 5R certain change finalizing effect and the reserved consecutive room finalizing effect, exists. I do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the certain-variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to ON (probable change). When the fixed production non-execution setting is performed) (step S3002: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), and when the reserved extended-village fixed production non-execution setting flag is set to OFF ( When the setting of non-execution of the held extended villa fixed effect has not been made (step S3004: No), the table A2 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 58). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A2 is performed (step S3007), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection music button effect determination process.

<Step S3008>
In step S3008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold extended villa flag indicating that the hold extended villa set to be turned on in step S2205 of the jackpot game rendering process in FIG. 35 is to be executed is turned on. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3009 when the reservation extended flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), and executes the processing when the reserved extended residence flag is set to OFF (step S3008: No). Shifts to step S3010.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 51 turns on the hold consecutive villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag set to on in step S4113 of the music selection button effect setting screen process of FIG. 78 or step S4513 of the music selection button effect history screen process of FIG. It is determined whether or not it has been set. When the hold extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3009: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3010, and sets the hold consecutive extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. If there is (Step S3009: No), the process moves to Step S3011.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A3 (see FIG. 57) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “determined effect 1”, which is the 5R certainty-determining effect, is present. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the certain-variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (probability change). The determined effect non-execution setting has not been performed) (step S3002: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), and the reserved extended-village determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. In this case (when the setting of non-execution of the held extended villa finalization effect is set) (step S3009: Yes), the table A3 is selected as the 5R certain variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 58). In step S3010, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting) (step S3001: Yes), and turns off the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Even if the setting is made (the probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3002: No) and the hold extended flag is set to off (step S3008: No), the 5R probable change selection button effect lottery table Is selected as the table A3 (see FIG. 58). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A3 has been performed (step S3010), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3011>
In step S3011, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A4 (see FIG. 57) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “determined effect 1” and “determined effect 2” exists. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the certain-variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (probability change). The determined effect non-execution setting has not been performed (step S3002: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), and the reserved extended-village confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. In this case (when the setting of non-execution of the held consecutive villa finalization effect has not been made) (step S3009: No), the table A4 is selected as the 5R certain variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 58). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A4 is performed (step S3011), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection music button effect determination process.

<Step S3012>
When the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (step S3001: No), in step S3012, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the probable change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. When the probability-change-determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3012: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3013, and when the probability-change-determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (step S3013). S3012: No), and the process moves to step S3017.

<Step S3013>
In step S3013, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reservation extended-village flag is set to ON. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3014 when the reservation extended flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), and executes the processing when the reservation extended flag is set to OFF (step S3013: No). Is shifted to step S3015.

<Step S3014>
In step S3014, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved extended-village effect rendering non-execution setting flag is set to ON. When the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3014: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3015, and sets the reserved consecutive extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. If there is (Step S3014: No), the process proceeds to Step S3016.

<Step S3015>
In step S3015, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A5 (see FIG. 57) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "suggest effect 1" to "suggest effect 8" exists. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the positive-variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to ON. (Step S3012: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3013: Yes), and the reserved extended-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. In this case (when the setting of non-execution of the held consecutive villa finalization effect) is made (step S3014: Yes), the table A5 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 58). Also, in step S3015, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to ON (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3012: Yes), and the 5R certain-variable song selection button effect lottery table is set even when the hold series flag is set to off (step S3013: No). Table A5 is selected (see FIG. 58). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A5 has been performed (step S3015), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended-flag flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination processing.

<Step S3016>
In step S3016, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A6 (see FIG. 57) in which the values of the button lottery random number counters for selecting “suggest effect 1” to “suggest effect 8” and “fixed effect 2” exist. I do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the positive-variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to ON. (Step S3012: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3013: Yes), and the reserved extended-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. (When the hold has not been set) (step S3014: No), the table A6 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 58). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A6 is performed (step S3016), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection music button effect determination process.

<Step S3017>
When both the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag and the probable change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag are set to off (No in steps S3001 and S3012), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold extended flag is set to on. Is determined (step S3017). The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3018 when the reservation extended flag is set to ON (step S3017: Yes), and executes the processing when the reservation extended flag is set to OFF (step S3017: No). Is shifted to step S3019.

<Step S3018>
In step S3018, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold extended villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. When the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3018: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3019, and sets the reserved consecutive extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. If there is (Step S3018: No), the process proceeds to Step S3020.

<Step S3019>
In step S3019, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A7 (see FIG. 57) in which the values of the button lottery random number counters for selecting “the suggestion effect 1” to “the suggestion effect 8” and the “determination effect 1” exist. I do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3001: No), and sets the certainty change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to off. (Step S3012: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3017: Yes), and the reserved extended-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. (Step S3018: Yes), the table A7 is selected as the 5R sure variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 58). Also, in step S3019, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (the setting of non-execution of the fixed-change confirmation effect is not performed) (step S3012: No), and the 5R certain-change song selection button is set even if the hold extended flag is set to off (step S3017: No). The table A7 is selected as an effect lottery table (see FIG. 58). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A7 has been performed (step S3019), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R sure variable selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3020>
In step S3020, the MPU 51 checks the table A8 (see FIG. 57) in which there is a value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “suggested effect 1” to “suggested effect 8”, “determined effect 1”, and “determined effect 2”. Executes a song selection button production lottery. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation degree effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to off. (Step S3012: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3017: Yes), and the reserved extended-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF If the setting has been made (when the setting of non-execution of the held consecutive villa finalization effect has not been made) (step S3018: No), the table A8 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 58). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A8 is performed (step S3020), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable music selection button effect determination process.

[16R probable variable selection button production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process (step S2906 of the song selection button effect process of FIG. 54). In the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table shown in FIG. 60, the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table for determining the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table shown in FIG. (Including no directing). The 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process is basically the same as the above-described 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination process. In the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. A8 ”may be replaced with“ table B1 ”to“ table B8 ”.

  The 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. 60 is referred to when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B during the music selection effective period in the 16R certain variable jackpot game state. The 16R certain variable selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51, and stores eight lottery tables B1 to B8. The 16R certain variable song selection button production lottery table is basically the same as the 5R certain variable song selection button production lottery table. However, instead of "confirmed production 1" in the 5R certain variable song selection button production lottery table, "determined effect 3" is specified. Thus, “determined effect 4” is specified instead of “determined effect 2”. That is, in the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table, since the 16R certain variable big hit gaming state is referred, the fixed production 1 and the fixed production 3 that clearly indicate the 5R certain variable big hit are not specified. It should be noted that a detailed description of the 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table is omitted.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table determination table defines conditions for selecting the tables B1 to B8, and is referred to in the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination processing shown in FIG. The 16R probability variable song selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game settings and the reserved extended-village flags and the tables B1 to B8. Note that the game setting and the hold consecutive flag are synonymous with those in the case of the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table determination table. In the 16R probability variable selection button production lottery table determination table, for example, in the table B1 (see FIG. 60) in which only “no performance” is determined, the expectation degree suggestion performance non-execution setting flag is turned on as the game setting, and the probability variation determination performance non-execution If the setting flag is ON, the reserved extended-village non-execution setting flag is ON, and the reserved extended-village flag is ON, or the expected degree suggestive rendering non-execution setting flag is ON, the positive variation confirmed rendering non-execution setting flag is ON, and This is selected when the hold extended flag is off. In addition, the table B2 to the table B8 are selected when the game setting flag and the holding extended-village flag satisfy the condition shown in FIG. 61, similarly to the table B1.

<Steps S3101 to S3107>
Returning to the description of FIG. 59, in the 16R certainty variable selection button effect determination processing, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation effect effect non-execution setting) (step S3101: Yes). The confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (a probable change confirmed effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3102: Yes), the reserved extended villa flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), and the reserved extended villa finalized effect When the execution setting flag is set to ON (when the hold of the consecutive villas is not set) (step S3104: Yes), any of the button random number counters is used as the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table. Table B1 (step S3105) (refer to FIG. 60) for selecting "no effect" even when the value of "." Is selected (FIG. 6). Reference). In addition, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting) (step S3101: Yes), and sets the positive change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to ON (positive change). Even if the hold series flag is set off (step S3103: No), the table B1 is selected as the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table (step S3102: Yes) (step S3102: Yes). Step S3105) (see FIG. 61). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B1 is performed (step S3105), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

  On the other hand, in step S3107, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting) (step S3101: Yes), and turns the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag ON. (Step S3102: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3103: Yes), and the reserved consecutive-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. When there is (when the reservation continuous play non-execution effect non-execution setting has not been performed) (step S3104: No), as the 16R certain variable song selection button production lottery table, the 16R certain change confirmed production and the reserved continuous house final production “determination effect” Select the table B2 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "4" exists (see FIG. 61). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B2 is performed (step S3107), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3108 to 3111>
Further, in step S3110, MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting) (step S3101: Yes), and turns off the probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. It is set (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting has not been performed) (step S3102: No), the reservation extended villa flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), and the reservation extended villa determination effect non-execution setting flag is set to on If it is set (holding of the extended casino fixed effect non-execution setting) (step S3109: Yes), “Fixed Effect 3”, which is a 16R certain variable confirmed effect, is set as a 16R certain variable selection button effect lottery table. The table B3 in which the value of the button random number counter to be selected exists is selected (see FIG. 61). Further, in step S3110, MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting) (step S3101: Yes), and turns off the probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Even if the setting is made (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3102: No) and the hold extended villa flag is set to off (step S3108: No), the 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table Is selected as the table B3 (see FIG. 61). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B3 is performed (step S3110), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination processing.

  On the other hand, in step S3111, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting) (step S3101: Yes), and turns off the certainty change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. It is set (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting has not been performed) (step S3102: No), the reservation extended flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), and the reservation extended confirmation non-execution setting flag is set to off When the setting is made (when the setting of the non-execution of the held consecutive villa finalization effect is not made) (step S3109: No), “Fixed production 3” and “Finalized production 4” are set as the 16R sure variable selection button production lottery table. The table B4 in which the value of the button random number counter to be selected exists is selected (see FIG. 61). Note that, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B4 is performed (step S3111), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3112 to S3116>
In step S3115, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and sets the certainty change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to ON. (Step S3112: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3113: Yes), and the reserved extended-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. (If the hold has not been set), (step S3114: Yes), "Suggested Effect 1" to "Suggested Effect 8" are selected as the 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table. The table B5 in which the value of the button random number counter exists is selected (see FIG. 61). Also, in step S3115, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to ON (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3112: Yes), and even if the hold extended villa flag is set to OFF (step S3113: No), the 16R certain variable selection button effect lottery table Is selected as the table B5 (see FIG. 61). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B5 is performed (step S3115), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

  On the other hand, in step S3116, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to ON (a probable-change confirmed effect non-execution setting has been performed) (step S3112: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3113: Yes), and the reserved extended-village confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set. When it is set to OFF (when the setting to hold the non-executable rendezvous effect is not set) (step S3114: No), as the 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table, "suggested effect 1" to "suggested effect 8" "And" Confirmed Effect 4 "are selected. A table B6 in which the value of the random number counter of the lottery exists is selected (see FIG. 61). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B6 is performed (step S3116), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3117 to S3120>
In step S3117, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and turns off the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. (Step S3112: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3117: Yes), and the reserved extended-village finalized production non-execution setting flag is set to ON. Is set (the reserving consecutive villa fixed production non-execution setting is made) (step S3118: Yes), as the 16R certain variable song selection button production lottery table, "Suggested production 1" to "Suggested production 8" and "Confirmed production" A table B7 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "3" exists is selected (see FIG. 61). In step S3117, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (the probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3112: No), and the 16R certain change song selection button is set even when the hold extended flag is set to off (step S3117: No). The table B7 is selected as an effect lottery table (see FIG. 61). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B7 is performed (step S3119), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

  On the other hand, in step S3120, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (the probable-change confirmed effect non-execution setting has not been performed) (step S3112: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3117: Yes), and the reserved extended-village confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set. Is set to OFF (in the case where the setting to hold the non-executable rendezvous effect is not performed) (step S3118: No), the 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table includes "suggested effect 1" to "suggested effect". 8 "," determined effect 3 ", and" determined effect 4 "are selected. A table B8 in which the value of the random number counter is present is selected (see FIG. 61). . In addition, when performing the music selection button effect lottery in the table B8 (step S3120), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended-flag flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable music selection button effect determination processing.

[Song selection counter data update processing]
Here, FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection counter data update processing (step S2611 in the music selection processing of FIG. 51). In the music selection counter data update processing, the music selection image display processing (see FIG. 36) and the initial provisional selection music determination processing (see FIG. 47) are necessary in accordance with the selection of music by the player during the music selection effective period of the jackpot game. The music selection counter data table (see FIG. 41) is updated. As a result, it is possible to create a selected music list (see FIG. 42 (A)) and a non-selected music list (see FIG. 42 (B)) necessary to display the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 37). At the same time, it becomes possible to create initial array order data (see FIG. 43). As a result, by updating the music selection counter data in the music selection counter data update processing, the music selection image 83 displayed in the next big hit game reflects the selection status of the music by the player in the current big hit game, The music selection image 83 has high operability for music selection for the player.

<Step S3201>
In step S3201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is an initial tentatively selected song that can be temporarily stored in the RAM 512 in step S2304 in the song selection image display process in FIG. 36. In step S3201: Yes, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if there is no storage of the initial provisionally selected song (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3106.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music piece determined by the MPU as the initial provisionally selected music piece (step S2404 of the initial provisionally selected music piece determination process in FIG. 47) is selected by the player as the selected music piece. If the initial tentatively selected song is a selected song (step S3202: YES), the process proceeds to step S3106. If the initial tentatively selected song is not selected (step S3202: NO), the process proceeds to step S3103. .

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
In step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 41) regarding the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (A1) and FIG. 63 (A2), in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 41, the MPU selects music F of music number 6 as a temporarily selected music, and If the music F is not selected by the user, the music F is stored in the first place in the non-selected music list ranking, and the unselected music list before the update is placed in the second and third places in the non-selected music list ranking, respectively. The song I of the song number 9 with the first place and the song B of the song number 2 with the second place are stored. Also, among the non-selected songs having the third-ranked non-selected song list prior to the update, the song C of song number 3 with the oldest non-selection date and time is ranked 0th, and is changed to an unselected song.

  In step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the non-selection flag. The non-selection flag is updated, for example, when the non-selected song list ranking is updated from FIG. 63 (A1) to FIG. 63 (A2), the non-selected song list ranking is changed from third to zero. This is performed by setting the selection flag to off and setting the non-selection flag of the music piece F in which the non-selected music list ranking is changed from 0th to 1st on. When the data (see FIG. 41) regarding the non-selected tune in the tune selection counter data table is updated (step S3203), the storage of the initial provisionally selected tune stored in the RAM 512 is cleared (step S3204).

<Step S3205>
In step S3205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is storage of the selected music that can be stored in the RAM 512 in step S2812 in the selected music output process of FIG. 53, and if there is storage of the selected music (step S3205: Yes), The process shifts to step S3106, and if there is no storage of the selected music (step S3205: No), the music selection counter data updating process ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
In step S3206, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 41) regarding the selected music in the music selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (B1) and FIG. 63 (B2), when the player selects the song E of song number 5 as the selected song in the state of the song selection counter data table shown in FIG. Adds 1 to the selection counter of the music E. In addition, the song E is stored in the first place in the selected music list ranking, and the second and third places in the selected music list rank are each of the music number 1 having the first selected music list ranking before the update. The music A and the music D of the music number 4 which was the second place are stored. In addition, the song D of the song number 4 having the oldest selection date and time among the already-selected songs whose ranking of the already-selected song list was third before the update is ranked 0th, and is changed to an unselected song.

  In step S3205, the MPU 51 updates the already-selected flag. For example, when the non-selected music ranking is updated from FIG. 63 (B1) to FIG. 63 (B2), the selected flag is updated when the selected music list whose ranking is changed from third to zero is selected. This is performed by setting the flag to OFF and setting the already-selected flag of the music E whose ranking of the already-selected music list has been changed from 0th to 1st to ON. When the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 41) relating to the selected music in the music selection counter data table (step S3206), the MPU 51 clears the storage of the selected music stored in the RAM 512 (step S3207), and The data update processing ends.

  When a song is selected from the unselected songs, the song is changed from the unselected songs to the already-selected songs. For example, when the song B having the second-ranked non-selected song ranking in FIG. 63 (A1) is selected, the first-ranked song ranking data is changed to the song B. On the other hand, in the non-selected music ranking data, the music B is deleted from the second place, the music C in the third place is moved up to the second place, and the third place is updated with no corresponding music. In addition, the non-selection flag of the music B is set to off, and the already selected flag of the music B is set to on. That is, by selecting a song from the non-selected songs, information on the non-selection of the song is cleared in the song selection counter data, while information indicating that the song is a selected song is included. The addition is performed.

  When the selected music list ranking is determined not by the order of the selection date and time but by the selection frequency, the data on the selected music is updated based on the selection frequency counter of the music E. For example, in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 41, when the music E of the music number 5 is selected as the selected music by the player, the selection frequency counter is updated from 0 to 1 for the music E, There is no change in the selected song list order. Therefore, the MPU 51 does not change the selected music list ranking and the selected flag. In addition, when the order of the selected music list is determined by the selection frequency, if the order of the already selected music list is changed, the data of the already selected music is updated in the same order as when updating the data on the selected music in the order of the newest selection date and time. The list order and the selected flag are updated.

[Game setting process]
Here, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting process (step S1711 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27). In the game setting process, during a period in which a variable game effect or a jackpot game effect is not being executed, a jackpot is determined according to an operation on the selection determining unit 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B) by the player. A game setting for the game effect is executed.

  By the way, as a conventional game, there is a game in which a player can perform game settings related to various effects performed using the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26, such as selection of a character appearing in a variable game effect or a big hit game effect. is there. In such a gaming machine, the player can customize the effect to suit his / her taste by performing game settings related to various effects, such as selecting a favorite character. You can enjoy game performances even more.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a new feature as a jackpot game effect in comparison with the conventional gaming machine as described above. Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment displays an image including the already-selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 as the music selection image 83 on the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game effect (see FIG. 37). ). Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the jackpot game, before the promotion effect that clearly indicates that the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the currently suggested gaming state, the initial provisionally selected music is performed. When the tentatively selected music or the selected music including “” is output from the speaker 26, the contradiction is generated in the melody pattern of the music to clearly indicate that the promotion effect is to be performed, and the determination operation for the determination button 21B when selecting the music is performed. A music selection button effect that indicates or clearly indicates the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed is executed in accordance with.

  Then, in the game setting process shown in FIG. 64, a process is performed in a case where a player performs a game setting for a jackpot game effect having a new feature with respect to a conventional gaming machine. Specifically, in the game setting process, a music list display setting relating to display or non-display of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 37) on the music selection image display screen 82 in accordance with an operation performed by the player on the selection determining unit 21. The melody pattern setting for the provisionally selected music and the selected music, and the music selection button effect setting for setting execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect are executed. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a game setting of the jackpot game effect, the player can perform a music list display setting, a melody pattern setting, and a music selection button effect setting which were not the conventional game setting items.

  Here, in the music list display setting, each of the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (dislike music) image 834 in the music selection image 83 as described later with reference to FIGS. It can be set to display or non-display. Thereby, the player can customize the music selection image 83 to a desired display mode. In addition, for example, the player performs temporary selection and selection of music without stress, for example, by setting information about past music selections that the player determines to be unnecessary as non-display setting and setting the display mode to a favorite display mode. be able to.

  In the melody pattern setting, a melody pattern of a tentatively selected song or a selected song (unselected song and already-selected song) can be set as described later with reference to FIGS. As a result, the player can not only output the temporarily selected music or the selected music with the default setting, but also output from a portion other than the default setting. As a result, the range of selection of the tentatively selected tune or the output start portion of the selected tune is expanded, and the player can output the tentatively selected tune or the selected tune at his / her own discretion. You can enjoy music and selected music.

  Further, in the music selection button effect setting, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the music selection button effect as described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 86. Accordingly, when the player has set to execute the music selection button effect, the act of executing the music selection button effect (the operation of the determination button 21B in music selection, the promotion effect may be performed) Act to know). On the other hand, if the player has set not to execute the music selection button effect, it is impossible to know in advance whether or not the promotion effect is to be executed. Is expected to be executed. For this reason, since it is possible to select whether or not to execute the music selection button effect setting, it is possible to have a way of enjoying whether or not the promotion effect is performed according to the taste of the player.

  The game setting processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. However, before describing the game setting process shown in FIG. 64, a transition example of the display screen in the game setting process will be described first with reference to FIGS. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the display does not shift to a later-described top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 65 (B)), a demonstration screen, or a power saving screen even if a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display of the main symbol 921. In the following description, it is assumed that a game stop setting can be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the change stop screen 92 is displayed and a change stop screen 92 (see FIG. 65A) is displayed. Of course, the game setting may be enabled immediately after the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation stop screen 92 was displayed, the game setting may be automatically performed regardless of the operation of the player. Alternatively, the screen may shift to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 65B).

  As shown in FIG. 65 (A), when the variable display of the main symbol 921 is stopped, when the number of holdings N and the number of holdings M are “0” and the game does not shift to the jackpot game state, the main symbol 921 is displayed. The fluctuation stop screen 92 in a state where the fluctuation has stopped is maintained. When the operation button 20 is operated by the player after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation stop screen 92 was displayed, the display screen shifts from the fluctuation stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. I do. The top menu screen 93 includes a plurality of selection images 931 to 935, a cursor image 936, and a selection determination unit image 937.

  The plurality of selection images 931 to 935 on the top menu screen 93 are images for indicating a plurality of selectable items and for allowing the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. Further, the plurality of selection images 931 to 935 are also images for selecting the display screen of the transition destination. The plurality of selection images 931 to 935 are, for example, a selection image 933 of “game setting customization” for performing a game setting at the time of a jackpot game, and an “end” selection image 935 of shifting from the top menu screen 93 to the fluctuation stop screen 92. including.

  The cursor image 936 on the top menu screen 93 is an image indicating the currently provisionally selected item. Further, in the temporarily selected image 933 (FIG. 65 (B)), the “game setting customization” selected image 933 is used to emphasize that it is temporarily selected, and the other selected images 931, 932, and 934 are selected. , 935 are displayed in a distinguishable manner. This is the same as the provisionally selected music image 832 (see FIG. 37) in the music selection image 83 described above.

  The selection deciding section image 937 of the top menu screen 93 is an image simulating the selection deciding section 21 (see FIG. 1), and indicates that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by operating the selection deciding section 21. It is an image. In the selection deciding unit image 937, images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are marked with “selection”, and the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are highlighted. Is displayed. The images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 may be emphasized by blinking display or the like. In the selection determination section image 937, the character corresponding to the determination button 21B is marked with “decision” to indicate that an operation should be performed when selecting a provisionally selected item. The display example of the selection determining section image 937 is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 65B, and can be changed as appropriate.

  On the top menu screen 93, when any one of the plurality of items (selected images 931 to 935) is selected by the player by operating the enter button 21B, the display screen corresponding to the selected item is displayed. Transition. For example, when the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” is selected by the player, the screen shifts to the game setting screen 94 shown in FIG. The game setting screen 94 includes a plurality of selection images 941 to 945, a cursor image 936, and a selection determination unit image 937. Note that the cursor image 936 and the selection determination unit image 937 are the same as those in the case of the top menu screen 93, and thus description thereof is omitted. In the following, when the same is applied to the cursor image 936 and the selection determining unit image 937 on the top menu screen 93, the same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  The plurality of selection images 941 to 945 of the game setting screen 94 show a plurality of selectable items (display screens at the transition destination) and allow the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. It is an image. The plurality of selection images 941 to 945 include a selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting”, a selection image 944 of “setting history music selection setting”, and a selection image 945 of “return to top menu”.

  Here, FIG. 66 (A) shows an example of the game setting screen 94 similarly to FIG. 65 (C), and FIGS. 66 (B), 66 (C) and 66 (D) respectively show It is an example of a display screen which shifts from the game setting screen 94. Specifically, FIG. 66 (B) is an example of the setting item selection screen 95, FIG. 66 (C) is an example of the setting history selection screen 96, and FIG. 66 (D) is the same as FIG. 65 (B). 9 shows an example of the top menu screen 93. That is, when the selection image 943 of “Normal music selection setting” is selected on the game setting screen shown in FIG. 66A, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the setting item selection screen 95, and the “Setting” is set. When the selection image 944 of “history music selection setting” is selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. 66C, and the selection image 965 of “return to the top menu” is displayed. When selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the above-described top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. 66 (D). Hereinafter, the setting item selection screen 95 will be described with reference to FIG. 67, and the setting history selection screen 96 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The setting item selection screen 95 shown in FIG. 67 is a screen that allows individual selection of items related to music selection in the jackpot game. The setting item selection screen 95 includes a plurality of selection images 951 to 955. The “melody pattern” selection image 951 is an image selected when performing a melody pattern setting among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 951 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97. The selection image 952 of “display music list” is an image selected when performing a music list display setting among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 952 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98. The selection image 953 of “music selection button effect” is an image selected when performing a music selection button effect setting among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 953 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music selection button effect setting screen 99. The “return one” selection image 954 is an image selected when returning the display screen by one. When the selection image 954 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to a game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 66A) which is a display screen before shifting to the setting item selection screen 95. The selection image 955 of “Return to top menu” is an image selected when returning the display screen to the top menu screen 93. When the selection image 955 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)).

  The setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. 68 is a screen that displays the setting history of the items related to the song selection in the hit game, and allows the items related to the song selection in the big hit game to be individually selected. The setting history selection screen 96 includes a plurality of selection images 961 to 965. The selected image 961 of “melody pattern setting history” is an image selected when performing melody pattern setting based on the melody pattern setting history. When the selected image 961 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the melody pattern setting history screen 87. The selection image 962 of the “music list display setting history” is an image selected when performing the music list display setting based on the music list display setting history. When the selected image 962 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen 88. The selection image 963 of the “music selection button effect setting history” is an image selected when performing the music selection button effect setting based on the setting history of the music selection button effect. When the selection image 963 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. The “return one” selection image 964 is an image selected when returning the display screen by one. When the selection image 964 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94 (FIG. 66A) which is a display screen before shifting to the setting history selection screen 96. The selection image 965 of “return to top menu” is an image selected when returning the display screen to the top menu screen 93. When the selection image 965 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)).

<Step S3401>
Returning to the description of FIG. 64, in step S3401 in the game setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 65 (A)). More specifically, the MPU 51 is set to ON when the value of the variable display counter updated in the counter update process (step S1707) of FIG. 27 is 0, and stops the fluctuation in the top menu screen processing of FIG. 70 described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 based on whether or not the fluctuation stop screen display flag set to ON in the screen transition processing is ON.

  When the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 (Step S3401: Yes), the processing shifts to Step S3402. When the display screen is not the fluctuation stop screen 92 (Step S3401: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3403. I do.

<Step S3402>
In step S3402, the MPU 51 executes a game start standby process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the game start standby process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3403>
In step S3403, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets a top menu screen display flag that is set to ON in a top menu screen transition process such as step S3504 of a game start standby process of FIG. 69 described later and step S3711 of a game setting screen process of FIG. 71 described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 93 based on whether or not the display is on. If the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3404. If the display screen is not the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3405.

<Step S3404>
In step S3404, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen process, and ends the game setting process. The top menu screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3405>
In step S3405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 66A). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets a game setting screen display flag that is set to on in a game setting screen transition process such as a step S3609 of a top menu screen process of FIG. 70 described later and a step S3813 of a setting item selection process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 94 based on whether or not is the game setting screen 94. When the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (Step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3406, and when the display screen is not the game setting screen 94 (Step S3405: No), shifts the processing to Step S3407. I do.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 51 executes a game setting screen process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the game setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 66 (B) and 67). Specifically, the MPU 51 displays a setting item selection screen that is set to ON in a setting item selection screen transition process such as a step S3707 of a game setting process of FIG. 71 described later and a step S3907 of a melody pattern setting screen process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 based on whether or not the flag is on. When the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3408, and when the display screen is not the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3407: No), the processing proceeds to step S3409. Move to

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 51 executes a setting item selection process and ends the game setting process. The details of the setting item selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 74). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern setting screen display flag that is set to on in the melody pattern setting screen transition processing in step S3807 in the setting item selection processing in FIG. 72 described later is on. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97. If the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3410. If the display screen is not the melody pattern setting screen 97 (step S3409: No), the processing proceeds to step S3411. Move to

<Step S3410>
In step S3410, the MPU 51 executes a melody pattern setting screen process, and ends the game setting process. The melody pattern setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3411>
In step S3411, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 76A). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music list display setting screen display flag set to on in the music list display setting screen transition processing in step S3809 in the setting item selection processing in FIG. 72 described later is on. Then, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98. When the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3412, and when the display screen is not the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. It moves to step S3413.

<Step S3412>
In step S3412, the MPU 51 executes a music list display setting screen process, and ends the game setting process. Details of the music list display setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 79). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection button effect setting screen display flag set to ON in the music selection button effect setting screen transition process of step S3811 in the setting item selection process of FIG. 72 described later is ON. Then, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99. When the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3414, and when the display screen is not the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: No), the MPU 51 performs the processing. It moves to step S3415.

<Step S3414>
In step S3414, the MPU 51 executes a music selection button effect setting screen process, and ends the game setting process. Details of the music selection button effect setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3415>
In step S3415, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 66 (C) and 68). More specifically, the MPU 51 performs step S4307 in the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 81 described later, step S4407 in the music list display setting history screen processing of FIG. 83 described later, and the music selection button effect setting history of FIG. It is determined whether the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 based on whether the setting history selection screen display flag set to ON in the setting history selection screen transition processing of step S4507 in the screen processing is ON. to decide. When the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3416, and when the display screen is not the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: No), the processing proceeds to step S3417. Move to

<Step S3416>
In step S3416, the MPU 51 executes a setting history selection process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the setting history selection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3417>
In step S3417, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 82). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern setting history screen display flag that is set to on in the melody pattern setting history screen transition processing of step S4207 in the setting history selection processing of FIG. 80 described later is on. Then, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87. If the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3418. If the display screen is not the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. It moves to step S3419.

<Step S3418>
In step S3418, the MPU 51 executes a melody pattern setting history screen process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the melody pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3419>
In step S3419, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 84). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music list display setting history screen display flag set to ON in the music list display history screen transition processing in step S4209 in the setting history selection processing in FIG. 80 described later is ON. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88. When the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3420, and when the display screen is not the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: No), The process moves to step S3421.

<Step S3420>
In step S3420, the MPU 51 executes the music list display setting history screen processing, and ends the game setting processing. Details of the music list display setting history screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3421>
As shown in FIG. 83, in step S3421 of the music list display setting history screen processing, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 86). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag set to ON in the music selection button effect history screen transition process of step S4211 in the setting history selection process of FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. If the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3422, and if the display screen is not the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: No), The process moves to step S3423.

<Step S3422>
In step S3422, the MPU 51 executes a music selection button effect history screen process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the music selection button effect history screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3423>
In step S3423, the MPU 51 changes the display screen to the fluctuation stop screen 92, the top menu screen 93, the game setting screen 94, the setting item selection screen 95, the setting history selection screen 96, the melody pattern setting screen 97, the music list display setting screen 98, and the music selection. If it is not any of the button effect setting screen 99, the melody pattern setting history screen 87, the music list display setting history screen 88, and the music selection button effect setting history screen 89, other processing corresponding to the current display screen is executed, and the game setting is performed. The process ends.

[Game start waiting process]
Here, FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start standby process (step S3402 of the game setting process in FIG. 64). In the game start standby process, the display screen is changed from the fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 65 (A)) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 65 (B) and FIG. 66 (D)) in response to the operation of the operation button 20 by the player. ) Is performed.

<Step S3501>
In step S3501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol has started based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. The MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started when the value of the fluctuation display counter is not 0.

  When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (Step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game start standby process and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S3501: No). ) And the process moves to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
In step S3502, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20 based on the first to third operation pattern flags (see FIG. 30A). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has been operated (step S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3503, and if the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has not been operated (step S3502: No), the game starts. The standby processing ends.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the shift to the fluctuation stop screen 92. For example, when the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed (when the value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0), the MPU 51 starts counting by the time counter, and refers to the value of the time counter to change the fluctuation stop screen 92. Can be grasped from when is displayed.

  When determining that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S3503: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3504, and when determining that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3503: NO), the game start standby processing To end.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, since the MPU 51 can determine that the operation button 20 has been operated after a lapse of a predetermined time after shifting to the fluctuation stop screen 92 (step S3502: Yes and step S3503: Yes), the player operates the operation button 20 by the player. The display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93 in accordance with. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Top menu screen processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the top menu screen process (step S3404 of the game setting process in FIG. 64). In the top menu screen processing, the items selected by the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 from the plurality of selection images 941 to 945 displayed on the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)). Processing for shifting the display screen to the corresponding screen is executed.

<Step S3601>
In step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to change in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the variable display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has started (Step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3602, and determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S3601: No). Then, the process shifts to step S3603.

<Step S3602>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S3601: Yes), the top menu screen display flag is set to off (Step S3602), and the top menu screen processing ends.

<Step S3603>
In step S3603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. More specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the upper selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 30B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 30C) are higher. It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3604, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: NO). Is shifted to step S3605.

<Step S3604>
If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: YES), the MPU 51 changes the temporary selection display on the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)). Is executed (step S3604). For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated while the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” shown in FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D) is temporarily selected, the cursor image 936 is selected. The selected image 932 is moved to the side of the selected image 932 which is one level higher than 933. At this time, the selection image indicating that the temporary selection is displayed is changed from the selection image 933 to the selection image 932. On the other hand, when the lower selection button 212 is operated in a state where the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” is provisionally selected, the MPU 51 moves the cursor image 936 to the side of the selection image 934 one level below the selection image 933. The selected image is moved from the selected image 933 to the selected image 934 to indicate that the image is tentatively selected and displayed. When the processing in step S3604 ends, the MPU 51 ends the top menu screen processing.

  When the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)), the MPU 51 displays the cursor image 936 and the cursor image 936 even if the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated. Processing such as moving the temporary selection display of the selected images 941 to 945 is not executed.

<Step S3605>
In step S3605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated by the player based on the first to third decision operation pattern flags (see FIG. 30 (F)).

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the determination button 21B (step S3605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3606, and if the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3605: No), The top menu screen processing ends.

<Step S3606>
In step S3606, the MPU 51 determines whether the “end” selection image 935 (see FIG. 65 (B) and FIG. 66 (D)) on the top menu screen 93 has been selected by the player operating the enter button 21B. I do. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “finished” selected image 935 has been selected (step S3606: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3607, and determines that the “finished” selected image 935 has not been selected (step S3606). S3606: No), the process moves to step S3608.

<Step S3607>
If it is determined that the “end” selected image 935 has been selected (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 65 (B) and FIG. 66 (D)) to the fluctuation stop screen 92 ( A change stop screen shift process for shifting to (FIG. 65A) is executed (step S3607). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off, sets the variable stop screen display flag to on, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3608>
In step S3608, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 933 (see FIG. 65 (B) and FIG. 66 (D)) of “game setting customization” on the top menu screen 93 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. Judge. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “game setting customization”. When determining that the selection image 935 of “game setting customization” is selected (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3609, and determines that the selection image 935 of “game setting customization” is not selected. If so (step S3608: No), the process moves to step S3610.

<Step S3609>
When determining that the selection image 935 of “game setting customization” is selected (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 65 (B) and FIG. 66 (D)) to the game setting screen. A game setting screen shift process for shifting to 94 (see FIG. 65 (C) and FIG. 66 (A)) is executed (step S3609). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off, sets the game setting screen display flag to on, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3610>
In step S3610, the MPU 51 shifts to a display screen corresponding to the item selected by the player when the item selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is other than “end” and “game setting customization”. . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off.

[Game setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process (step S3406 of the game setting process in FIG. 64). In the game setting screen processing, a setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 66 (B)), a setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 66 (B)), a setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 66 (B)), a game setting screen 94 (see FIG. Processing for shifting the display screen to the screen 96 (see FIG. 66 (C)) or the top menu screen (see FIG. 66 (D)) is executed.

<Step S3701>
In step S3701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3702, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3701: No). The process moves to step S3703.

<Step S3702>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S3701: Yes), the game setting screen display flag is set to off (Step S3702), and the game setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3703>
In step S3703, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. More specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the upper selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 30B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 30C) are higher. It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3703: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3704, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3703: NO). Is shifted to step S3705.

<Step S3704>
In step S3704, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, similarly to the temporary selection display change processing in step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. In response to this, a temporary selection display change process of moving the cursor image 936 and the temporary selection display upward or downward on the game setting screen 94 is executed. When the processing in step S3704 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 30 (F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3706, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S3705: No). The game setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3706>
In step S3706, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 943 (see FIG. 66A) of the “normal music selection setting” on the game setting screen 94 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “normal music selection setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting” has been selected (step S3706: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S3707, and determines that the selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting” has not been selected. If so (step S3706: No), the process moves to step S3708.

<Step S3707>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 943 of “Normal music selection setting” has been selected (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 65 (C) and FIG. 66 (A)). A setting item selection screen transition process for transitioning to the selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 66B and 67) is executed (step S3707). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 944 (see FIG. 66A) of the “setting history music selection setting” on the game setting screen 94 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “setting history music selection setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 944 of “setting history music selection setting” has been selected (step S3708: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S3709, and the selection image 944 of “setting history music selection setting” has not been selected. If it is determined (No at Step S3708), the process proceeds to Step S3710.

<Step S3709>
When it is determined that the selection image 944 of “setting history music selection setting” has been selected (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 65 (C) and FIG. 66 (A)). A setting history selection screen shift process for shifting to the history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 66C) is executed (step S3709). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3710>
In step S3710, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 945 of “return to top menu” on the game setting screen 94 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 945 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S3710: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3711, and determines that the selection image 945 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S3710: No), the process moves to step S3712.

<Step S3711>
If it is determined that the selection image 945 of “Return to top menu” has been selected (step S3710: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIGS. 65 (C) and 66 (A)) to the top menu screen. 93 (see FIG. 65 (B) and FIG. 66 (D)) to execute a top menu screen shift process (step S3711). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to on while setting the game setting screen display flag to off, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3712>
In step S3712, the MPU 51 selects the item selected by the player when the item selected by the operation on the determination button 21B is other than "normal music selection setting", "setting history music selection setting", and "return to the top menu". Move to the display screen corresponding to the item. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off.

[Setting item selection process]
Here, FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting item selection process (step S3408 of the game setting process of FIG. 64). As shown in FIG. 67, in the setting item selection process, from the music selection related items at the time of the jackpot game displayed on the setting item selection screen 95, in accordance with the item selected by the player operating the selection determining unit 21, Processing for shifting the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to various setting screens 97 to 99 and the like is executed. In the following, as the setting item selection processing, a case where the music selection related items are a melody pattern, a music list display (music selection image 83), and a music selection button effect will be described as an example. However, the music selection related items are not limited to the melody pattern, the music list display (the music selection image 83), and the music selection button effect. For example, instead of part or all of the melody pattern, the music list display (the music selection image 83), and the music selection button effect, it is possible to allow the player to set other music selection related items. For example, as another music selection related item, music fixation for fixing the initial tentatively selected music or the selected music by setting by the player can be considered.

<Step S3801>
In step S3801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has started (Step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3802, and determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S3801: No). The process moves to step S3803.

<Step S3802>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off (Step S3802), and ends the setting item selection processing.

<Step S3803>
In step S3803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 issues an upper selection button based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIGS. 30B and 30C). It is determined whether the player has operated the 211 or the lower selection button 212.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3803: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3804, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3803: No). Is shifted to step S3805.

<Step S3804>
If it is determined that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button similarly to the temporary selection display change processing of step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. A temporary selection display change process of moving the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display upward or downward in the setting item selection screen 95 is executed according to which of the button 211 and the lower selection button 212 (step). S3804). When the processing in step S3804 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 30F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S3805: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3806, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S3805: NO). The game setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3806>
In step S3806, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 951 (see FIG. 67) of “melody pattern setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “melody pattern setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 951 of “melody pattern setting” has been selected (step S3806: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S3807, and determines that the selected image 951 of “melody pattern setting” has not been selected. If so (step S3806: No), the process moves to step S3808.

<Step S3807>
When it is determined that the selected image 951 of “melody pattern setting” is selected (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97 as shown in FIG. The melody pattern setting screen shift processing is executed (step S3807). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3808>
In step S3808, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 952 (see FIG. 67) of “song list display setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “song list display setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 952 of “song list display setting” has been selected (step S3808: Yes), the processing moves to step S3809, and the selected image 952 of “song list display setting” has not been selected. If it is determined (No at Step S3808), the process proceeds to Step S3810.

<Step S3809>
When it is determined that the selected image 952 of “song list display setting” is selected (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98 as shown in FIG. The music list display setting screen shift processing to be shifted is executed (step S3809). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, sets the music list display setting screen display flag to on, and ends the setting item selection screen processing.

<Step S3810>
In step S3810, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 953 (see FIG. 67) of “tune selection button effect setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 has been selected by the player operating the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "tune selection button effect setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 953 of “tune selection button effect setting” has been selected (step S3810: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3811, and the selection image 953 of “tune selection button effect setting” is not selected. If it is determined (No at Step S3810), the process proceeds to Step S3812.

<Step S3811>
If it is determined that the selection image 953 of “tune selection button effect setting” is selected (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music selection button effect setting screen 99, as shown in FIG. A music selection button effect setting screen shift process to be shifted is executed (step S3811). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to on, and ends the setting item selection screen processing.

<Step S3812>
In step S3812, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 954 (see FIG. 67) of “return one” on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is an item of "return one." If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 954 has been selected (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3813 and determines that the “return one” selection image 954 has not been selected. If so (step S3812: No), the process moves to step S3814.

<Step S3813>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 954 has been selected (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the game setting screen 94 as shown in FIG. Step S3813). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off while setting the game setting screen display flag to off, and ends the setting item selection process.

<Step S3814>
If the item selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B is other than “melody pattern setting”, “song list display setting”, “song selection button effect setting”, and “return by one”, the MPU 51 Since it can be determined that "return" has been selected, as shown in FIG. 67, a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 is executed (step S3814). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, and sets the top menu screen display flag to on.

[Melody pattern setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting screen process (step S3410 of the game setting process in FIG. 64). In the melody pattern setting screen processing, a process for setting a melody pattern (start of music output) of the temporarily selected music and the selected music output from the speaker 26 in the big hit game is executed. FIG. 74 shows an example of the melody pattern setting screen 97. In the following, the melody pattern setting screen 97 will be described first with reference to FIG. 74, and then the melody pattern setting screen processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the melody pattern setting screen 97 is a screen for setting the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected music in the jackpot game, the unselected music as the selected music, and the already selected music. . The melody pattern setting screen 97 includes selection images 974 to 976 and a selection determination section image 977 in addition to the tentatively selected music setting image 971, the unselected music setting image 972, and the already-selected music setting image 973.

  The temporarily selected music setting image 971 is an image for setting the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music. That is, the temporarily selected music setting image 971 is an image for setting whether to start output from the singing start portion or to start from the chorus portion when the temporarily selected music is selected by the player, and sing the output start. There is a singing start selection image for setting to be performed from the start portion, and a rust selection image for setting to start output from the climax portion.

  The unselected song setting image 972 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected song is an unselected song. That is, the unselected song setting image 972 is an image for setting whether to start output from the singing portion or start from the chorus portion when an unselected song is selected by the player, and sing the output start. There is a singing start selection image for setting to be performed from the start portion, and a rust selection image for setting to start output from the climax portion.

  The selected music setting image 973 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected music is a selected music. That is, the already-selected music setting image 973 is an image for setting whether to start output from the singing out portion or to start from the chorus portion when the already-selected music is selected by the player. There is a singing start selection image for setting to start from the singing start portion, and a rust selection image for setting to start output from the climax portion.

  The plurality of selected images 974 to 976 are selected when the display screen is returned by one and the screen is shifted to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 66 (B) and 67). A selection image 975 of “return to top menu” selected when shifting the display screen to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)), and a tentatively selected music piece, an unselected music piece, and a selected music piece And a selection image 976 of “Random” for causing the gaming machine 10 to set the output start of the game. In the present embodiment, when the automatic setting is performed by selecting the selected image 976 of “automatic”, the melody patterns of the tentatively selected music, the unselected music, and the already-selected music are all set to the default settings.

  The selection determining unit image 977 is an image imitating the selection determining unit 21 and is an image indicating that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by operating the selection determining unit 21. In the selection deciding unit image 977, images corresponding to the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 are marked with “selection”, and the selection buttons 211 to 214 are displayed. The corresponding image is highlighted. The images corresponding to the selection buttons 211 to 214 may be highlighted by blinking display or the like. In addition, in the selection determining section image 977, the word “determined” is added to the image corresponding to the determination button 21B, indicating that the operation should be performed when selecting the provisionally selected item.

<Step S3901>
Returning to the description of FIG. 73, in step S3901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started (Step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3902, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S3901: No). The process moves to step S3903.

<Step S3902>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off (Step S3902), and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3903>
In step S3903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 30B to 30E), whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3903: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3904, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3903: NO). Is shifted to step S3905.

<Step S3904>
In step S3904, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 on the melody pattern setting screen 97 according to the provisional selection. A temporary selection display change process for moving the display in one of up, down, left, and right directions is performed. When the processing in step S3904 ends, the MPU 51 ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 30 (F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3906, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S3905: No). The melody pattern setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3906>
In step S3906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 74) of “return one” on the melody pattern setting screen 97 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S3906: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3907 and determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S3906: No), the process moves to step S3908.

<Step S3907>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S3906: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 74) to the setting item selection screen 95 (FIG. 66 (B)). ) And FIG. 67) are executed (step S3907). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3908>
In step S3908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 74) of “Return to top menu” on the melody pattern setting screen 97 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S3908: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S3909, and determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S3908: No), the process moves to step S3910.

<Step S3909>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” has been selected (step S3908: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 65 (B) and FIG. A top menu screen shift process for shifting to FIG. 66 (D) is executed (step S3909). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 of “Random” on the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 74) is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S3910: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3911, and determines that the selected image 976 of “automatic” has not been selected (step S3911). (S3910: No), the process moves to step S3912.

<Step S3911>
If it is determined that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S3910: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody patterns of the tentatively-selected tune, the unselected tune, and the already-selected tune as default (step S3911). Here, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that the melody pattern 2 starts output from the chorus portion for the temporarily selected song, and the melody pattern 2 starts output from the singing start portion (A melody portion) for the selected song as the selected song. The melody pattern 1 and the melody pattern 2 which is an unselected song as a selected song is an output start from a chorus portion (see FIG. 50).

<Step S3912>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “automatic selection” is not selected (step S3910: No), that is, the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is “return one”, “return to top menu”, or “automatic selection” If it does not correspond to the operation for the item No., the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the setting temporarily selected in the tentatively selected music setting image 971, the unselected music setting image 972, and the already selected music setting image 973 (step S3912). ). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisionally selected state shown in FIG. 74, the melody pattern 2 for starting output from the chorus portion for the provisionally selected music piece, and singing for the unselected music piece as the selected music piece A melody pattern 1 that starts output from the output portion (A melody portion) and a melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus portion for a selected tune as a selected tune are set. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the setting content and the setting time of the melody pattern in the RAM 512. This makes it possible to display the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 82) in the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 81 described later.

  In this manner, in step S3912, the player selects and sets the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected song and the melody pattern (output start portion) of the unselected song and the already-selected song as the selected song. Operation can be performed on the unit 21. Therefore, the player can select whether to listen to the tentatively selected music piece and the selected music piece from the beginning or to listen to the climax part having the highest climax according to his / her taste. This makes it easier to determine whether the tentatively selected tune is a favorite tune, and allows the user to enjoy the selected tune in accordance with his or her preference in both the case of the unselected tune and the already-selected tune.

<Step S3913>
In step S3913, the MPU 51 performs a melody pattern setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets a melody pattern setting flag to ON for an item set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. Here, the melody pattern setting flag includes a temporarily selected song melody pattern setting flag for the temporarily selected song, an unselected song melody pattern setting flag for the unselected song, and a selected song melody pattern setting flag for the already selected song. For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the tentative selection state illustrated in FIG. 74, the unselected music melody pattern setting flag and the unselected music melody pattern setting flags The selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON.

<Step S3914>
In step S3914, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)). That is, when the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music piece, the unselected music piece, and the already selected music piece is set, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

[Song list display setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting screen process (step S3412 of the game setting process of FIG. 64). In the music list display setting screen processing, a non-selected music image 834 for a dislike music (non-selected music) and a selected music image 831 (see FIG. 37) for a favorite music (selected music) of the music selection image 83 in the jackpot game are displayed. For performing display setting relating to the presence / absence (display mode) is performed. FIG. 76 (A) shows an example of the music list display setting screen 98, and FIGS. 76 (B), 77 (A) and 77 (B) show examples of the display mode of the music selection image display screen 82. . In the following, display modes of the music list display setting screen 98 and the music selection image display screen 82 will be described first with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The music list display setting screen 98 shown in FIG. 76 (A) is a screen for setting the display mode of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 37) displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game. . The music list display setting screen 98 includes, in addition to the dislike music selection image 981 and the favorite music selection image 982, the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection determination section image 977 as in the melody pattern setting screen 97. Note that the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection determination unit image 977 are the same as those in the case of the melody pattern setting screen 97, and thus description thereof will be omitted. In the following, when the selected images 974 to 976 and the selection determining unit image 977 on the melody pattern setting screen 97 are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  The dislike music selection image 981 is an image for setting whether to display the non-selected music image 834 (see FIG. 37) for the dislike selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. This dislike music selection image 981 is a display selection image selected when setting to display the non-selected music image 834 and a non-display selection image selected when setting to hide the non-selected music image 834 are performed. Have. In the present embodiment, “to hide the non-selected music image 834” does not mean that the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not displayed, but the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not selected other than the non-selected music. This means that the music is displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when the setting for hiding the non-selected music image 834 is performed, the music selection image display screen 82 has a display mode as shown in FIG. 76 (B).

  Note that, in a case where the setting for hiding the non-selected music image 834 is performed, it is considered as another embodiment that the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not displayed. According to such another embodiment, when the non-selected music image 834 is set to non-display, the non-selected music that has not been selected by the player despite having been previously selected as the initial temporarily selected music is incorrectly selected. Selection can be avoided.

  The favorite music selection image 982 is an image for setting whether or not to display the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 37) for the favorite selection music (selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. The favorite music selection image 982 includes a display selection image selected when setting to display the selected music image 831 and a non-display selection image selected when setting to hide the selected music image 831 are performed. Have. In the present embodiment, “hiding the selected music image 831” does not mean that the music selection image 83 corresponding to the selected music is not displayed, but that the music selection image 83 corresponding to the selected music is not selected other than the non-selected music. This means that the music is displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when the setting for hiding the selected music image 831 is performed, the music selection image display screen 82 has a display mode as shown in FIG. 77 (A).

  Note that, in a case where the setting for hiding the already-selected music image 831 is performed, it is conceivable as another embodiment that the music selection image 83 for the already-selected music is not displayed. According to such another embodiment, when the already-selected music image 831 is set to non-display, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly selecting the already-selected music previously selected.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (B), when both the non-selected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 are set to non-display, the music selection images 83 other than the tentatively selected music image 832 are displayed in the same manner. You.

<Step S4001>
Returning to the description of FIG. 75, in step S4001 of the music list display setting screen processing, the MPU 51 starts changing the main symbol 921 in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the variable display counter is 0. Is determined. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (Step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S4002, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S4001: No). The process moves to step S4003.

<Step S4002>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off (Step S4002), and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4003>
In step S4003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 30B to 30E), whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on selection button 21A (step S4003: Yes), it moves the process to step S4004, and determines that an operation has not been performed on selection button 21A (step S4003: No). Shifts to step S4005.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 on the music list display setting screen 98 according to the temporary selection. A temporary selection display change process of moving the selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the processing in step S4004 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4005>
In step S4005, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 30F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4006, and if the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4005: No), The music list display setting screen processing ends.

<Step S4006>
In step S4006, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player operates the enter button 21B to select the “return one” selection image 974 (see FIG. 76A) on the music list display setting screen 98. . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4006: Yes), the processing moves to step S4007, and determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4006: No), the process moves to step S4008.

<Step S4007>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 of “return one” has been selected (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 76A) to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 76A). A setting item selection screen shift process for shifting to (FIG. 66 (B) and FIG. 67) is executed (step S4007). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4008>
In step S4008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 76 (A)) of “Return to top menu” on the music list display setting screen 98 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4009, and determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4008: No), the process moves to step S4010.

<Step S4009>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” has been selected (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 76A) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 65). A top menu screen shift process for shifting to (B) and FIG. 66 (D)) is executed (step S4009). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4010>
In step S4010, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 76 (A)) of “Random” on the music list display setting screen 98 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4011, and determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4010). (S4010: No), the process moves to step S4012.

<Step S4011>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 selects a non-selected music image 834 for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82 (see FIG. 37). The display setting of the already-selected music image 831 (see FIG. 37) for the favorite and selected music (selected music) is set to default (step S4011). Here, the default setting of the display setting is a setting in which both the non-selected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 37).

<Step S4012>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” is not selected (step S4010: No), that is, the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is “return one”, “return to the top menu”, or “random” If the operation does not correspond to the operation of the item No., the MPU 51 sets the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image to the settings temporarily selected for the dislike selected music (non-selected music) and the favorite selected music (selected music). 831 (see FIG. 37) is set (step S4012). For example, when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. 76A, the non-selected music image 834 is displayed, and the already-selected music image 831 is set to non-display. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the setting content and the setting time of the music selection image 83 in the RAM 512. This makes it possible to display the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 84) in the music list display setting history screen processing of FIG. 83 described later.

  As described above, in step S4012, the display or non-display of the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music (disliked music) image 834 included in the music selection image 83 can be set, so that the display mode is adjusted to the preference of the player. The music selection image 83 can be displayed on the symbol display section 341. Thereby, the player can select the music to be output from the speaker 26 based on the music selection image 83 in the display mode set by the player. In addition, the player makes the non-display setting of the already-selected music image 831 so that, for example, the already-selected music image 831 for the already-selected music selected by the previous player in the past is included in the music selection image 83. In some cases, the music selection image 83 that does not include the already-selected music image 831 can be displayed. Similarly, the player performs the non-display setting of the non-selected music image 834 so that, for example, the music selection image 83 includes the non-selected music image 834 for the non-selected music that the previous player did not select in the past. For example, the music selection image 83 that does not include the non-selected music image 834 can be displayed.

<Step S4013>
In step S4013, the MPU 51 performs a non-display setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, a non-display setting flag is set to ON for an item set to “non-display” different from the default setting. Here, the non-display setting flag includes a non-selected music image non-display setting flag for a disliked selected music (non-selected music) and a selected music image non-display setting flag for a favorite selected music (selected music). For example, when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisionally selected state shown in FIG. 76A, a favorite selected music (selected music) having a display setting different from the default setting is not selected. The display setting flag is set to ON.

<Step S4014>
In step S4014, the MPU 51 performs a top menu screen shift process of shifting the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 76 (A)) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 65 (B) and FIG. 66 (D)). Execute. That is, when the display setting of the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

[Song selection button effect setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting screen processing (step S3414 of the game setting processing in FIG. 64). In the music selection button effect setting screen process, a process for performing settings related to the music selection button effect executed when selecting a song in the jackpot game is executed. FIG. 79 shows an example of the music selection button effect setting screen 99. Hereinafter, the music selection button effect setting screen 99 will be described first with reference to FIG. 79, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The music selection button effect setting screen 99 shown in FIG. 79 is a screen for performing settings related to the music selection button effect executed when selecting a song in the jackpot game. The music selection button effect setting screen 99 includes, in addition to the melody pattern setting screen 97, the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection images, in addition to the melody pattern setting screen 97, in addition to the expected degree suggestive effect setting image 991, the probability change confirmed effect setting image 992, and the held consecutive cottage confirmed effect setting image 993. A determination unit image 977 is included.

  The expectation suggestion effect setting image 991 is an image for setting whether to execute the expectation suggestion effect at the time of selecting a song in the jackpot game. The expected degree suggestion effect setting image 991 is an execution selection image (an image of “execute”) for setting execution of an expected degree suggestion effect, and a non-execution selection image (set of not executing an expectation degree suggestion effect) ( "Do not run" image). Note that the expected degree suggestion effect is an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed as described above. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effects 1 to 8 described with reference to FIG. .

  The probability-change-determined effect setting image 992 is an image for setting whether to execute the probability-change-determined effect at the time of selecting a song in the jackpot game. The probable change confirmation effect setting image 992 is an execution selection image (image of “execute”) for setting execution of the probabilistic change effect, and a non-execution selection image (“not executed”) for setting not to execute the probabilistic change effect. Image). Note that the probability-change-determined effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the promotion effect is executed as described above. In the present embodiment, the fixed effect 1 and the fixed effect 3 described with reference to FIG. 56 correspond thereto.

  The reserved extended-village-determined effect setting image 993 is an image for setting whether or not to execute the reserved extended-village-determined effect at the time of selecting a song in the jackpot game. The reserved extended-village-determined effect setting image 993 includes an execution selection image (image of “execute”) for setting to execute the reserved-residential-determined effect, and a non-execution to set not to execute the reserved extended-village confirmed effect. It has a selected image (an image of “do not execute”). Note that the reserved extended villa finalization effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the reserved extended villa is performed as described above, and in the present embodiment, the finalized production 2 and the finalized production 4 described with reference to FIG. .

<Step S4101>
Returning to the description of FIG. 78, in step S4101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4102 and determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4101: No). The process moves to step S4103.

<Step S4102>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to off (Step S4102), and ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4103>
In step S4103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 30B to 30E), whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4104, and if the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4103: No), the process proceeds. Shifts to step S4105.

<Step S4104>
In step S4104, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 on the music selection button effect setting screen 99. A temporary selection display change process of moving the selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the processing in step S4104 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect setting screen processing.

<Step S4105>
In step S4105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 30F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4106, and if the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4105: No), The music selection button effect setting screen processing ends.

<Step S4106>
In step S4106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 79) of “return one” on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4106: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S4107, and determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4106: No), the process moves to step S4108.

<Step S4107>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4106: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 79) to the setting item selection screen 95 (FIG. 66 (FIG. 66)). B) and a setting item selection screen transition process for transitioning to FIG. 67) is executed (step S4107). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4108>
In step S4108, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 79) of “Return to top menu” on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4108: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S4109, and determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4108: No), the process moves to step S4110.

<Step S4109>
When determining that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” is selected (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 79) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 65 (B)). And a top menu screen shift process for shifting to FIG. 66 (D) (step S4109). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to on while setting the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, and ends the music selection button effect setting screen processing.

<Step S4110>
In step S4110, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 79) of “Random” on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4111, and determines that the selected image 976 of “automatic” has not been selected (step S4110). S4110: No), the process moves to step S4112.

<Step S4111>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” is selected (step S4110: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the effect regarding the presence / absence of the expected degree suggestion effect as the song selection button effect, the certainty change confirmation effect, and the execution of the hold consecutive guesthouse confirmation effect. The setting is set to default (step S4111). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which any of the effect indicating the degree of expectation, the certainty-change effect, and the held extended-house effect are executed.

<Step S4112>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4110: No), that is, when the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is “return one”, “return to the top menu”, or “random” If it does not correspond to the operation for the item of, the MPU 51 sets the effect execution setting relating to the presence or absence of the execution of the expected effect suggestion effect, the probable change finalizing effect, and the hold consecutive guesthouse finalizing effect (step S4112). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 79, the expected degree suggestion effect is executed, the probable change confirmation effect is executed, and the reserved extended house confirmation effect is set to non-execution. At this time, the MPU 51 causes the RAM 512 to store the setting contents and the setting time of the music selection button effect. This makes it possible to display the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 86) in the music selection button effect setting history screen processing of FIG. 85 described later.

  As described above, in step S4112, the setting or non-execution of the music selection button effect can be individually performed for the expectation degree suggestion effect, the probable change confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive residence confirmation effect, so that the music selection button effect is executed according to the player's preference. Can be done. Thereby, the player can enjoy the operation of selecting the music in the jackpot game in a manner that suits him / her.

  Specifically, the player sets the expectation degree suggestion effect to execution, for example, by performing a determination operation on the determination button 21B for selecting a song, by changing the expectation degree of the 5R probability change jackpot game state or the 16R probability change jackpot game state. You can enjoy it as an act to confirm. On the other hand, by setting the expectation suggestion effect to non-execution, since the expectation effect suggestion effect is not executed even when the decision operation is performed, the 5R probability change jackpot can be achieved without worrying about the expectation value suggested by the expectation effect suggestion effect. It is possible to enjoy the jackpot game while expecting the gaming state or the 16R sure-change jackpot game state.

  Further, by setting the probable change confirmation effect to execution, the player confirms whether or not the deciding operation on the decision button 21B for selecting a song is the 5R probable jackpot game state or the 16R probable jackpot game state, for example. You can enjoy it as an act. On the other hand, by setting the probable-change confirmed effect to non-execution, since the probable-change confirmed effect is not executed even when the decision operation is performed, the 5R probable-variable-hitting game state does not affect whether or not the probable-change confirmed effect is performed. Alternatively, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game while expecting the 16R sure-change jackpot game state.

  Furthermore, the player enjoys the determination operation on the determination button 21B for selecting a song, for example, as an action for confirming whether or not the reservation extended villa occurs by setting the reserved extended villa finalization effect to execution. be able to. On the other hand, by setting the hold extended villa finalization effect to non-execution, even if the determination operation is performed, the hold extended villa finalization effect is not executed. In addition, it is possible to enjoy the reservation game while expecting the occurrence of the reservation series.

<Step S4113>
In step S4113, the MPU 51 performs an effect non-execution setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the music selection button effect flag is set to ON for an item set to “do not execute” different from the default setting. Here, the effect non-execution setting flag includes an expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag, a probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag, and a holdable consecutive villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag. For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 79, the reservation extended villa finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON for the reservation extended villa finalization effect different from the default setting.

<Step S4114>
In step S4114, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process of shifting the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 79) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)). That is, when the setting as to whether or not to execute the music selection button effect is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

[Setting history selection process]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting history selection processing (step S3416 of the game setting processing in FIG. 64). As shown in FIG. 68, in the setting history selection processing, the selection decision unit 21 by the player determines the music selection related items at the time of the jackpot game displayed on the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 66C and 68). According to the item selected by the operation for, the process of shifting the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to various setting screens 87 to 89 is executed (see FIG. 68). In the following, as the setting history selection processing, similarly to the setting item selection processing described with reference to FIG. 72, three music selection related items are a melody pattern, a music list display (song selection image 83), and a music selection button effect. Although the case will be described as an example, the same change as in the setting item selection processing can be performed on the music selection related items.

<Step S4201>
In step S4201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4202, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4201: No). The process moves to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off (Step S4202), and ends the setting history selection processing.

<Step S4203>
In step S4203, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. More specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the upper selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 30B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 30C) are higher. It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4203: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4204, and if the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4203: No), the process proceeds. Shifts to step S4205.

<Step S4204>
In step S4204, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, similarly to the temporary selection display change processing in step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. , A temporary selection display change process of moving the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display upward or downward on the setting history selection screen 96 is executed. When the processing in step S4204 ends, the MPU 51 ends the setting history selection processing.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 30F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4206, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4205: No). The setting history selection processing ends.

<Step S4206>
In step S4206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 961 (see FIG. 68) of the “melody pattern setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the player operating the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “melody pattern setting history”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 961 of “melody pattern setting history” has been selected (step S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4207, and the selected image 961 of “melody pattern setting history” has not been selected. If it is determined (step S4206: No), the process proceeds to step S4208.

<Step S4207>
If it is determined that the selected image 961 of “melody pattern setting history” has been selected (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 66 (C) and FIG. 68) to the melody pattern setting. A melody pattern setting history screen shift process for shifting to the history screen 87 (see FIG. 82) is executed (step S4207). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF, sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4208>
In step S4208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 962 (see FIG. 68) of “song list display setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the player operating the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the “song list display setting history”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 962 of “Song list display setting history” has been selected (Step S4208: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S4209, and the selected image 962 of “Song list display setting history” is selected. If it is determined that it has not been performed (step S4208: No), the process proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4209>
If it is determined that the selected image 962 of “Song list display setting history” has been selected (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen as shown in FIG. Then, a music list display setting history screen shift process to be shifted to 88 is executed (step S4209). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off, sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to on, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4210>
In step S4210, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 963 (see FIG. 68) of the “song selection button effect setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the “music selection button effect setting history”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 963 of “Song selection button effect setting history” has been selected (step S4210: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4211, and the selection image 963 of “Song selection button effect setting history” is selected. If it is determined that it has not been performed (step S4210: No), the process proceeds to step S4212.

<Step S4211>
When it is determined that the selection image 963 of “Song selection button effect setting history” has been selected (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music selection button effect setting history screen as shown in FIG. 89 (step S4211). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection history screen display flag to off, sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to on, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4212>
In step S4212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 964 (see FIG. 68) of “return one” on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selected image 964 has been selected (step S4212: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4213 and determines that the “return one” selected image 964 has not been selected. If so (step S4212: No), the process moves to step S4214.

<Step S4213>
If it is determined that the “return one” selection image 964 has been selected (step S4212: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94, as shown in FIG. Step S4213). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off while setting the game setting screen display flag to off, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4214>
The MPU 51 determines that the item selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B is other than “melody pattern setting history”, “song list display setting history”, “song selection button effect setting history”, and “return one”. Since it can be determined that “return to the top menu” has been selected, as shown in FIG. 68, a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 is executed (step S4214). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off, and sets the top menu screen display flag to on.

[Melody pattern setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting history screen processing (step S3418 of the game setting processing in FIG. 64). In the melody pattern setting history screen process, a process of performing a setting regarding the melody pattern (start of music output) of the temporarily selected music and the selected music output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game based on the setting history is executed. FIG. 82 shows an example of the melody pattern setting history screen 87. In the following, the melody pattern setting history screen 87 will be described first with reference to FIG. 82, and then the melody pattern setting screen history processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The melody pattern setting history screen 87 shown in FIG. 82 is used to set the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected music in the jackpot game, the unselected music as the selected music, and the already selected music based on the setting history. It is a screen of. The melody pattern setting history screen 87 includes a setting history display image 871 that displays the melody pattern settings of the tentatively selected tune, the unselected tune, and the already-selected tune a plurality of times, a history selection image 872, a selection image 974 to 976, and a selection determination unit. Image 977 is included.

  The setting history display image 871 shows histories 1 to 3 relating to three melody pattern settings including the current melody pattern setting. Each of the melody pattern setting histories 1 to 3 includes information on the set time and information on the past setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected tune, the unselected tune, and the already-selected tune.

  The history selection image 872 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selected image is for setting the melody pattern of the tentatively selected tune, the unselected tune, and the already-selected tune in the setting contents of the history 1. The history 2 selection image is for setting the melody patterns of the tentatively selected music piece, the unselected music piece, and the already selected music piece in the setting content of the history 2. The history 3 selection image is for setting the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music in the setting contents of the history 3. The histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 can be changed according to an operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 can be changed. The histories 1 to 3 provisionally selected in the setting history display image 871 change in conjunction with the changes of 3.

<Step S4301>
Returning to the description of FIG. 81, in step S4301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (Step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S4302, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S4301: No). The process moves to step S4303.

<Step S4302>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off (Step S4302), and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4303>
In step S4303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 30B to 30E), whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4303: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4304, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4303: No). Shifts to step S4305.

<Step S4304>
In step S4304, the MPU 51 temporarily determines whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 on the melody pattern setting history screen 87. A temporary selection display change process of moving the selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the processing in step S4304 ends, the MPU 51 ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4305>
In step S4305, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 30F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4305: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4306, and if the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4305: No), The melody pattern setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4306>
In step S4306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 82) of “return one” on the melody pattern setting history screen is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selected image 974 has been selected (step S4306: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4307 and determines that the “return one” selected image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4306: No), the process moves to step S4308.

<Step S4307>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 of “return one” has been selected (step S4306: YES), the display screen changes from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 82) to the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 66 (FIG. 66)). C) and a setting history selection screen shift process for shifting to (see FIG. 68) is executed (step S4307). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to OFF, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4308>
In step S4308, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 82) of “Return to top menu” on the melody pattern setting history screen is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4308: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4309, and determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4308: No), the process moves to step S4310.

<Step S4309>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of “return to top menu” is selected (step S4308: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 82) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 65 (B)). And a top menu screen shift process for shifting to (FIG. 66D) (step S4309). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4310>
In step S4310, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 82) of “Random” on the melody pattern setting history screen is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4311, and determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4310). (S4310: No), the process moves to step S4312.

<Step S4311>
If it is determined that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody patterns of the tentatively selected tune, the unselected tune, and the already-selected tune as default (step S4311). Here, the default settings of the melody pattern are melody pattern 1 for starting output from the chorus portion for the temporarily selected song, melody pattern 2 for starting output from the chorus portion for the unselected song, and singing for the selected song. This is a melody pattern 1 that starts output from the output portion (A melody portion) (see FIG. 50).

<Step S4312>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” is not selected (step S4310: No), the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is any one of “return one”, “return to the top menu”, and “random”. If the operation does not correspond to the operation on the item, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the same setting as the setting history temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 (step S4312). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. 82, the melody pattern is set to the same setting as the history 2. That is, the melody pattern 1 that starts output from the singing start portion (A melody portion) for the tentatively selected song, the melody pattern 2 that starts output from the climax portion for an unselected song, and the melody pattern for the already selected song Is set to the melody pattern 2 at which the output of the melody starts.

  As described above, in step S4312, the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected song and the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the unselected song and the already-selected song as the selected song are performed on the melody pattern setting history screen. Since it can be performed by the player operating the selection deciding unit 21 based on the melody pattern 87, the same effect as in the case of setting the melody pattern according to the melody pattern setting screen 97 shifted from the setting item selection screen 95 can be enjoyed. In addition, since the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected music piece and the selected music piece can be selected from the setting history, the melody pattern can be set to the same content as the past setting content by a simple operation on the selection determining section 21. Can be. Therefore, the player can set a desired melody pattern in accordance with the melody pattern setting history screen 87 with a small number of operations on the selection deciding section 21 when returning to the previous setting or the like.

<Step S4313>
In step S4313, the MPU 51 performs a melody pattern setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, a melody pattern setting flag is set to ON for an item set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. 82, the temporary selection music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON for the temporary selection music set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. You.

<Step S4314>
In step S4314, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 82) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)). That is, when the melody pattern of the selected music image 831, the tentatively selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 (see FIG. 37) is set, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen to the top menu screen. Move to 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

[Song list display setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting history screen processing (step S3420 of the game setting processing in FIG. 64). In the music list display setting history screen processing, the unselected music image 834 for the dislike music (non-selected music) and the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 37) for the favorite music (selected music) of the music selection image 83 in the jackpot game are displayed. A process for performing display setting regarding presence / absence of display (display mode) based on the setting history is executed. FIG. 84 shows an example of the music list display setting history screen 88. In the following, the music list display setting history screen 88 will be described first with reference to FIG. 84, and then the music list display setting history screen processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The music list display setting history screen 88 shown in FIG. 84 is used to set the presence / absence (display mode) of the music selection image 83 displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game based on the setting history. Screen. The music list display setting history screen 88 displays a setting history display image 881 and a history selection image 882 that display the setting of presence / absence of dislike music (non-selected music) and favorite music (selected music) for a plurality of times, as well as a selected image. 974 to 976 and a selection determination unit image 977.

  The setting history display image 881 shows histories 1 to 3 related to three settings including the setting of whether to display the current non-selected music and the selected music. Each of the setting histories 1 to 3 includes information on the set time and information on whether or not the non-selected music and the selected music are displayed.

  The history selection image 882 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selected image is for setting whether or not to display the non-selected music and the selected music in the setting contents of the history 1. The history 2 selection image is for setting whether to display the non-selected music and the already-selected music in the setting contents of the history 2. The history 3 selection image is for setting whether to display the non-selected music and the already-selected music in the setting contents of the history 3. The histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 can be changed in accordance with an operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 882. The histories 1 to 3 tentatively selected in the setting history display image 881 change in conjunction with the changes of to １〜３3.

<Step S4401>
83, in step S4401, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4402, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4401: No). Then, the process shifts to step S4403.

<Step S4402>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off (Step S4402), and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4403>
In step S4403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 30B to 30E), whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4403: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4404, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4403: No). Is shifted to step S4405.

<Step S4404>
In step S4404, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 in the music list display setting history screen. A temporary selection display change process of moving the selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the processing in step S4404 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4405>
In step S4405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 30F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4406, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4405: No). The music list display setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4406>
In step S4406, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 84) of “return one” on the music list display setting history screen 88 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4407 and determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4406: No), the process moves to step S4408.

<Step S4407>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4406: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 84) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 66). (C) and a setting history selection screen shift process for shifting to (refer to FIG. 68) are executed (step S4407). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to off, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4408>
In step S4408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 84) of “Return to top menu” on the music list display setting history screen 88 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4408: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4409, and determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4408: No), the process moves to step S4410.

<Step S4409>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4408: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 84) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. ) And FIG. 66 (D)) is executed (step S4409). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4410>
In step S4410, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 84) of “Random” on the music list display setting history screen 88 has been selected by the player operating the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4410: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4411, and determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4411). (S4410: No), the process moves to step S4412.

<Step S4411>
If it is determined that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4410: Yes), the MPU 51 selects the non-selected music image 834 for the disliked selected music (unselected music) on the music selection image display screen 82 (see FIG. 37). Then, the display setting of the already-selected music image 831 (see FIG. 37) for the favorite and selected music (selected music) is set to a default (step S4411). Here, the default setting of the display setting is a setting in which both the non-selected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 37).

<Step S4412>
If it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4410: No), that is, if the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is one of “return one”, “return to the top menu”, and “random” If the operation does not correspond to the operation for the item of, the MPU 51 performs the display setting of the unselected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 (see FIG. 37) in the setting of the setting history temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 (see FIG. 37). Step S4412). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. Specifically, both the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the disliked music (non-selected music) and the selected music image 831 corresponding to the favorite music (non-selected music) are set to be displayed.

  As described above, in step S4412, the display setting of the display or non-display of the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (dislike music) image 834 included in the music selection image 83 is displayed on the music list display setting history screen 88. Since it can be performed by the player on the basis of the operation on the selection deciding unit 21, the same effect as in the case where the display setting is performed in accordance with the music list display setting screen 98 shifted from the setting item selection screen 95 can be enjoyed. In addition, the display setting of the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (dislike music) image 834 can be selected from the setting history. Display settings can be made. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired display setting according to the music list display setting history screen 88 with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21.

<Step S4413>
In step S4413, the MPU 51 performs a music image non-display setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, a music image non-display setting flag is set to ON for an item set to “non-display” different from the default setting. For example, when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 84, the setting is the same as the default setting, and thus the non-selected music image non-display setting flag and the selected music image non-display setting flag are set. Are not set to on.

<Step S4414>
In step S4414, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process of shifting the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 84) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)). . That is, when the display setting of the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

[Song selection button effect setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting history screen processing (step S3422 of the game setting processing in FIG. 64). In the music selection button effect setting history screen processing, a process for performing an effect execution setting related to a music selection button effect executed at the time of music selection in the jackpot game is performed based on the setting history. FIG. 86 shows an example of the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. In the following, the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 will be described first with reference to FIG. 86, and then the music selection button effect setting history screen processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The music selection button effect setting history screen 89 shown in FIG. 86 is a screen for performing settings related to the effect performed when selecting a song in the jackpot game based on the setting history. The music selection button effect setting history screen 89 is a setting history display image that individually displays a plurality of settings for the presence / absence of the music selection button effect including the expectation degree suggesting effect, the probable change determining effect, and the holding extended guesthouse determining effect for each effect. 891, a history selection image 892, and selection images 974 to 976 and a selection determination unit image 977.

  The setting history display image 891 shows the histories 1 to 3 regarding three settings including the setting as to whether or not the current music selection button effect is to be executed. The setting histories 1 to 3 include information on the set time and information on the setting on whether or not each music selection button effect has been executed.

  The history selection image 892 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selection image is for setting a music selection button effect in the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 1. The history 2 selection image is for setting a music selection button effect in the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 2. The history 3 selection image is for setting a music selection button effect in the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 3. The histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 892 can be changed in accordance with an operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 892. The histories 1 to 3 provisionally selected in the setting history display image 891 change in conjunction with the changes of 〜3.

<Step S4501>
Returning to the description of FIG. 85, in step S4501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4502, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4501: No). The process moves to step S4503.

<Step S4502>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to off (Step S4502), and ends the music selection button effect setting history screen processing.

<Step S4503>
In step S4503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 30B to 30E), whether any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4503: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S4504, and if the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4503: No), the processing proceeds. Shifts to step S4505.

<Step S4504>
In step S4504, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 in the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. A temporary selection display change process for moving the temporary selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the process of step S4504 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect setting history screen process.

<Step S4505>
In step S4505, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 30F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4506, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4505: No). The music selection button effect setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4506>
In step S4506, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 86) of “return one” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4506: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4507 and determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4506: No), the process moves to step S4508.

<Step S4507>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4506: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 86) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 66). (C) and a setting history selection screen transition process (see FIG. 68) (step S4507). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to off, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4508>
In step S4508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 86) of “Return to top menu” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “Return to Top Menu” has been selected (step S4508: Yes), the processing shifts to step S4509, and determines that the selection image 975 of “Return to Top Menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4508: No), the process moves to step S4510.

<Step S4509>
When it is determined that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” is selected (step S4508: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 86) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 65 (B ) And FIG. 66 (D)) is executed (step S4509). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4510>
In step S4510, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 86) of “Random” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4510: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4511, and determines that the selected image 976 of “automatic” has not been selected (step S4511). (S4510: No), the process moves to step S4512.

<Step S4511>
If it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4510: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the effect regarding whether or not the expected degree suggestion effect as the song selection button effect, the definite change confirmation effect, and the hold extended guesthouse confirmation effect are performed. The setting is set to default (step S4511). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which any of the effect indicating the degree of expectation, the certainty-change effect, and the held extended-house effect are executed.

<Step S4512>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4110: No), that is, when the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is “return one”, “return to the top menu”, or “random” If it does not correspond to the operation for the item of, the MPU 51 sets the game setting relating to the execution of the expected degree suggestion effect, the certainty change determination effect, and the execution of the held consecutive cottage determination effect to the temporarily selected setting (step S4512). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. 86, the same setting as the history 3 is set. More specifically, none of the expected degree suggestion effect, the probable change confirmation effect, and the hold extended residence confirmation effect are set to non-execution.

  In this manner, in step S4512, the execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect can be set by the player operating the selection determining unit 21 based on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. The same effect as in the case where the effect execution setting is performed according to the music selection button effect setting screen 99 to be shifted can be enjoyed. In addition, since the effect execution setting of the music selection button effect can be selected from the setting history, the effect execution setting of the same content as the past setting content can be performed by a simple operation on the selection determining unit 21. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired effect execution setting based on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21.

<Step S4513>
In step S4513, the MPU 51 performs an effect non-execution setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON for an item set to “do not execute” different from the default setting. For example, when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed in the provisional selection state illustrated in FIG. 86, the effect execution suggestion effect, the probable change confirmation effect, and the hold-off consecutive villa confirmation effect that are set to the effect execution different from the default setting are: All of the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag, the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag, and the holdable consecutive villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag are set to ON.

<Step S4514>
In step S4514, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 86) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (D)). That is, when the effect execution setting for the music selection button effect is completed, the display screen is shifted to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the player operates the selection determining unit 21 to select the tentatively selected music image 832 that enables selection of the music included in the already-selected music. In this state, the user can perform a determination operation on the selection determination unit 21 to select a previously selected music piece selected previously. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected song that has been previously selected with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21 and output the selected song from the speaker 26. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the level of interest in the special game and the interest in the special game, thereby improving the player's willingness to play the game.

  Further, the player can display the unselected music image 833 as the tentatively selected music image 832 by operating the selection deciding unit 21. In this state, the player performs the deciding operation on the selection deciding unit 21 to select the previously selected music image. Unselected songs that have never been played can be output from the speaker 26. Therefore, the player can select an unselected song with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21 and output the unselected song from the speaker 26. Thereby, the player can not only select and select the already-selected music and the non-selected music, but also can select either the already-selected music or the non-selected music with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21. A desired music can be easily selected and output from the speaker 26.

  Furthermore, when the music selection image 83 is displayed, first, the temporarily selected music to be displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832 is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the speaker 26. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player. Can give an opportunity to communicate.

[Other embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in other embodiments described below, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the various processing procedures will be omitted. In addition, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the above-described first embodiment and the following other embodiments.

[Second embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, in the default setting, the output start of the tentatively selected tune is the chorus portion for both the selected tune and the unselected tune, and the output start of the selected tune is the A melody portion (the singing start portion) in the selected tune. ), The case where the unselected music piece is a chorus part has been described. That is, in the first embodiment, the case has been described in which, when the temporarily selected music piece is selected as the selected music piece, the output of the selected music piece is restarted from the A melody part (singing out part) or the chorus part.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the default setting, when the selected music (temporary selection music) is the already selected music, the selected music is selected from the continuation of the temporary selection music output from the speaker 26 at the time when the music is selected. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the tentatively selected tune is continuously output from the loudspeaker 26 in that the tune is output from the speaker 26, that is, when the already-selected tune is selected.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a tentatively selected song is output from a chorus portion in order to effectively convey the goodness of a song, and a selected song is generally output from a chorus portion to increase the degree of attention to a jackpot game. It is. In this case, when music selection is performed, the temporarily selected music output at the temporary selection stage is temporarily interrupted, and the chorus portion of the same music as the temporarily selected music is restarted at the stage where the music is selected. Therefore, the player hears the chorus portion of the same music in a short time.

  However, if the selected song is a player's favorite already-selected song, the previously-selected song is a previously selected song. It can also result in tiredness. In addition, there is a concern that the tension of the player who has risen by listening to the chorus portion of the favorite music may drop at a stretch because the temporarily selected music is cut off halfway. Furthermore, since the output of the selected music is the chorus portion, in a jackpot game in which a round game (opening / closing execution mode) is executed about five times, a music start portion (for example, an intro portion or A You may not be able to hear the melody (singing start).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the tentatively selected music piece is the already-selected music piece, the already-selected music piece is output as the tentatively-selected music piece from the A melody portion (singing out portion), When the music is the already-selected music, the temporarily selected music is continuously output. In other words, when the selected music is selected, the music is output from the music start portion at the temporary selection stage, and even when the music is selected, the already selected music is continuously output from the temporary selection stage. Therefore, at least at the provisional selection stage, the music start portion of the already-selected music can be reliably heard, and the chorus portion of the same music is output redundantly in a short time from the provisional selection stage to the music selection stage. Therefore, even when the selected music piece is repeatedly selected, it is possible to prevent the already selected music piece from getting tired early. In addition, since the already-selected music is continuously output from the stage of the provisional selection, the player can increase the tension from the music start portion toward the chorus portion and maintain the tension at a high state, Interest in jackpot games is improved.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment. Here, FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a melody pattern table used in the present embodiment, and FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a temporarily selected music output process executed in the present embodiment. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a selected music piece output process executed in the present embodiment. That is, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the temporarily selected music is continuously output from the speaker 26 when the already-selected music is selected. 87 differs from the melody pattern table shown in FIG. 87, the temporarily selected music output processing shown in FIG. 88, and the selected music output processing shown in FIG. In the tentatively selected tune output process shown in FIG. 88 and the selected tune output process shown in FIG. 89, the melody pattern settings of the tentatively selected tune and the selected tune are different from the default settings depending on the player for simplicity of explanation. If you do not consider. For example, in the tentatively-selected music piece output processing shown in FIG. 88, the step corresponding to step S2703 in the tentatively-selected music piece output processing shown in FIG. 52 in the first embodiment described above is omitted. In the selected music output processing shown in FIG. 89, steps corresponding to steps S2806, S2809, and S2810 in the temporarily selected music output processing shown in FIG. 53 in the first embodiment described above are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in the tentatively selected tune including the initial tentatively selected tune, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that when the already selected tune is tentatively selected, all of tunes A to T are set to melody pattern 1, that is, A The output is set to start from the melody (song start portion), and when an unselected song is provisionally selected, all of the songs A to T are set to start to output from the melody pattern 2, that is, the chorus portion. On the other hand, in the case of the selected tune, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that when the already-selected tune is selected, all of the tunes A to T are set to the continuation of the tentatively-selected tune, that is, the output of the tentatively-selected tune is continued. When the selected music piece is selected, all of the music pieces A to T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody (song start portion). Here, the continuation of the output of the tentatively selected music piece means that the tentatively selected music piece is output without any interruption. However, the moment that the set button 21B is operated, the operation sound is output, and so on. The case where the selected music is interrupted is also included. In addition, in the embodiments other than the present embodiment, the case where the output of the tentatively selected music piece is continued is interpreted synonymously with the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the present embodiment, the default setting of the tentatively selected music piece is different from that of the above-described first embodiment. In this case (Step S2702: No), the melody pattern 1 which is the default setting is unconditionally selected (Step S4601), and the tentatively selected tune is output as the tentatively selected tune from the A melody part (starting singing part). (Step S2707).

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the present embodiment, the default setting of the selected music is different from that of the above-described first embodiment. (Step S2801: No), the continuation of the output of the tentatively selected tune, which is the default setting, is unconditionally selected (Step S4701), and the tentative selection output from the speaker 26 at the time when the already selected tune is selected as the selected tune. The music is output from the speaker 26 continuously from the continuation of the music (step S2811).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player selects the already-selected music, the already-selected music output from the music start portion as the temporarily-selected music can be heard from the continuation of the portion output at the time of the determination operation. it can. That is, when selecting the selected music, the player can continuously listen to the selected music continuously from the music start portion after the temporarily selected music is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the temporarily selected music (continuing the temporarily selected music) on condition that the selected music (temporarily selected music) is the already selected music. If the selected music (temporarily selected music) is an unselected music, the selected music may be output from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the temporarily selected music (continuation of the temporarily selected music). Further, in the present embodiment, the output start of the temporarily selected song is an A melody portion (singing out portion) for the already-selected song, and the chorus portion for the unselected song, but the output when the temporarily selected song is the already-selected song. The start may be a chorus part, and the output start in the case where the temporarily selected music piece is an unselected music piece may be an A melody part (singing start part). Further, in the present embodiment, the output start of the selected music is the A melody part (song start part) in the unselected music, but the output start in the case where the provisionally selected music is the unselected music is also the chorus part. Good. In the present embodiment, the melody pattern is not set by the player in the tentatively selected music output process and the selected music output process, which is different from the default setting. Similarly, the temporarily selected music output processing and the selected music output processing may be executed in consideration of the fact that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first embodiment are possible within an applicable range.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the melody pattern is determined for the provisionally selected music and the selected music depending on whether the music is a selected music or an unselected music. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a melody pattern is determined for the provisionally selected music and the selected music in accordance with the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game).

  In the present embodiment, since the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the tentatively selected song and the selected song, the melody pattern table, the temporarily selected song output processing, and the selected song output The processing is different from that of the first embodiment.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the melody pattern table used in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, the default setting of the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected song is that in the 5R jackpot game (5R regular jackpot game and 5R-probable jackpot game), all of songs A to T are melody pattern 2, that is, from the chorus portion. In the 16R jackpot game, all of the songs A to T are set to start output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody portion (singing out portion) in the 16R jackpot game. On the other hand, the default setting of the melody pattern of the selected music is such that in the 5R jackpot game, all of the songs A to T are set to the continuation of the tentatively selected song, that is, the continuation of the output of the tentatively selected song. All of T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody portion (song start portion). That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of a 5R jackpot (5R regular jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot), the tentatively selected music piece is output from the chorus portion, and when the music piece is selected, the temporarily selected music piece is continuously output. On the other hand, in the case of the 16R jackpot, the tentatively selected music piece is output from the A melody part (singing start part), and the selected music piece is output from the A melody part (singing start part).

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of jackpot games having different advantages for a player are provided as a jackpot game. In the present embodiment, as described above, the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R certain jackpot, and the 16R certain jackpot having different advantages are provided. On the other hand, as described above, in the conventional gaming machine, the tentatively selected music is output from the chorus portion to effectively convey the goodness of the music, and the selected music is output from the chorus portion to increase the degree of attention to the jackpot game. It is common to use

  However, if the output start of both the tentatively selected song and the selected tune is set to the chorus portion, the tentatively selected song that was output at the stage of the tentative selection is temporarily interrupted, and the rust portion of the same song as this tentatively selected song is lost. It starts again when the music is selected. For this reason, there is a concern that the player may feel discomfort or disgust when listening to the chorus portion of the same music in a short time or when the music is interrupted. Despite such a concern, the output of the temporarily selected music is stopped and the same music is output again as the selected music from the rust portion until the jackpot game having a round number of about 16R and a relatively long game time is played. We cannot find the significance of that.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the case of the 5R jackpot game in which the game time is relatively short, if the music is selected, the temporarily selected music is continuously output. In this way, even if the game time is a 5R jackpot game in which the playing time is relatively short, the tentatively selected song can be sung as the tentatively selected song, and the tentatively selected song can be continuously listened to. The temporarily selected music piece that has been set is not interrupted once, and it is possible to avoid listening to the chorus portion of the same music piece in a short time. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not hear the chorus portion of the same music in a short period of time and does not feel discomfort or disgust when the music is interrupted.

  On the other hand, in the case of a 16R jackpot with a relatively long game time, the tentatively selected song is output from the chorus portion, and the selected song is output from the A melody portion (singing out portion). Therefore, at the 16R jackpot, the player can avoid listening to the chorus portion of the same music piece in a short time. In addition, after enjoying the chorus portion as the tentatively selected song, the user can listen to the newly selected song from the song singing portion. Thereby, in the 16R jackpot game in which the game time is relatively long, the player can enjoy the tune of the selected music once again. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or disgust when the music is interrupted.

  Here, FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the temporarily selected music piece output processing executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music piece output processing executed in the present embodiment. is there. In the tentatively selected tune output process shown in FIG. 91 and the selected tune output process shown in FIG. 92, the melody pattern settings of the tentatively selected tune and the selected tune are different from the default settings depending on the player for simplicity of explanation. If you do not consider.

  As shown in FIG. 91, in the present embodiment, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (accurately, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the temporarily selected music (see FIG. 90). In the selected music output process, it is determined in step S4801 whether or not a 16R jackpot has been reached. Further, the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music piece is determined according to the determination result in step S4801 (steps S4802 and S4804), and the tentatively selected music piece is output according to the determined melody pattern (steps S4803 and S4805).

  Specifically, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), it is determined whether or not a 16R jackpot has been reached (step S4801). If the jackpot is not the 16R jackpot (step S4801: NO), that is, if the jackpot is the 5R jackpot, the melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4802), and the tentatively selected music piece is the A melody portion (song start portion). (Step S4803). On the other hand, if it is a 16R jackpot (step S4801: YES), the melody pattern 2 is selected according to the default setting of the 16R jackpot, and the tentatively selected music piece is output from the chorus portion (step S4904).

  If a predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702), a melody pattern is randomly selected (step S4806), and a tentatively selected music piece is output in a melody pattern according to the selected melody pattern (step S4806). S4807, S4803 and S4805).

  Here, in order for the melody pattern to be randomly selected, it is required that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), but the promotion effect flag is set to ON in the case of a 16R jackpot. Not done. Therefore, it can be determined that the 5R jackpot is reached when the promotion effect flag is set to ON. By selecting a melody pattern randomly in step S4806, 5R satisfying a predetermined condition (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702). For the jackpot, inconsistencies may occur in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music.

  If the melody pattern 2 is not selected in step S4806 (step S4807: No), that is, if the melody pattern 1 is selected, the temporarily selected music is set to A according to the default setting of 5R jackpot according to the default setting of 5R jackpot. The melody part (singing start part) is output (step S4803). On the other hand, when the melody pattern 2 is selected in step S4806 (step S4807: Yes), the tentatively selected music is output from a climax part different from the default setting of the 5R jackpot. As a result, a contradiction occurs in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected music piece, and the fact that the promotion effect is to be executed is clearly specified before execution of the promotion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the present embodiment, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the selected song (see FIG. 90). In the output process, it is determined in step S4901 whether or not a 5R jackpot has been reached. Specifically, when the selected music is the already selected music (step S2801: No), when the second or subsequent music is determined (step S2802: No), or when the promotion effect flag is set to off ( (Step S2803: No) It is determined whether it is a 5R jackpot or not (step S4901). If it is a 5R jackpot (step S4901: Yes), the temporarily selected music is continuously output according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4902). On the other hand, if it is not the 5R jackpot (step S4901: No), that is, if it is the 16R jackpot, the melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of the 16R jackpot, and the selected music is output from the A melody part (singing out part) ( Step S4903).

  If the conditions for receiving the contradictory output lottery are satisfied (Yes in all steps of steps S2801 to S2803), the contradictory output lottery is performed (step S2804), and the contradictory output lottery is not won (step S2805: No), the tentatively selected tune is continuously output (step S4902). That is, in order to receive the contradictory output lottery, it is required that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), but at the time when the promotion effect flag is set to ON as described above. Since it can be determined that the 5R jackpot is determined, if the inconsistency output lottery is not won (step S2805: NO), the temporarily selected music is continuously output according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4902).

  On the other hand, when the contradictory output lottery is won (step S2805: YES), the selected music is output by the melody pattern 1 different from the default setting of the 5R jackpot. As a result, a contradiction occurs in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected music, and it is specified in advance that the promotion effect is to be executed before the execution of the promotion effect.

  In this embodiment, since the default setting of the selected music in the case of the 5R jackpot is to continue the output of the temporarily selected music, the same setting of the music is obtained both during the temporary selection of the music and after the selection of the music during a short game time. It is avoided that a part is output and that music is output again from a different part after selection of the music. Thereby, in the case of the 5R jackpot, the music can be continuously heard without interruption except in the case of winning the contradictory output lottery, so that the music can be enjoyed without stress even in a short game time. On the other hand, in the 16R jackpot game state in which the playing time is long, the player listens to the chorus portion of the tentatively selected song and then listens again to the selected tune, which is the same song as the tentatively selected song, from the A melody portion (singing out portion). be able to. Therefore, in the 16R jackpot gaming state, since there is enough time for the game, the selected music including the chorus part of the music can be sufficiently enjoyed from the A melody part (starting singing part).

  In addition, it can be determined whether or not a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the player is in a more advantageous game state is executed based on whether or not inconsistency occurs in the output of music at the time of provisional selection or selection. Therefore, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the temporarily selected music and the output start portion of the selected music. Thereby, the operation on the selection button 21A of the selection determination unit 21 for temporarily selecting a music and the determination button 21B of the selection determination unit 21 for selecting a music is not an act of merely temporarily selecting or selecting a music. It can be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not the game state is a more advantageous game state for the player.

  In the present embodiment, the selected music is output from the continuation of the tentatively selected music (continuation of the tentatively selected music) on condition that it is a 5R jackpot. It is also conceivable to output the selected tune from the continuation (continuing the tentatively selected tune). Of course, at both the 5R jackpot and the 16R jackpot, the selected music may be output from the continuation of the selected music (continuation of the tentatively selected music). In the present embodiment, the output start of the tentatively selected song is a rust portion at a 5R jackpot and a start portion at a 16R jackpot (a singing portion). ), And the start of the output of the tentatively selected music piece of the 16R jackpot may be used as the chorus portion. In the present embodiment, the melody pattern is not set by the player in the tentatively selected music output process and the selected music output process, which is different from the default setting. Similarly, the temporarily selected music output processing and the selected music output processing may be executed in consideration of the fact that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first or second embodiment are possible within an applicable range.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON, the condition that the unselected music is selected in the first music determination is set, and the music selection button effect is performed. The description has been given of the case where the (expected degree suggesting effect, the probable change determining effect, and the holding extended residence determining effect) are executed (see FIG. 54).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, in addition to the conditions of the above-described first embodiment, the music selection is performed on the condition that a continuous hit operation or a long press operation on the determination button 21B is performed in response to the music determination operation. A case where a button effect is executed will be described.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, whether or not a decision operation for selecting a song with respect to the decision button 21B (see FIG. 1) is performed by the player is determined by a second decision operation pattern flag (FIG. 30 (F)). ) Is set to ON (see step S2606 in the music selection process of FIG. 51). That is, in the first embodiment described above, by confirming that the operation on the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) has been started, it is determined that the music has been determined by the player on the determination button 21B. . As described above, when it is determined that the player has operated the determination button 21B by operating the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1), the music selection button effect is executed at the moment when the determination button 21B is operated. Can be confirmed. Therefore, the user can enjoy the moment of operating the determination button 21B as to whether or not the music selection button effect is to be executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on condition that the continuous hitting operation or the long pressing operation on the determination button 21B is performed. Therefore, unlike the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to increase the expectation that the music selection button effect will be executed for a certain period of time after the operation of the enter button 21B is started, and to perform a continuous hit operation on the enter button 21B or the like. You can enjoy long press operation. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation on the determination button 21B can be enjoyed in a different manner from the first embodiment as to whether or not the music selection button effect is executed.

  In addition, the symbol display button 341 may indicate or indicate to the player that a music selection button effect is to be performed by a continuous tapping operation or a long-pressing operation on the determination button 21 </ b> B. By not having it (for example, by using a display mode as shown in FIG. 37), a continuous tapping operation and a long pressing operation on the enter button 21B can be enjoyed as a so-called back command for executing a music selection button effect.

  Here, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing executed in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, in the music selection button effect processing of the present embodiment, a determination operation is performed between step S2902 and step S2903 (see FIG. 54) of the music selection button effect processing of the above-described first embodiment. Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous hitting operation or the long pressing operation is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 20 seconds) that has been set in advance (step S5101). Whether or not a continuous hit operation or a long press operation is performed when the determination operation is performed is determined based on the determination button operation data (see FIG. 30F). For example, in step S2606 in the music selection process of FIG. 51, when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has been started by confirming the ON setting of the second determination operation pattern flag (step S2606: Yes), the constant It is possible to determine whether or not the continuous hitting operation has been performed on the determination button 21 </ b> B by checking whether the ON / OFF of the second determination operation pattern flag is performed a plurality of times (for example, 5 to 30 times) within the time. Also, whether the long-press operation is performed depending on whether or not the duration in which the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 15 seconds) within the predetermined time. Can be determined.

  Then, if a continuous tapping operation or a long pressing operation is performed within a certain period after the determination operation (step S5101: Yes), and if the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2903: Yes), a 5R certain variable song selection button An effect determination process is executed (step S2904), and when the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is ON (step S2905: Yes), a 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2906). .

  In the present embodiment, when an unselected music piece is selected, a continuous selection operation or a long press operation is performed on the determination button 21B by the player, so that a music selection button effect can be executed. Therefore, the act of selecting a music can be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not a music selection button effect is executed by performing a continuous tapping operation or a long press operation. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music.

  In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the continuous hit operation or the long press operation on the determination button 21B is performed in response to the music determination operation. The music selection button effect may be executed when either one of the conditions in the mode (the operation on the determination button 21B is started) is satisfied. That is, when the operation on the determination button 21B is started, the music selection button effect may be executed at any timing when it is confirmed that the long press operation or the continuous hit operation is performed.

  In step S5101, it is determined whether one of the continuous hitting operation and the long pressing operation is performed. However, only the continuous pressing operation or the long pressing operation on the determination button 21B is determined in step S5101. It may be.

  In step S2901, it is determined whether or not an unselected song is selected. However, step S2901 may be omitted, and a song selection button effect may be executed even when an already-selected song is selected. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the already-selected music is selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first to third embodiments are possible within an applicable range.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON as the music selection button effect process, the selection of the unselected music is performed by operating the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) in the first music determination. The case in which the music selection button effect (the effect indicating the degree of expectation, the effect of confirming a certainty change, and the effect of confirming the held villas) is executed on the condition that the effect is performed (see FIG. 54). In the above-described fourth embodiment, in addition to the conditions of the above-described first embodiment, the continuous selection operation or the long-press operation on the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) in response to the music determination operation is performed as the music selection button effect processing. Has been described, the music selection button effect is executed (see FIG. 93). In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, it is possible to enjoy whether or not the music selection button effect is executed by operating the determination button 21B for selecting a music piece.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, in the first music determination, an unselected music is selected by an operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) different from the determination button 21B. A case where a music selection button effect is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that both the operation on the determination button 21B and the operation on the operation button 20 are effective as a determination operation for music selection. Specifically, in step S2606 in the music selection processing of FIG. 51, the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data shown in FIG. 30A and the second determination of the determination button operation data shown in FIG. When it is confirmed that any one of the operation pattern flags is set to ON, it is determined that the determination operation for the music selection has been performed.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment and the fourth embodiment, a music piece can be selected by operating the enter button 21B. In addition, unlike the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, a music piece can be selected by operating the operation button 20. Then, the music selection button effect is executed on condition that the operation button 20 is operated instead of the determination button 21B. That is, since the music selection button effect is executed by an operation different from the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether the music selection button effect is executed. A different way of enjoying from the fourth embodiment can be achieved.

  In addition, the symbol display button 341 may be suggested or specified to the player on the symbol display unit 341 to be executed by the operation on the operation button 20, but by not performing such suggestion or specification (for example, With the display mode as shown in FIG. 37), the operation of deciding the music by the operation button 20 can be enjoyed as a back command for executing the music selection button effect.

  Here, FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing executed in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, in the music selection button effect processing of the present embodiment, the operation on the operation button 20 is performed between the step S2902 and the step S2903 (see FIG. 54) of the music selection button effect processing of the first embodiment. It is determined whether or not a music piece has been selected (step S5201). Whether or not the music is selected by the operation on the operation button 20 is determined, for example, based on whether or not the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data is set to ON. Then, in step S5201, when it is determined that the music is selected by the operation on the operation button 20 (step S5201: Yes), when the first promotion effect flag is ON (step S2903: Yes), the 5R certain variable song selection button effect The determination process is executed (step S2904), and when the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is ON (step S2905: Yes), the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2906).

  In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the player instructs to operate the determination button 21B in order to perform the determination operation. By performing the operation, a music selection button effect can be executed. Therefore, interest in the act of selecting music is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the music is determined by the determination operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). However, in this condition and the first embodiment described above. (The operation of the determination button 21B is started), the music selection button effect may be executed. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any of the timing when the operation on the determination button 21B is started and the timing when the operation on the operation button 20 is started.

  Further, when either one of the condition (decision operation for the operation button 20) in the present embodiment and the condition (continuous hit operation or long-press operation for the decision button 21B) in the fourth embodiment is satisfied. A music selection button effect may be executed. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any of the timing when the operation on the operation button 20 is started and the timing when it is confirmed that the long press operation or the continuous hit operation is performed. Of course, the music selection button effect can be executed at any timing when any of the conditions in the present embodiment, the conditions in the first embodiment described above, and the conditions in the fourth embodiment described above is satisfied. You may.

  Also, instead of the music being determined by the determination operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), the music selection button effect is performed when a long press operation or a continuous hit operation is performed on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). It may be performed.

  In the music selection button effect processing of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not an unselected music piece is selected in step S2901. However, step S2901 is omitted, and the music selection button effect is performed even when the already selected music piece is selected. May be executed. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the already-selected music is selected.

  In the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first to fourth embodiments are possible within an applicable range.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, during the music selection valid period set for the jackpot game (for example, the execution period of the first round of the opening / closing execution mode), it is possible to select the music to be output from the speaker 26 in the opening / closing execution mode. The case where the music selection image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 has been described. In the first embodiment described above, when the player operates the selection determining unit 21 based on the music selection image, the music to be output from the speaker 26 in the open / close execution mode from a fixed number of music prepared in advance. Has been described where the player can select.

  By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is a music machine to be output from the speaker 26 in the big hit game, and a new music piece is released when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, when the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number, as a privilege for the number of jackpots reaching the predetermined number, a song limited to the jackpot game is released in the predetermined number of jackpot games. .

  However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the music released when the number of jackpots reaches the specified number is a privilege for the jackpots, it is output irrespective of the player's intention, and the player is You cannot change songs and select songs other than open songs. Also, in the preceding gaming machine, since the music is released only for a predetermined number of jackpot games, when the new jackpot game is executed after the jackpot, the music that is released first is selected and output. Can not.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a new song is released (added) to a plurality of songs that can be output from the speaker in a jackpot game or the like. Then, in the music selection valid period that first arrives after the predetermined condition is satisfied, this open music (additional music) is determined as the initial provisionally selected music, and thus becomes a newly opened music as an initial provisionally selected music image of the music selection image. The corresponding image is displayed on the symbol display unit, and the newly opened music is output from the speaker as the initial temporarily selected music. By displaying the image corresponding to the newly opened music on the symbol display unit as the initial temporarily selected music image in this way, the newly opened music can be easily selected. Then, the newly opened music is output from the speaker as the initial provisionally selected music, so that an opportunity to allow the player to listen to the opened music every time the music is released (added) is secured. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the newly released music from being buried in the music list without being heard by the player. Here, the release of the music is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and is a privilege given to the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the opportunity to let the player listen to the open music is secured, thereby preventing the privilege of releasing the music from being lost.

  Also, when displaying the initial provisionally selected music image corresponding to the newly opened music on the symbol display unit, it may be possible to explicitly or suggest that the music corresponding to the initial provisionally selected music image is a newly opened music. . For example, an image (for example, a character image such as “NEW”, “new”, or “added”) that explicitly or suggests that the song is a newly opened song is added to the vicinity of the initial temporarily selected song image corresponding to the newly opened song. Can be considered. By explicitly or suggesting that the music is a newly opened music, the player can easily grasp that the music is a newly opened music. This makes it possible for a player who is interested in the newly released music to easily select the newly released music, so that the newly released music is included in the music list without being heard by the player. The burial is further suppressed.

  It is conceivable that the predetermined condition for releasing the music is satisfied during the jackpot game. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied during the big hit game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the big hit game in which the interest of the player tends to decrease.

  The predetermined condition for releasing the music includes, for example, clearing a game executed during the jackpot game. Games that have been used in gaming machines, such as point acquisition games, mission achievement games, battle games, and quiz and prediction games, are examples of games for releasing music (music opening games). Is mentioned. In this way, by opening the music by clearing the game executed during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest in the jackpot game where the interest of the player tends to decrease, Interestingness is improved. In addition, since the predetermined condition is that the game is clear, it is easy to attract the player's interest, so that the interest of the game is further improved.

  Also, the music release game is not limited to the execution of the jackpot game, but may be executed in a standby state in which neither the jackpot game nor the variable game is executed in addition to the variable game. For example, in a gaming machine having an RTC (real-time clock) function, a music opening game may be executed as a regular game effect that is executed when it is determined that a specific time has been reached in a clock function by the RTC. For example, it is conceivable that the regular game effect is executed first time 30 minutes or 1 hour after the opening of the game hall, and is executed every 30 minutes or every hour after the second time. . As described above, the music release game is executed as a regular game effect by the RTC, so that all players are given an opportunity to release the music evenly regardless of the number of executions of the jackpot game.

  The predetermined condition for releasing the music includes that the player performs a back button operation or a back command operation at so-called predetermined timing. The back button operation is, for example, operation of an operation button or the like during an operation effective period (predetermined timing) of the back button operation. Examples of the operation for satisfying the predetermined condition include a single hit operation, a continuous hit operation, a long press operation, An operation type such as simultaneous pressing on a plurality of operation units may be set. The back command operation is performed, for example, by operating two or more of the upper operation button, the lower operation button, the left operation button, the right operation button, and the determination operation button in the operation valid period (predetermined timing) of the back command operation. The buttons are operated in a predetermined order. When the music is released by the back button operation or the back command operation at the predetermined timing as described above, it is necessary to store the predetermined timing and the operation type in order to release the music. Only the music can be released. Therefore, some players who can know the procedure for releasing the music can obtain an advantage over other players, and thereby, interest in the game can be improved. Also, in order to release the music, it is necessary to determine whether or not it is a predetermined timing, so the interest in the progress of the game is not only the lottery result and the type of the jackpot in the jackpot lottery, but also whether it is the predetermined timing. By paying attention to the points, it is possible to improve interest in the game. Further, it is conceivable that the operation valid period (predetermined timing) of the back button operation or the back command operation is set, for example, during a big hit game. Specifically, the operation validity period is set to a specific round game or an interval between round games in the open / close execution mode in addition to the opening and ending of the jackpot game. By setting the operation effective period (predetermined timing) during the jackpot game in this way, it is possible to improve the interest in the jackpot game in which the player's interest tends to decrease, and the interest of the game is improved. You. Further, the operation validity period (predetermined timing) may be set irrespective of the jackpot game, for example, a timing at which a specific effect is executed in a variable game, a timing at which a regular effect is executed by an RTC function, and the like. . By setting the operation effective period (predetermined timing) at the timing at which the specific effect is executed in the variable game and the timing at which the regular effect is executed by the RTC in this way, the interest in the progress of the game is increased by the jackpot lottery. By paying attention not only to the lottery result and the jackpot type, but also to whether a specific effect or a regular effect is executed, it is possible to improve interest in the variable game. Of course, the operation validity period (predetermined timing) may be set to the timing at which the regular performance by the RTC function is performed during the execution of the jackpot game.

  The operation valid period (predetermined timing) may be set at a plurality of timings, and similarly, a plurality of types (patterns) of back button operations and back command operations may be provided. When the operation valid period (predetermined timing) is set to a plurality of timings, a different operation type (pattern) may be set for each timing. In this case, different songs may be released according to the operation validity period (predetermined timing) and the operation type (pattern). When a plurality of types (patterns) of the operation valid period (predetermined timing), the back button operation, and the back command operation are set, a plurality of music release patterns by the back button operation and the back command operation are set. It is possible to maintain an interest in releasing music by operating a back command. In particular, if different songs are released according to the operation valid period (predetermined timing) and the operation type (pattern), it is possible to further maintain the interest in releasing the music by the back button operation or the back command operation. Become.

  The predetermined conditions for releasing the music include that a premiere effect (for example, an effect in which the jackpot is determined) is executed in the variable game, that the number of jackpots reaches a specified number, that It is also conceivable that the number of games reaches the specified number of times, or that the total number of jackpots or the number of variable games reaches the specified number of times. By setting the predetermined condition for releasing the music in various forms, it is possible to maintain an interest in releasing the music. In particular, when the predetermined condition is a numerical element (for example, a frequency element), it is possible to continue the game with the numerical element as a target, so that the decrease in interest in the game is complemented by the purpose of releasing music. It becomes possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the initial provisionally selected music image is displayed on the symbol display during the first music selection valid period after the open music, the open music is output from the chorus portion. Here, the chorus portion is characteristic compared to other portions such as the B melody portion of the music. Therefore, the player can listen to the characteristic portion of the open music when the new music is released by outputting the open music from the chorus portion. This makes it easy for the player to determine whether the newly released music is a favorite music.

  In this embodiment, the open music added to the music list is maintained at least until the power (switch) of the gaming machine is turned off. For example, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or off, the open music is deleted (music list). Is initialized). In this manner, the newly released music is deleted when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or off, so that the newly released music can be listened to as music limited to that day. As a result, the music released by the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is given to the player as a privilege only for the day, for example, the player on the next day listens to the music newly released by the player on the previous day without any trouble. Can be eliminated.

  In addition, for example, a matrix type two-dimensional code displayed on the symbol display unit by a predetermined operation in a standby state is read into a mobile terminal (smartphone, mobile phone, or the like) to give a password, a command, or the like. By inputting a password, a command, or the like by operating the selection determining unit 21 on an input screen displayed on the symbol display unit by the operation, the game can be started from the state where the open music is included in the music list in the next and subsequent games. It is also conceivable to do so. As a result, the privilege of releasing the music, which is granted when the predetermined condition is satisfied, can be enjoyed not only on the day but also in the next and subsequent games. As a result, when the open music is a favorite music, the player can listen to the open music many times by selecting the music in a music selection period in the next and subsequent games. In addition, when a game can be started from a state where the open music is included in the music list by giving and inputting a password or a command, the number of music included in the music list can be increased. Since the breadth is expanded, the interest of the game is improved.

  Also, in the case where a game can be started from a state where the released music is included in the music list by giving and inputting a password or a command, the newly released music is changed from the music list by turning on or off the power of the gaming machine. The information may be deleted, or may be deleted from the music list when a password or command is given to the player. This eliminates the inequity that a player playing a game after a new song has been released can ride the benefits obtained by other players for free and listen to the newly released song. it can.

  Hereinafter, an example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 101, focusing on differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Big hit game production decision processing]
In the jackpot game effect determination process of the present embodiment, in addition to the same process as the above-described jackpot game effect determination process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 34), the process is executed in an open / close execution mode to release a new song. A process for determining a game is executed. As will be described later in the open / close execution mode process of FIG. 98, when the game determined in step S5301 of the jackpot game effect determination process of the present embodiment is cleared, a new song is released. Here, FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the audio ramp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating an example of a game type table referred to in the big hit game rendering process of FIG. 95.

<Step S5301>
As shown in FIG. 95, in the jackpot game effect determination process of the present embodiment, after determining the opening effect and the ending effect (steps S2101 and S2102), the type of the game to be executed in the open / close execution mode is determined (step S5301). ).

  The game type is determined based on the game type determination table shown in FIG. In this game type determination table, five game types, a point acquisition game (game A), a mission achievement game (game B), a battle game (game C), a quiz game (game D), and a prediction game (game E) are provided. The game is defined by a game type lottery counter. The game type lottery counter is a loop counter having a counter value of 0 to 99, and is incremented by 1 in step S1707 of the sub timer interrupt processing in FIG. 27, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches 99. When the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 0 to 4, the point acquisition game (game A) is determined, and when the counter value is 5 to 9, the mission achievement game (game B) is determined. When the value is 10 to 14, the battle game (game C) is determined. When the counter value is 15 to 19, the quiz game (game D) is determined. When the counter value is 20 to 24, prediction is performed. The game (game E) is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, a game for releasing a new song is selected from a plurality of games. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the jackpot game (open / close execution mode) due to the repeated execution of the same game is reduced. Further, when the same game is repeatedly executed, there is a concern that the game is easily captured by the player. However, by setting a plurality of games, the difficulty of the game capture can be increased.

  When the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 25 to 99, it is determined that the game for releasing the new music is not executed (the game is not executed). Here, the probability that the non-execution of the game is determined is 75%. That is, the probability that the game will be executed is 25%, and the probability that each of the games A to E is determined is 5%. That is, the probability that the game will be executed is set lower, and the probability that each of the games A to E is executed is set lower. In this way, the probability that the game is not executed is set higher (three times) than the probability that the game is executed, so that the probability that the game is executed is set lower, and a new music piece can be easily created. Opening is prevented. In addition, since the selectivity of each game is low, the difficulty of game capture can be increased, so that it is possible to prevent a new music piece from being released easily, and to enhance the premierness of the newly opened music piece.

  Then, in this step, when the game type is determined, the MPU 51 sets the game type flag corresponding to the game type to ON. Specifically, when the game A is determined, the game A flag indicating that the game A is determined is set to ON, and when the game B is determined, the game B indicating that the game B is determined is set. The flag is set to ON, and when the game C is determined, the game C flag indicating that the game C is determined is set to ON, and when the game D is determined, the game D is determined to be determined. The game D flag is set to ON, and when the game E is determined, the game E flag indicating that the game E is determined is set to ON. These game type flags are referred to in step S5503 of the processing during opening / closing execution mode in FIG. 98 described later to determine whether or not to start the game. When it is determined that the game is not executed (the game is not executed), all the game type flags are kept off.

  In the present embodiment, the selectivity of each game is set to be uniform, but the selectivity may be set to be non-uniform. Is also good. Further, the number of games is not limited to five and may be another number, and the type of the game is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 96. Further, the clear difficulty level of each game may be uniform or non-uniform. If the difficulty of the game is made uneven, it is conceivable that the higher the difficulty of the game, the easier it is to select. In this way, by making the game having a higher difficulty level easier to select, a new music piece is prevented from being easily opened.

[Big hit game production process]
In the jackpot game effect process of the present embodiment, in addition to the same process as the above-described jackpot game effect process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 35), the game is executed in the open / close execution mode and the game is cleared. The processing during the open / close execution mode for releasing the new music is executed. Here, FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process executed by the audio lamp control device 5.

<Step S5401>
As shown in FIG. 97, in the jackpot game rendering process of the present embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode start flag is set to ON (Step S2208: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the opening / closing execution mode. The open / close execution mode flag shown is set to ON. This open / close execution mode flag is referred to in step S5402 described below to determine whether or not to execute the open / close execution mode process.

<Steps S5402 and S5403>
When all of the jackpot game effect start flag, the opening / closing execution mode start flag, the opening / closing execution mode end flag, and the jackpot game effect end flag are set to OFF (No in all of steps S2201, S2206, S2212, and S2216), the MPU 51 It is determined whether the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (step S5402). Then, when the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (step S5402: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the open / close execution mode processing (step S5403). In addition, when the MPU 51 has executed the opening / closing execution mode process or when the opening / closing execution mode flag is set to OFF (step S5402: No), the MPU 51 ends the jackpot game rendering process.

[Processing during open / close execution mode]
In the open / close execution mode processing, the game determined in step S5301 of the jackpot game effect determination processing in FIG. 95 is executed in the open / close execution mode, and a process of releasing a new music when the game is cleared by the player is executed. You. Here, FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the processing in the open / close execution mode executed in step S5403 of the jackpot game effect production processing in FIG. 97.

<Steps S5501 and S5502>
As shown in FIG. 98, in the open / close execution mode processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the music selection processing flag set to on in step S2306 of the music selection image display processing in FIG. 36 is set to on. A determination is made (step S5501). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is during the music selection period in the opening / closing execution mode. If the music selection processing flag is set to ON (step S5501: YES), the MPU 51 executes the music selection processing, and shifts the processing to step S5503. Note that the music selection processing in step S5502 is the same as the music selection processing (see FIG. 51) in the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, when the music selection processing flag is set to OFF (step S5501: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S5503.

<Step S5503>
In step S5503, the MPU 51 determines whether any of the five game type flags set to on in step S5301 of the jackpot game effect determination process in FIG. 95 is set to on. As described above, the game type flag is a flag that specifies a game type to be executed in the open / close execution mode, and includes a game A flag, a game B flag, a game C flag, a game D flag, and a game E flag. If any of the game type flags is set to ON (step S5503: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S5504, and if any of the game type flags is set to OFF (step S5503: No) ) And the process moves to step S5508.

<Step S5504>
If any of the game type flags is set to ON (step S5503: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is a game start timing (step S5504). Specifically, for example, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the round game of the second round in the open / close execution mode. The game start timing is not limited to the timing at which the 2R round game is started, and may be set to another round game start timing, ending start timing, or the like. The game start timing is determined by lottery. Alternatively, the game start timing may be set according to the game type. If it is the game start timing (step S5504: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S5505, and if it is not the game start timing (step S5504: NO), the MPU 51 ends the open / close execution mode processing.

<Steps S5505 to 5507>
If it is the game start timing (step S5504: YES), the MPU 51 starts the game specified by the game type flag (step S5505), and turns on a game running flag indicating that the game is being executed. (Step S5506). Then, the MPU 51 sets the game type flag to off (step S5507), and ends the open / close execution mode processing.

<Step S5508>
If any of the game type flags is set to off (step S5503: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game running flag set to on in step S5506 is set to on, that is, the game is running. Is determined (step S5508). If the game running flag is set to on (step S5508: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S5509, and if the game running flag is set to off (step S5508: No), The processing during the open / close execution mode is ended.

<Steps S5509 and 5510>
If the game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5508: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the game end timing (step S5509). Specifically, for example, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined time set for each game has elapsed since the start of the round game of the 2R in the open / close execution mode. Whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed is determined by, for example, setting the game time counter when the game is started in step S5505, and decrementing the game time counter by 1 each time the processing during the open / close execution mode is executed. When the value of the game time counter becomes 0, it can be determined that the predetermined time has elapsed. The game end timing may be set to, for example, the end timing of the open / close execution mode. If it is the game end timing (step S5509: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game in execution (step S5510), and shifts the processing to step S5511. On the other hand, when it is not the game end timing (step S5509: No), the MPU 51 ends the open / close execution mode processing.

<Step S5511>
In step S5511, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game has been cleared by the player. If the game has been cleared (step S5511: YES), the process proceeds to step S5512, and if the game has not been cleared (step S5511). : No), the open / close execution mode in-process is terminated.

<Step S5512>
If the game has been cleared (step S5511: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether all songs have been released (step S5512). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the music release flags of all the music are set to ON in the music release flag storage area (see FIG. 99) for storing the setting status of the music release flag described later. In the example shown in FIG. 99, as described later, six songs are set as open songs which are released when a predetermined condition is satisfied (game clear in the open / close execution mode), and all of these six songs are set. It is determined whether or not it is open. If all the songs are open (step S5512: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the open / close execution mode process, and if there are songs that are not open (step S5512: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5513. Move to

  In the present embodiment, the processing during the open / close execution mode is ended when all the music pieces are released, but the game cannot be cleared when all the music pieces are released. The game may not be executed in the open / close execution mode.

<Step S5513>
When there is a music piece that has not been released (step S5512: No), the MPU 51 determines a music piece to be newly released (step S5513). The music to be newly released may be released, for example, according to a predetermined order, the music determined by lottery may be released, or the music may be released according to the cleared game type. The released music may be released.

<Step S5514>
In step S5514, the MPU 51 sets the new music release flag to ON. The new song release flag indicates that the new song is released, and is a flag that specifies the type of the newly released song. In step S5601 in the initial temporarily selected song determination process in FIG. In step S5701 in the initial provisional selection output process in FIG. 101 described later, it is determined whether or not to output a newly opened song as the initial provisionally selected song. To be referred to.

<Step S5515>
In step S5515, the MPU 51 turns on the music release flag corresponding to the newly released music in the music release flag storage area (see FIG. 99) for storing the setting status of the music release flag in order to release the new music. The music release flag storage area is referred to when the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 41 is created, and can be displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832 when the music release flag is on. Can be selected as a song to be output from the.

  Here, FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of the music opening flag storage area for storing the setting status of the music opening flag for a plurality of music pieces. More specifically, FIG. 99 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a music release flag storage area in a default state in which a new music is not released, and FIG. 99 (B) shows a default state shown in FIG. 99 (A). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a music release flag storage area in a state where one new music has been released from.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (A), in the music release flag storage area in the default state, the music release flags corresponding to the music numbers 1 to 20 are set on, and the music release flags corresponding to the music numbers 21 to 26 are turned off. Is set to That is, in the gaming machine 10, 26 songs are prepared as the songs that can be output from the speaker 26, of which 20 songs are set as default songs to be output from the speaker 26 by default, and the remaining 6 songs satisfy the predetermined condition. This is set as an open song released by (game clear in the open / close execution mode). Then, when the game is cleared in the opening / closing execution mode in the default state, for example, when the music number 21 is released as a new music, as shown in FIG. The music release flag of the music U is set to ON. This makes it possible to display the song U of the song number 21 as the tentatively selected song image 832, and to select the song U to be output from the speaker 26.

  In the open / close execution mode processing, the game determined in step S5301 of the jackpot game effect determination processing in FIG. 95 is executed in the open / close execution mode, and when the game is cleared by the player, a new song is released. Since the music is released by the game executed during the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game, the interest in the jackpot game, which tends to reduce the player's interest, can be improved. Is improved. In addition, since the release of a new music piece on condition that the game is completed is easy to attract the player's interest, the interest of the game is further improved.

[Initial tentative selection music determination processing]
In the initial tentatively-selected song determination process of the present embodiment, in addition to the same process as the above-described initial tentatively-selected song determination process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 47), when a new song is released, Is determined during the song selection effective period of the jackpot game executed after the song is released. Here, FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the tentatively-selected music piece determination processing executed in the music selection image display processing of FIG. 36.

<Step S5601>
As shown in FIG. 100, in the initial provisionally selected music determination processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 checks whether the new music release flag set to on in step S5514 of the open / close execution mode processing of FIG. 98 is set to on. It is determined whether or not it is (step S5601). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the new music has been released by the player clearing the game executed in the previous jackpot game opening / closing execution mode. If the new music release flag is set to ON (step S5601: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S5602. On the other hand, when the new music release flag is set to OFF (step S5601: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2401 and performs the initial provisionally selected music determination processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 47). ) Are executed (steps S2401 to S2404).

<Step S5602>
If the new song release flag is set to ON (step S5601: YES), the MPU 51 determines the newly released song specified by the new song release flag as the initial tentatively selected song (step S5602). The music determination processing ends. When the newly opened music is determined as the initial provisionally selected music in this manner, in the music selection image display processing of FIG. 36, the newly opened music is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the initial provisionally selected music image 832 for the newly opened music.

[Initial temporary selection music output processing]
In the initial tentatively selected song output process of the present embodiment, in addition to the same process as the above-described initial tentatively selected song output process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 49), in the initial tentatively selected song determination process, a newly released song is played by the game. When the newly opened song is determined as the temporarily selected song in the cleared jackpot game, a process of outputting the newly opened song as the temporarily selected song from the speaker is executed. Here, FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the initial provisionally selected music piece output processing executed in the big hit game rendering processing of FIG.

<Step S5701>
As shown in FIG. 101, in the initial provisionally selected music output processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 checks whether the new music release flag set to on in step S5514 of the open / close execution mode processing in FIG. 98 is set to on. It is determined whether or not it is (step S5701). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the new music has been released by the player clearing the game executed in the previous jackpot game opening / closing execution mode. When the new music release flag is set to ON (step S5701: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S5702. On the other hand, when the new music release flag is set to OFF (step S5701: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2501, and outputs the initial temporarily selected music output processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 49). ) Are executed (steps S2501 to S2508).

<Step S5702 to Step S5704>
If the new music release flag is set to ON (step S5701: Yes), the MPU 51 selects the melody pattern 2 as the output pattern of the newly released music (temporarily selected music) (step S5702), and newly opens it from the speaker 26. The chorus part of the music (temporarily selected music) is output (step S5703). Then, the MPU 51 sets the new music release flag to off (step S5704), and ends the initial provisionally selected music output process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game executed in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode is cleared, a new song is released, and the first round game (song selection) in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode after the game is cleared. During the valid period), the newly opened music is displayed as the initial tentatively selected music image 832 on the symbol display unit 341 as the initial music selection image, and the newly opened tune is output from the loudspeaker as the initial temporarily selected music at the speaker 26. That is, the newly opened music is selected as the initial provisionally selected music in the first music selection valid period after the game is cleared, and the newly released music is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the initial provisionally selected music image 832 of the music selection image, When the music selection valid period starts, the newly opened music is output from the speaker 26 as an initial provisionally selected music. That is, when a new song is released, an opportunity to let the player listen to the released song every time the song is released is secured, so that the newly released song is added to the song list without being heard by the player. It is prevented from being buried inside. Here, the release of the music is performed by clearing the game, and is a privilege given to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the opportunity to let the player listen to the open music is secured, thereby preventing the privilege of releasing the music from being lost. Also, a new song is output from the chorus portion as an initial tentatively selected song, and the chorus portion is more distinctive than other portions such as the B melody portion of the song. Therefore, the player can listen to the characteristic portion of the open music when the new music is released by outputting the open music from the chorus portion. This makes it easy for the player to determine whether the newly released music is a favorite music.

  When a newly opened song is output as a temporarily selected song in the jackpot game after the game is cleared, if the cleared game is a 5R regular jackpot game, the next jackpot game is executed from the end of the 5R regular jackpot game. During this period, it is assumed that the player ends the game in the gaming machine 10 and the player is replaced. In this case, the player after the replacement can enjoy the privilege of releasing the new music acquired by the previous player without any difficulty. In order to solve such a problem, for example, it is conceivable that the game is executed on the condition that the game is a probable jackpot game, and the normal jackpot game is not executed. In the probable change jackpot, the next jackpot is guaranteed, so the player does not end the game with the gaming machine 10 until the next jackpot game is started, unless there is a special situation. Therefore, when the game is executed on the condition that the game is a probable variable jackpot game, it is possible to surely give the player who has cleared the game the privilege of releasing new music.

  In the present embodiment, the music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is displayed as including the selected music image 831, the non-selected music image 834, and the unselected music image 833. The 83 may not include any one or more selected images of the selected music image 831, the non-selected music image 834, and the unselected music image 833.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the new music is released, the new music is displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832, and when the new music is selected by the player, the new music is determined as the already-selected music. When a new song is released, the new song is displayed as the initial temporarily selected song image 832, and when the new song is released, the previously opened song is selected by the player. Regardless of whether or not the image is open, an image that allows the user to select the previously opened music may be arranged at a position adjacent to the initial provisionally selected music image 832. In this case, one of the non-selected music image 834 and the unselected music image 833 is arranged at a position adjacent to the initial provisionally selected music image 832 as in the first embodiment, and at least the music selection image 83 Three images are displayed: an image from which the previously opened music can be selected, an initial temporarily selected music image 832, and one of the non-selected music image 834 and the unselected music image 833. Further, it is preferable that the initial tentatively selected music image 832 is displayed in a more conspicuous manner than two adjacent music selection images 83. For example, the initial temporarily selected music image 832 is displayed as a larger image than two adjacent music selection images 83.

  When the new music is released after the new music is released first, the newly added new music can be selected in addition to the initial temporarily selected music image 832 for the newly added new music. By displaying the image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the player is not only the new song added this time, but also the new song added earlier, the new song is the song added earlier. It is possible to intentionally output from the speaker 26 after recognizing that. Thereby, even when a new music piece is added after a new music piece is added, it is possible to easily listen to a new music piece added in the past. In addition, by arranging the image that allows the selection of the previously opened song at a position adjacent to the initial temporarily selected song image 832, the player can add a new song that was previously added when a new song is added. Can be easily grasped. This makes it easy to select a previously added song and output it from the speaker 26, for example, when the player wishes to listen to a previously added new song that has not been selected yet. become. Further, one of the non-selected music image 834 and the unselected music image 833 is arranged at a position adjacent to the initial provisionally selected music image 832, so that the symbol display unit 341 displays a position adjacent to the initial provisionally selected music image 832. , An image enabling selection of the previously added new music, and one of a non-selected music image 834 and an unselected music image 833 are arranged. For example, in the music selection image 83, an image in which a previously added new music can be selected, an initial temporarily selected music image 832, and a non-selected music image 834 or an unselected music image 833 are arranged in this order. Therefore, it becomes easy to select any of the new music added last time, the music added this time, and the unselected music or the unselected music.

  It is also conceivable to display only the temporarily selected music image 832 as the music selection image 83. Also in this case, when the new music is released, the new music is displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832, and the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed to a non-selected music or an unselected music by operating the plurality of selection buttons 21A. It is possible. Then, it is preferable that the image in which the open music can be selected is displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832 by one operation on the plurality of selection buttons 21A. As a result, similarly to the case where an image that allows the previously added new music to be selected is displayed at a position adjacent to the initial provisionally selected music image 832, the player can use the case where a new new music is added. In the case where the player wishes to listen to the previously added new music that has not been selected before, the player can easily grasp the new music added last time. Selection can be facilitated, and output can be made from the speaker 26.

  In the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first to fifth embodiments are possible within an applicable range.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, during the music selection valid period set for the jackpot game (for example, the execution period of the first round of the opening / closing execution mode), it is possible to select the music to be output from the speaker 26 in the opening / closing execution mode. The case where the music selection image 83 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 has been described. In the above-described first embodiment, when the player operates the selection determining unit 21 based on the music selection image 83, a fixed number of songs prepared in advance are output from the speaker 26 in the open / close execution mode. The case where the player can select the music has been described.

  Further, in the above-described sixth embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a new music piece is released, and a newly released music piece is determined as an initial provisionally selected music piece during the first valid music selection period after the music piece is released. Thus, the case has been described in which the image corresponding to the newly opened music is displayed as the initial temporarily selected music image 832 on the symbol display unit, and the newly opened music is output as the initial temporarily selected music on the speaker.

  By the way, as mentioned in the above-described sixth embodiment, as a conventional gaming machine, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied as in the case where the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the speaker 26 is used in the jackpot game. Some songs to be output are released as new songs. In such a gaming machine, the music released when the number of jackpots reaches the specified number is a privilege for the jackpots, and is output irrespective of the player's intention. Cannot be changed to select songs other than open songs. Also, in the preceding gaming machine, since the music is released only for a predetermined number of jackpot games, when the new jackpot game is executed after the jackpot, the music that is released first is selected and output. Can not.

  On the other hand, the present embodiment is common to the above-described sixth embodiment in that a new song is released when a predetermined condition is satisfied, but the song selection for the song selection valid period that first arrives after the release of the new song is performed. The sixth embodiment is different from the sixth embodiment in that the newly opened music is displayed as an unselected music in the image. Since the newly opened music is displayed as an unselected music in this way, the newly opened music is selected as the initial provisionally selected music, and the output of the newly opened music from the speaker can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a pleasure of temporarily selecting or selecting a newly opened music according to the intention of the player, while preventing the newly opened music from being output against the intention of the player.

  In addition, when an unselected song image corresponding to a newly opened song is displayed on the symbol display unit, it may be possible to explicitly or suggest that the song corresponding to the unselected song image is a newly opened song. For example, it is possible to add an image (for example, a character image such as “NEW”, “new”, or “added”) that clearly or suggests that the song is a newly opened song near the unselected song image corresponding to the newly opened song. Conceivable. By explicitly or suggesting that the song is a newly opened song, the player can easily recognize that the song is a newly opened song. This makes it possible for a player who is interested in the newly released music to easily provisionally select or select the newly released music, so that the newly released music is not listened to by the music list without being heard by the player. Is suppressed from being buried in the inside.

  Further, the unselected music image corresponding to the newly opened music should be arranged at a position closest to the initial temporarily selected music image among the positions that can be arranged in the initial music selected image, for example, at a position adjacent to the initial temporarily selected music image. Can be considered. In other words, the unselected music image corresponding to the newly opened music is arranged in the initial music selection image at a position closest to the initial provisionally selected music image among the unselected music images. As described above, the unselected music image corresponding to the newly opened music is arranged at a position closest to the initial provisionally selected music image among the positions that can be arranged in the initial music selection image, so that the music is newly released. This makes it easier for the player to recognize this, and the number of operations for temporarily selecting and selecting a new open music is minimized, so that the operation for temporarily selecting and selecting a new open music is reduced. In particular, when it is specified or suggested that the song is a newly released song, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the song has been newly released, and the operation burden for provisional selection and selection is further reduced. Is done.

  Note that the predetermined condition for releasing the music in the present embodiment is set in the same manner as in the above-described sixth embodiment. Also in the above-described sixth embodiment, when a newly opened song (newly added song) is displayed as the initial temporarily selected song image due to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the vicinity of the initial temporarily selected song image (adjacent position). May be added to the image to explicitly or suggest that the song is a newly opened song. In this case, the various changes to the image that explicitly or suggests that the music piece is a newly opened music piece in the present embodiment are also applied to the above-described sixth embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 106, focusing on differences from the above-described first embodiment and the sixth embodiment.

[Processing during open / close execution mode]
In the open / close execution mode process of the present embodiment, in addition to the open / close execution mode process of the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 98), when a new song is released, the song selection counter data table is updated. Be executed. Here, FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a process during the opening / closing execution mode performed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

<Step S5801>
As shown in FIG. 102, in the open / close execution mode processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 executes the same processing as the above-described open / close execution mode processing of the sixth embodiment (steps S5501 to S5515). When the processing for releasing the new music has been executed (steps S5513 to S5515), the music selection counter data table updating processing is executed.

[Song selection counter data table update processing]
In the song selection counter data table updating process, when a new song is released, the newly opened song is added to the song selection counter data table as an unselected song. Here, FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating an example of updating the music selection counter data table. Specifically, FIG. 103 (A) shows an example of a music selection counter data table in a default state before updating, and FIG. 103 (B) shows an example of a music selection counter data table after updating.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A), as described above, the music selection counter data table includes history data regarding the selected music and history data regarding the non-selected music, and the music for which the selected flag is set to OFF. Are data related to unselected songs, and among these data, data for which the non-selection flag is set to ON is data related to non-selected songs. When a new song is released when the song selection counter data table is in the default state shown in FIG. 103 (A), as shown in FIG. 103 (B), there is no newly released song in the song selection counter data table. It is added as a selected song. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (B), the song U with the song number 21 is added as an unselected song. More specifically, the song U is added as the song number 21 in the song value list, and the selection frequency counter and the song ranking are stored as history data relating to the selected song as “0”, and the already selected flag is stored as “OFF”. By storing the song ranking as "0" and the non-selection flag as "OFF" as the history data relating to the non-selected song, the newly opened song is added to the song selection counter data table as an unselected song.

  In this manner, the newly opened music is added as an unselected music by the music selection counter data table, whereby the unselected music image 833 corresponding to the newly opened music can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Accordingly, the newly opened music can be provisionally selected as the temporarily selected music, so that the newly opened music can be output as the temporarily selected music. Further, since the newly opened music can be temporarily selected, the newly opened music can be selected as the selected music, so that the newly opened music can be output as the selected music. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the newly released music from being buried in the music list without being heard by the player.

[Song selection image display processing]
In the music selection image display processing of the present embodiment, in addition to the music selection image display processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 36), when a new music piece is released, an unselected music piece corresponding to the newly released music piece is selected. A process of adding an image that explicitly or suggests that the song is a newly released song to the song image 833 is executed. Here, FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection image display processing executed in the big hit game rendering processing of FIG. 97.

<Step S5901>
As shown in FIG. 104, in the music selection image display processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines an initial provisional selection music and temporarily stores the provisional selection music (steps S2301 to S2304), and sets the new music release flag to It is determined whether it is set to ON (step S5901). Here, the new music release flag is a flag indicating that the new music has been released, and is set to ON in step S5514 of the open / close execution mode processing in FIG. 98. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the new music has been released by the player clearing the game executed in the previous jackpot game opening / closing execution mode. When the new music release flag is set to ON (step S5901: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S5902. On the other hand, when the new music release flag is set to off (step S5901: No), the MPU 51 executes the initial music selection image display processing and the like in the same manner as the above-described music selection image display processing in the first embodiment. (Steps S2305 and S2306), the music selection image display processing ends.

<Steps S5902 and S5903>
If the new music release flag is set to ON (step S5901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the new music image addition flag to ON (step S5902) and sets the new music release flag to OFF (step S5902). S5903), and ends the music selection image display processing.

  Here, the newly opened music image addition flag is referred to when the initial music selection image 83 is determined in the initial music selection image display process in step S2305, and when the new opening music image addition flag is set to ON. In the initial song selection image 83, an additional image is displayed near or near the unselected song image 833 corresponding to the newly opened song, which explicitly or suggests that the song corresponding to the unselected song is a newly opened song. In the initial music selection image display process in step S2305, when the newly opened music image addition flag is set to ON, an unselected music image 833 corresponding to the newly opened music can be arranged in the initial music selection image 83. Among the various positions, the position is closest to the initial provisionally selected music image 832, for example, a position adjacent to the initial provisionally selected music image 832.

  Here, FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen on which the initial music selection image 83 is displayed on the symbol display section 341. As shown in FIG. 105, in the initial music selection image 83 when the newly opened music image addition flag is set to ON, the unselected music image 833 corresponding to the newly opened music is one of the temporarily selected music images 832. It is placed in the lower position. That is, the unselected music image 833 corresponding to the newly opened music is arranged at a position closest to the initial provisionally selected music image 832 among the positions that can be arranged in the initial music selection image 83, and It is arranged at a position closest to the initial provisionally selected music image 832. As described above, the unselected music image 833 corresponding to the newly opened music is arranged at the position closest to the initial provisionally selected music image 832 among the positions that can be arranged in the initial music selection image 83, so that the music is newly opened. It is easy for the player to recognize that the music has been performed, and the number of operations for temporarily selecting and selecting a newly opened music is minimized, so that the operation burden for temporarily selecting and selecting a newly opened music is reduced. You.

  In addition, in the initial music selection image 83 when the newly opened music image addition flag is set to ON, the fact that the unselected music image 833 is a newly opened music is specified to the right of the unselected music image 833 or A suggested character image of “New!” (Additional image 839) is displayed.

  The newly opened music image addition flag is also referred to in the unselected music image movement display process of step S2604 in the music selection process shown in FIG. 106, and when the newly opened music image addition flag is set to ON. When moving the unselected song image 833 corresponding to the newly opened song, an additional image that explicitly or suggests that the song corresponding to the unselected song is a newly opened song near the unselected song image 833. Display. Thereby, even when the arrangement of the unselected music image 833 corresponding to the newly opened music is changed due to the change of the temporarily selected music, the vicinity of the unselected music image 833 is explicitly or suggested to be a newly opened music. The additional image is displayed.

  By displaying the additional image that explicitly or suggests that the song is a newly opened song in the song selection image 83 in this manner, the player can easily grasp the newly opened song. This makes it possible for a player who is interested in the newly released music to easily provisionally select or select the newly released music, so that the newly released music is not listened to by the music list without being heard by the player. Is more suppressed from being buried inside.

  In addition, in the music selection process shown in FIG. 106, the new open music image addition flag is set to off when the music selection effective period has elapsed (step S2610: Yes) (step S6001). That is, in the music selection image 83, the additional image that explicitly or suggests that the music is a newly opened music is displayed during the period from the start to the end of the first valid music selection period after the new music is released. In this way, the additional image is displayed during the period from the start to the end of the first valid song selection period after the new song is released, so that the newly opened song is provisionally selected or selected during the valid song selection period. Even later, it is possible to grasp that the song is a newly opened song, so that it becomes easy to temporarily select or select the newly opened song again.

  In addition, an additional image that explicitly or suggests that the song is a newly opened song is displayed from the start of the song selection effective period until the newly opened song is temporarily selected in the song selection valid period that first arrives after the new song is released. It is thought that it is done. As described above, the additional image is displayed during the period from the start of the music selection valid period to the provisional selection of the newly opened music, so that the additional image is displayed until the newly opened music is output as the provisionally selected music. . As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary display of the additional image even after the newly opened music piece is provisionally selected by the player.

  Further, it is conceivable that the additional image is displayed from the start of the music selection validity period that arrives first after the release of the new music piece until the newly opened music piece is selected by the player. As described above, the additional image is displayed during the period from the start of the music selection valid period to the selection of the newly opened music, so that the additional image is displayed until the newly opened music is output as the selected music. This prevents unnecessary display of the additional image even after the player has selected a new open song.

  Further, it is conceivable that the additional image is displayed during the music selection valid period that arrives after the new music is released before the new music is released next time. In this way, the additional image is displayed during the music selection effective period that arrives between the time when the new music is released first and the time when the new music is released next time, so that the additional image is always displayed for the latest released music. You. As a result, the player can always keep track of the latest released music, so even for music that was released during the previous music selection validity period but was not selected by the player, the next music during the music selection validity period after the music release was released. Can be selected based on the additional image until a new song is released. In other words, the player can easily search for open music based on the additional image when he or she wants to listen to the open music later, even if the music is not normally listenable, even if the music is not in the music selection valid period. .

  In this embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first to sixth embodiments are possible within an applicable range.

[Eighth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when a plurality of music selections are performed in the same music selection validity period in which the player can select a music to be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game, the music is selected last in the music selection validity period. One of the selected songs is finally stored as the already-selected song, and the song ranking of the already-selected song in the song selection counter data table is updated based on the last-selected song. That is, in the first embodiment described above, when a plurality of music pieces are selected in the same music piece selection validity period, the midway selection music piece selected halfway other than the last selected music piece in the music piece selection validity period is final. The music selection counter data is updated without being treated as a selected music.

  By the way, since the midway selection music piece is a music piece that the player has once been interested in, it is assumed that the player desires confirmation or selection of the previous midway selection music piece. However, when the midway selection music piece is not treated as the already selected music piece, the midway selection music piece is not displayed as the already selected music piece in the music piece selection image. Therefore, the player cannot grasp the midway selection from the music selection image.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the music selected at the end of the music selection validity period is updated as the already-selected music, and the music selection counter data is updated in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In contrast, when a plurality of music selections are performed during the music selection validity period, the music selection counter data is updated as the midway selection music as the already-selected music. As described above, the music selection counter data is updated with the halfway-selected song as the already-selected song, and the already-selected song image corresponding to the halfway-selected song is displayed as the song selection image in the song selection valid period. Therefore, the player can confirm or select the music selected during the music selection valid period based on the display mode of the music selection image, and the selection of the previously selected halfway selected music becomes easy.

  Note that an upper limit (three in the present embodiment) is set for the number of songs that can be set as already-selected songs in the same song selection validity period. The upper limit number of music pieces are selected music pieces. In this case, the upper limit number is set to be equal to or less than the upper limit number that can be displayed as the already-selected music image in the music selection image. As described above, the upper limit (three in the present embodiment) is set as the number of music pieces that can be set as the already-selected music pieces in the same music selection valid period, so that the ratio of the already-selected music images in the music selection images can be defined. . This prevents the music selection image from being filled with the selected music images, or prevents the number ratio of the selected music selection images in the music selection images from becoming unnecessarily large. Can be displayed at an appropriate numerical ratio. In addition, when music selections exceeding the upper limit number are performed, the upper limit number of music pieces in the new order of the music selection date and time are set as the selected music pieces, and the selected music image for the new upper limit number of the selected music pieces with the music selection date and time is displayed. . Here, when a plurality of music selections are made during the same music selection validity period, there is a high possibility that the music with the new music selection date and time is the music that the player prefers. Therefore, when a song exceeding the upper limit number is selected in the same song selection validity period, the selected song image for the new upper limit number of selected songs at the song selection date and time is displayed, so that the songs close to the player's preference are already selected. It can be displayed as a selected music image. Note that selected songs exceeding the upper limit among a plurality of songs selected in the song selection validity period are regarded as unselected songs from songs with the oldest song selection date and time.

  Hereinafter, an example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 111, focusing on differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Selected music output process]
The selected music output process of the present embodiment is basically the same as the selected music output process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 53). The procedure for updating the storage of the selected music when the music is selected a plurality of times is different. Here, FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a selected music piece output process performed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

<Step S6101>
As shown in FIG. 107, in the selected music output process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 updates the selected music storage area as Step S6101. Here, in the selected music output process of the first embodiment described above, only one selected music is stored, and when a new music is selected, the storage of the selected music is updated. Even if the music selection is performed twice, only the music selected last in the music selection validity period is stored as the already-selected music (step S2812 in FIG. 53). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there is a selected music storage area capable of storing a plurality of selected music, and the storage content of the selected music storage area is updated every time a music selection is performed during the music selection validity period. The selected music storage area is referred to when updating data relating to the selected music in the music selection counter data in the music selection counter data update processing of FIG. 109 described below. In this way, by updating the data relating to the selected music in the music selection counter data with reference to the selected music storage area capable of storing a plurality of selected music, when a plurality of music is selected in the same music selection validity period, In the meantime, an intermediate selected song other than the last selected song can be set as the already-selected song, and can be displayed as the already-selected song image 831 of the song selection image 83 during the effective song selection period.

  Here, FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating an example of updating the selected music storage area in the same music selection valid period. Specifically, FIGS. 108 (A) to 108 (E) are examples of updating the selected music storage area when a plurality of different music are selected in the same music selection validity period, and FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of updating a selected music storage area when the same music is selected a plurality of times during the same music selection validity period. As shown in FIG. 108, the selected music storage area can store a maximum of three pieces of music in a state where the temporary display order is given to the selected music.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 (A) to 108 (E), when a plurality of different songs are selected in the same song selection valid period, a song with a new selection date and time is assigned a higher temporary display rank. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), when no music is selected, no selected music is stored in the selected music storage area, and all the temporary display orders are vacant. As shown in FIG. 108 (B), when the first music selection is performed, the first music piece (song A) having the newest selection date and time selected as the temporary display order is stored as the selected music piece. As shown in FIG. 108 (C), when the second music selection is performed, the first selected music (music A) is shifted to the second temporary display order, and the temporary display order 1 which is vacant is shifted. The song (song B) that has been selected for the second time with the new selected date and time is stored as the selected song. As shown in FIG. 108 (D), when the third music selection is performed, the first selected music (music A) is shifted to the third provisional display order, and the provisional display order 2 which becomes empty is displayed. The second selected song (Song B) is shifted to the first place, and the third selected song (Song C) with the new selected date and time is stored as the selected song at the first tentative temporary display order. As shown in FIG. 108 (E), when the fourth music selection is performed, the third place of the temporary display order is cleared, and the second selected music place (the music B ) Is shifted, and the song (song C) selected for the third time in the temporary display order to be vacant is shifted to the first time in the tentative display order to be vacant, and the song is selected for the fourth time in the new selection date and time. The song (song D) is stored as the selected song. That is, when the music selection is performed four or more times (when the music selection exceeding the upper limit is performed), the three selected music pieces having the new selected date and time are stored, and the selected music pieces having the old selected date and time are stored in the selected music storage area. Cleared from.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108 (F), when a song is selected during the same song selection valid period, the same song is selected as the first or second (other than the lowest) temporary display order in the selected song storage area. In the case where the song is stored as a song, for a duplicate song, the song whose selection date and time is old is cleared and the song whose selection date and time is new is stored as the first temporary display order. In the example shown in FIG. 108 (F), the song C, the song B, and the song A are stored in the first place, the second place, and the third place, respectively, in the temporary display order in the selected song storage area (see FIG. D)), and the case where the same song B as the song whose tentative display order is second is selected. In this case, with respect to the overlapping music B, the music B having the second tentative display order is cleared, the music C having the first rank is shifted to the vacant second, and the music B having the new selection date and time is ranked first. It is memorized.

  In the case where a plurality of music pieces are selected in the same music selection effective period in this way, the selected music storage area is updated by the procedure described with reference to FIG. The songs can be stored in the selected song storage area in the order of the latest song selection date and time. Thereby, in the music selection counter data update processing of FIG. 109 described later, the midway selection music can be set as the selected music, and can be displayed as the selected music image 831 of the music selection image 83 during the music selection effective period. Become. In particular, when a song is selected in the same song selection validity period, if the same song is stored as the selected song in the first or second place (other than the lowest position) of the temporary display order in the selected song storage area, duplication occurs. If a song whose selection date and time of a song to be performed is old is cleared, it is possible to display a selected song image 831 for a wider variety of songs as the song selection image 83 during the song selection validity period.

  Note that when a song is selected during the same song selection validity period, even if the same song is stored as a selected song other than the lowest temporary display order in the selected song storage area, a duplicate song is selected. Without clearing from the music storage area, three new music with the selected date and time may be stored in the selected music storage area as described with reference to FIGS. 108 (A) to 108 (E). Good. In other words, when multiple songs are selected during the same song selection validity period, regardless of whether different songs are selected or overlapping songs are selected, the new upper limit number of songs at the selected date and time are uniformly selected and stored. You may make it memorize | store in an area. As described above, when a plurality of songs are selected in the same song selection validity period, regardless of whether different songs are selected or overlapping songs are selected, the new upper limit number of songs of the selected date and time are uniformly selected. If the music is stored in the storage area, it is possible to create music selection counter data that reflects the selection history of the music of the player. Thus, during the music selection validity period, the music selection image 83 that reflects the player's selection history can be displayed, so that the convenience of the player for selecting music is improved. In addition, when a song is selected during one song selection validity period, if the same song is stored as the selected song in the first or second place (other than the lowest place) of the temporary display order in the selected song storage area, the selected song It is conceivable that the storage area is not updated.

[Song selection counter data update processing]
In the music selection counter data update processing of the present embodiment, the music selection counter data update processing of the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 62) is the same as the data update processing of non-selected music among the music selection counter data. However, the second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in the process of updating data relating to a selected song in the song selection counter data. Here, FIG. 109 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the music selection counter data update processing executed in the music selection processing of FIG. 51.

<Step S6201>
As shown in FIG. 109, in the music selection counter data updating process of the present embodiment, when the music selection validity period has elapsed, the MPU 51 determines whether the selected music is stored in at least the first place in the selected music storage area. Is determined (step S6201). When the selected song is stored at least in the first temporary display order in the selected song storage area (step S6201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S6202, and the selected song is stored in the selected song storage area. If not (step S6201: No), the music selection counter data update process ends.

<Steps S6202 and S6203>
When the selected music is stored at least in the first place of the temporary display order in the selected music storage area (step S6201: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the data related to the already selected music in the music selection counter data (step S6202). ), The selected music stored in the selected music storage area is cleared (step S6203), and the music selection counter data updating process ends. Updating of the music selection counter data related to the selected music is executed with reference to the selected music storage area (see FIG. 108).

  As described above, the music selection counter data is updated after the elapse of the music selection validity period, so that the music selection image 83 in the next music selection validity period is selected based on the latest selection history of the player in the previous music selection validity period. Music can be displayed. This makes it possible to display the already-selected music image 831 reflecting the player's preference. The selected music stored in the selected music storage area is deleted every valid music selection period. As a result, the selected music in the music selection valid period is stored for each music selection valid period, so that the selected music in each music selection valid period can be appropriately displayed as the already-selected music image 831.

  Here, FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example of updating the music ranking data of the selected music in the music selection counter data table. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the data relating to the display order of the selected music in the music selection counter data table is in an initial state (a state in which no selected music is present).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the display order data of the selected music in the music selection counter data table is all “0” in an initial state, and there is no selected music.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the state where the storage content of the selected music storage area is as shown in FIG. 108 (B) (the music A is stored at the top of the temporary display order), the music in the music ranking data It is stored that A is the first place. That is, when the music A is selected during the music selection validity period, the music A is stored as the top of the music ranking data.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (C), in the state where the storage content of the selected music storage area is as shown in FIG. 108 (C) (the music B is stored first in the temporary display order and the music A is stored second). In the music ranking data, it is stored that the music B is the first and the music A is the second. That is, when the music B is selected after the music A is selected during the music selection validity period, the music B with the latest selection date and time is stored as the first in the music ranking data, and the music A with the new selection date and time is ranked as the music ranking. It is stored as the second place of the data.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (D), the storage contents of the selected music storage area are as shown in FIG. 108 (D) (the music C is stored in the first place in the temporary display order, the music B in the second place, and the music A in the third place) ), The song C is ranked first, the song B is ranked second, and the song A is ranked third in the song ranking data. In other words, when music is selected in the order of music A → music B → music C during the music selection validity period, music C is stored as first in the music ranking data and music B is ranked 2nd in the music ranking data in descending order of selection date and time. The music A is stored as the third place in the music ranking.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (E), the storage content of the selected music storage area is as shown in FIG. 108 (E) (the music D is stored in the first place, the music C is stored in the second place, and the music B is stored in the third place). ), The song D is ranked first, the song C is ranked second, and the song B is ranked third in the song ranking data. That is, when music A is selected in the order of music A, music B, music C, and music D during the music selection validity period, music D is stored as first in the music ranking data in the descending order of the selection date and time, and music C is ranked as the music ranking data. The song B is stored as the second place in the data, the music B is stored as the third place in the music rank, and the rank of the music A with the oldest selection date and time exceeding the upper limit is cleared.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (F), the storage contents of the selected music storage area are in the state shown in FIG. In the music ranking data, it is stored that the music B is the first, the music C is the second, and the music A is the third in the music ranking data. That is, when music A is selected in the order of music A, music B, music C, and music B during the music selection validity period, the newly selected music B is duplicated. In the newest order, music B is stored as first in the music ranking data, music C is stored as second in the music ranking data, and music A is stored as third in the music ranking.

  When a plurality of music pieces are selected in the same selection validity period in this way, a plurality of music pieces are stored in the selected music storage area, and the music selection counter data is updated based on the selected music storage area. Not only the selected song, but also the midway selected song selected in the middle other than the latest selected song can be handled as the already-selected song. As a result, the selected music image 831 corresponding to the midway selection music can be displayed as the music selection image 83 in the music selection valid period, so that the player can display the midway selection music in the display mode of the music selection image 83. Confirmation and selection can be made based on the above.

  In the present embodiment, the music selection counter data is updated after the elapse of the music selection validity period. However, the music selection counter data is updated each time a music selection is performed within the music selection validity period (the selected music storage area is updated). (Every time it is performed). As described above, the music selection counter data is updated each time a music selection is performed within the music selection effective period, so that the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83 can be changed within the music selection effective period. . That is, the selected music image 831 reflecting the music selection in the music selection valid period can be displayed in real time. This allows the player to select the selected music piece from the selected music piece image 831 in real time, and thus can quickly and easily select the halfway selected music piece when reselecting the halfway selected music piece.

  In the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first to seventh embodiments are possible within an applicable range.

[Ninth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when a plurality of music selections are performed in the same music selection validity period in which the player can select a music to be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game, the music is selected last in the music selection validity period. One of the selected songs is finally stored as the already-selected song, and the song ranking of the already-selected song in the song selection counter data table is updated based on the last-selected song. That is, in the first embodiment described above, when a plurality of music pieces are selected in the same music piece selection validity period, the midway selection music pieces that are selected in the middle other than the last selection music piece in the music selection validity period are already selected. Since the song is not treated as a song and does not correspond to a non-selected song, the song selection counter data table is updated as an unselected song.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, when a plurality of music pieces are selected during the music selection valid period, the upper limit number (plurality) of the selected music pieces is stored in the selected music storage area, and the selected music pieces are stored in the selected music storage area. A case has been described where the music selection counter data is updated with the selected music piece as the already selected music piece, and an intermediately selected music piece other than the latest selected music piece among the plurality of selected music pieces is made the selected music piece.

  By the way, in the case where the midway selection music piece is an unselected music piece as in the above-described first embodiment, the middle selection music piece of the previous big hit game selection music validity period is initially set to the temporary selection music piece validity period of the subsequent jackpot game. There is a possibility that it will be selected as a selected song. On the other hand, when the halfway-selected song is the selected song as in the above-described eighth embodiment, the already-selected song image 831 corresponding to the halfway-selected song is displayed in the song selection image of the next big hit game song selection validity period. Is done.

  However, at the stage of the provisional selection, it was selected because he had a feeling that he liked it.However, he actually listened to the song, judged that it was not his favorite song, and finally selected another song to perform multiple songs. It is assumed that a selection is made. That is, the midway selection music piece may not be the music piece that the player likes. Therefore, if the midway selection music piece is not the music piece that the player likes, and is selected as the tentative selection music piece, the player may be frustrated or disliked. Also, if the midway selection song is not the player's favorite song and is displayed as the already-selected song image 831, if the midway selection song is selected by mistake, the player may feel frustrated or disgust Is concerned.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the music selected at the end of the music selection validity period is the already-selected music, as in the first and eighth embodiments described above. In contrast, the midway selection music is treated as a non-selected music that is not selected as the initial provisionally selected music. By treating the halfway-selected song as a non-selected song in this way, it is possible to prevent the halfway-selected song from being selected as the initial tentatively-selected song, and to be displayed as the already-selected song image 831 in the song selection image. Is prevented. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the irritation and disgust of the player due to the midway selection music being selected as the initial provisional selection music or being displayed as the already-selected music image 831.

  In the case where music selection exceeding the specified number (two in the present embodiment) assigned to an unselected music among the upper limit number (three in the present embodiment) that can be set as a non-selected music in the music selection valid period is performed. , A specified number of songs in the descending order of song selection date and time are regarded as non-selected songs. By providing the specified number of songs that are allocated to the midway selection songs among the upper limit number that can be set as the non-selected songs in this way, it is possible to prevent an unnecessarily large number of midway selection songs from becoming unselected songs. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the number of music pieces that can be selected as the initial tentatively selected music piece from becoming extremely small. It should be noted that, for selected songs exceeding a specified number among a plurality of songs selected during the song selection validity period, the songs with the oldest song selection date and time are regarded as unselected songs.

  Hereinafter, an example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112, focusing on differences from the above-described first and eighth embodiments. In the present embodiment, the music selection counter data is updated in the music selection counter data update process executed after the elapse of the music selection validity period, based on the selected music storage area updated in the same manner as in the above-described eighth embodiment. In this way, the middle selected songs other than the last selected song in the selected song validity period are stored as non-selected songs.

[Song selection counter data update processing]
In the music selection counter data update processing of the present embodiment, the music selection counter data update processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 62) and the music selection counter data update processing of the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 109). ) Is different from the process of updating the data relating to the non-selected music in the music selection counter data. Specifically, in the music selection counter data update process, even when the initial provisionally selected music is not selected by the player, the initial provisionally selected music is not determined to be a non-selected music, and a plurality of music during the same music selection validity period are not selected. When the selected music piece is selected, the intermediate selection music pieces whose selection date and time are new among the halfway selection music pieces selected halfway other than the last selection music piece in the music selection validity period are non-selected music pieces.

  Here, FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection counter data update process executed by the audio ramp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of updating of a display order of a selection music. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that data relating to the display order of non-selected songs in the music selection counter data table is in an initial state (a state in which no non-selected songs exist).

<Step S6301>
As shown in FIG. 111, in step S6301, when the music selection validity period has elapsed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected music is stored at least in the first temporary display order in the selected music storage area (see FIG. 108). It is determined (step S6301). When the selected song is stored at least in the first temporary display order in the selected song storage area (step S6301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S6302, and the selected song is stored in the selected song storage area. If not (step S6301: No), the music selection counter data updating process ends.

<Step S6302>
When the selected music is stored at least in the first place of the temporary display order in the selected music storage area (Step S6301: Yes), the MPU 51 updates data relating to the already selected music in the music selection counter data (Step S6302). . More specifically, the MPU 51 turns on the already-selected flag in the music selection counter data for the first music in the temporary display order in the selected music storage area, and stores it as the first music in the music order.

<Step S6303>
In step S6303, the MPU 51 updates the data related to the non-selected music in the music selection counter data based on the storage content of the selected music storage area. Specifically, when the intermediately selected song is stored in the second or third place of the temporary display order in the selected song storage area, the MPU 51 assigns the intermediately selected song to the first or the first song in the non-selected song order. Remember as 2nd place.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 112 (A) and FIG. 112 (B), the storage content of the selected music storage area is in the state shown in FIG. In the case of the music B, the music A is stored in the second place), it is stored that the music A whose tentative display order is the second is the first in the music order data of the non-selected music. That is, when the music B is selected after the music A is selected during the music selection validity period, the music B with the latest selection date and time is stored as the already-selected music in step S6302, and the music A with the next latest selection date and time is not selected. This is stored as the first place in the music ranking data of the music.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (A) and FIG. 112 (C), the storage contents of the selected music storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 108 (D) of the eighth embodiment (the music C is ranked first in the temporary display order). In the state where the music B is stored in the second place and the music A is stored in the third place), the music B whose tentative display order is the second is the first place in the music order data of the non-selected music, and the temporary display order is It is stored that the third tune A is the first tune in the non-selected tune ranking data. That is, when the music B is selected after the music A is selected during the music selection validity period and the music C is further selected, the music C with the latest selection date and time is stored as the already selected music in step S6302, and then the selection date and time is selected. Is stored as the first place in the song ranking data of the non-selected song, and then the song A whose selection date and time is new is stored as the second place in the song ranking data of the non-selected song.

<Step S6304>
In step S6304, the MPU 51 clears the selected music storage area and ends the music selection counter data update processing.

  In this way, the midway selection tune having the second or third tentative display order in the selected tune storage area is treated as a non-selected tune, thereby preventing the midway selection tune from being selected as the initial tentative selection tune. Is prevented from being displayed as the already-selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the irritation and disgust of the player due to the midway selection music being selected as the initial provisional selection music or being displayed as the already-selected music image 831. Also, the music selection counter data is updated after the elapse of the music selection validity period, so that the music selection image 83 in the next music selection validity period is selected based on the latest selection history of the player in the previous music selection validity period. And non-selected songs can be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to display the music selection image 83 reflecting the player's preference. Further, the selected music stored in the selected music storage area is deleted after updating the music selection counter data, so that the selected music storage area is deleted every music selection valid period. As a result, the selected music in the music selection valid period is stored for each music selection valid period, so that the selected music in each music selection valid period can be appropriately displayed as the already-selected music image 831.

  In the present embodiment, the music selection counter data is updated after the elapse of the music selection validity period. However, the music selection counter data is updated each time a music selection is performed within the music selection validity period (the selected music storage area is updated). (Every time it is performed). As described above, the music selection counter data is updated each time a music selection is performed within the music selection effective period, so that the non-selected music image 834 in the music selection image 83 can be changed within the music selection effective period. . That is, the non-selected music image 834 reflecting the music selection history in the music selection valid period can be displayed in real time. Thus, the player does not select the music corresponding to the non-selected music image 834 in real time, thereby preventing the midway selection music from being reselected against the player's will.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the initial provisionally selected music is not selected by the player, it is not regarded as a non-selected music and only the halfway selected music is regarded as a non-selected music. Similarly to the embodiment, when the initial provisionally selected music piece is not selected by the player, the music piece may be regarded as a non-selected music piece. In this case, the music corresponding to the initial tentatively selected music is stored in the first place of the music ranking data of the non-selected music in the music selection counter data, and the temporary display ranking of the selected music storage area is stored in the second and third places of the music ranking data. It is conceivable to store a midway selection song that is ranked second or third. By making the initial tentatively selected music that is not selected by the player a non-selected tune, it is possible to prevent the initial tentatively selected music that is likely not to be the player's preference from being selected again as the initial tentatively selected music. Thereby, it is possible to suppress irritation and disgust of the player due to the initial tentatively selected music not selected by the player being selected again as the initial tentatively selected music.

  In the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first to eighth embodiments are possible within an applicable range.

[Tenth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the music to be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game is selected by the player's determination operation on the determination button 21B of the selection determination unit 21 during the music selection effective period, and the selected music is changed to the music selection image 83. Has been described above as a case where the music image is displayed as the already-selected music image 831.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, the upper limit number (for example, three songs) is provided for the number of songs displayed as the already-selected song image 831 in the song selection image 83, and the one with the newest selection date and time is already set. This is displayed as the selected music image 831.

  However, in the above-described first embodiment, when a new song is selected, the previously selected song is changed from the already-selected song to the unselected song, and it is determined which song is the previously-selected favorite song. It is difficult, and it is troublesome to select a favorite song selected before from many songs.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to create a favorite music list by performing a specific operation (for example, a long press operation or a continuous hit operation) on the operation means when selecting a music in the music selection valid period. It is possible to select a song from the favorite song list created by the player and output the selected song from the speaker 26.

  As described above, the favorite music list is created by the specific operation during the music selection validity period, and the music to be output from the speaker can be selected from the favorite music list, whereby the previously selected favorite music is selected from many music. Without performing such a troublesome operation, it becomes easy to determine and select a favorite song of the previously selected player.

  Note that the operating means may include a first operating means for normal music selection and a second operating means for music selection for creating a favorite music list. For example, it is conceivable to set the determination button of the selection determining unit as the first operation means and set the operation button as the second operation means. Of course, the reverse is also possible. As described above, the first operation means for selecting a normal music and the second operation means for selecting a music for creating a favorite music list are set as different things, so that the operation means operated at the time of music selection The user can select whether or not to include the selected music in the favorite music list by a simple method of selecting.

  Hereinafter, an example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 117, focusing on differences from the above-described first embodiment. In the present embodiment, a favorite list selection image for displaying the favorite list image is displayed together with the music selection image 83 on the symbol display section during the music selection valid period, and the favorite list image is displayed when the favorite list selection image is selected. Is done. Here, FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen on the symbol display unit 341 during the music selection valid period of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 113A, a music selection image 83 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 during the music selection valid period, and a favorite list selection image 83A is displayed above the music selection image 83. The favorite list selection image 83A is selected to display the favorite list image 83B (see FIG. 113B). Specifically, the indicator image 835 is moved by operating the upper selection button 211 of the selection deciding unit 21 to temporarily select the favorite list selection image 83A, and then the deciding button 21B of the selection deciding unit 21 is operated. Thereby, the favorite list image 83B (see FIG. 113B) can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (B), the favorite list image 83B is a music piece that has been decided to be included in the favorite list by the player, and the upper limit number (three in this embodiment) of music pieces is registered as a favorite list. It is possible. In addition, the registration of the music to the favorite list is performed by temporarily selecting the desired music and holding down the determination button 21B while the music selection image 83 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 during the music selection valid period. Can be done by

  The favorite list image 83B includes an upper limit number of favorite music selection images 840 and a return image 841. In the example shown in FIG. 113B, it is indicated that the music A, the music D, and the music K are registered as favorite music. In the favorite list image 83B, the indicator image 841 is moved by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 of the selection deciding unit 21, and the favorite music selection image 840 corresponding to a desired music is temporarily selected. By operating the decision button 21B of the selection decision unit 21, the music can be output from the speaker 26. Also, by temporarily selecting the return image 841 and operating the enter button 21B, the display screen is shifted to the display screen on which the music selection image 83 shown in FIG. 113A is displayed. Since the music selection image 83 and the favorite music selection image 840 are displayed on separate screens as described above, if it is desired to select a target music from the favorite music, the user may erroneously select a desired music from the music selection image 83 without using the target music. Is prevented from being selected.

[Song selection process]
In the music selection processing of the present embodiment, in addition to the processing similar to the music selection processing of the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 51), registration of a music to a favorite list, display of a favorite list image 83B, and addition of a favorite The output from the speaker 26 of the music is executed. Here, FIG. 114 and FIG. 115 are flowcharts illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection process performed in the jackpot game rendering process of FIG.

<Step S6401>
As shown in FIG. 114, in the music selection processing of this embodiment, in step S6401, the MPU 51 turns on the favorite list image display screen flag indicating that the favorite list image 83B is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. It is determined whether or not it has been set. The favorite list image display screen flag is set to ON when the favorite list image 83B is displayed in step S6405 described below. When the favorite list image display screen flag is set to ON (step S6401: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S6402, and when the favorite list image display screen flag is set to OFF (step S6401: No), the flow shifts to step S2601 to execute the same processing as steps S2601 to S2606 of the music selection processing of the first embodiment described above.

<Step S6402>
If the favorite list image display screen flag is set to ON (step S6401: YES), the MPU 51 executes a favorite list image display screen process (step S6402), and ends the music selection processing. In this favorite list image display screen processing, processing corresponding to the operation of the player on the selection determining unit 21 is executed. For example, when it is detected that the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated, a process of moving the indicator image 842 (temporary selection item) is executed. Further, when it is detected that the enter button 21B has been operated, a process corresponding to the temporarily selected item is executed. Specifically, when it is detected that the determination button 21B is operated in a state where the favorite music selection image 840 is provisionally selected, the music corresponding to the favorite music selection image 840 is output from the speaker 26. For example, when the operation of the enter button 21B is detected in a state where the music A is provisionally selected (see FIG. 113A), the music A is output from the speaker 26. When it is detected that the enter button 21B is operated in a state where the return image 841 is temporarily selected, the display screen is changed from the screen displaying the favorite list image 83B shown in FIG. The screen is shifted to a screen displaying a music selection image 83 and a favorite list selection image 83A shown in 113 (A). At this time, the favorite list image display screen flag is set to off.

<Step S6403>
In step S6403, when the MPU 51 detects that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S2606: Yes), the temporarily selected item is the favorite list selection image 83A (see FIG. 113A). It is determined whether or not the favorite list selection image 83A has been selected. If the temporarily selected item is the favorite list selection image 83A (step S6403: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S6404, and if the temporarily selected item is not the favorite list selection image 83A ( Step S6403: No), and the process proceeds to Step S6406 in FIG.

<Steps S6404 and S6405>
If it is detected that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S2606: YES), and if the item provisionally selected is the favorite list selection image 83A (step S6403: YES), the MPU 51 executes the following favorite music. Based on the list ranking data (see FIG. 116), a favorite list image display process for displaying the favorite list image 83B (see FIG. 113 (B)) on the symbol display unit 341 is executed (step S6404). Then, the MPU 51 sets a favorite list image display screen flag indicating that the favorite list image 83B is being displayed to ON (step S6405), and ends the music selection processing.

<Step S6406>
If it is detected that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S2606: Yes) and the temporarily selected item is not the favorite list selection image 83A (step S6403: No), as shown in FIG. Determines whether the operation on the determination button 21B is a long-press operation (step S6406). Here, whether or not the operation is a long press operation is determined by using a counter, for example, when it is detected that the operation on the determination button 21B is continued by the determination button operation data (see FIG. 30F). The time is measured, and when the value of the counter reaches a predetermined value (operation continuation time is a predetermined time), it can be determined that the long press operation has been performed. The operation continuation time for determining that the operation is a long-press operation may be appropriately set, and is selected from a range of, for example, 1 second to 5 seconds. If the operation on the determination button 21B is a long press operation (step S6406: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S6407, and if the operation on the determination button 21B is not a long press operation, shifts the processing to step S2607. I do.

<Step S6407>
If the operation on the determination button 21B is a long-press operation (step S6406: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the favorite music list ranking data (see FIG. 116) (step S6407) and ends the music selection processing. Here, the favorite music list ranking data is referred to when displaying the favorite list image 83B on the symbol display unit 341 in step S6404 of FIG. Here, FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an example of the favorite music list ranking data.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (A), the favorite music list ranking data defines the upper limit number (three) of songs to be displayed as the favorite list image 83B (see FIG. 113 (B)), and the upper limit number of songs Specifies the display order of. As for the display order of the songs, a higher order is assigned in a descending order of the update date and time, and the higher the order of the songs, the higher the position is displayed in the favorite list image 83B (see FIG. 113B). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 116 (A), the first place of the display order is the music A, the second place is the music D, and the third place is the music K, so that the favorite list image 83B is displayed as shown in FIG. 113 (B). When displaying, the music A, the music D, and the music K are displayed in order from the top in the favorite list image 83B.

  When a long press operation is performed on the enter button 21B when selecting a music based on the music selection image 83 as described above (step S6406: Yes), the favorite music list ranking data is updated. Specifically, the song selected this time by the long press operation is set as the top display order, and the songs whose display order before the update is first and second are shifted to the second and third places, respectively. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 116A, when the music H is selected by a long press operation on the determination button 21B, the music H selected this time by the long press operation as shown in FIG. In the first place, the song A with the first display rank before the update is shifted to the second place, the music D with the second display rank before the update is shifted to the third place, and the display rank before the update is the third place. Music K is cleared. That is, the favorite music list ranking data stores the new upper limit number of music pieces at the music selection date and time.

  As described above, the favorite music list ranking data is updated by the long press operation on the determination button 21B, whereby the favorite music of the player can be registered in the range of the upper limit number. On the other hand, when a song is selected based on the song selection image 83, if a song is selected by performing an operation other than a long press operation on the enter button 21B, for example, a single-hit operation or a continuous-hit operation, a favorite song is selected. The list order data is not updated. Thus, by selecting whether or not to perform a long-press operation when selecting a music, the music selected this time can be selected as a favorite. In addition, the player can be displayed as the favorite list image 83B during the music selection validity period, and selects the music registered as a favorite by the player based on the upper limit number of favorite music selection images 840 displayed as the favorite list image 83B. Then, it can be output from the speaker 26. Therefore, the player can output the favorite music from the speaker 26 by a simple procedure. By setting the maximum number of favorite songs stored in the favorite song list ranking data, a plurality of favorite song selection images 840 can be displayed, so that a song can be selected from a plurality of favorite songs. Will be possible. Further, by setting the upper limit number of favorite songs stored in the favorite song list ranking data, all or most of the selectable songs are prevented from being registered as favorite songs. As a result, it is possible to register a song of higher interest to the player as a favorite within the upper limit number range, and thus it is possible to easily select a favorite song of higher interest. In addition, by registering a new upper limit number of favorite songs of the song selection date and time, the selection history of the favorite songs of the player is reflected, and the favorite songs that match the interest of the player can be registered.

  In addition, when the same music as the music selected this time by the long press operation on the determination button 21B is included in the favorite music list ranking data, it is restricted that the same music is redundantly stored in the favorite music list ranking data. It is possible. In this way, by restricting the same favorite song from being redundantly stored in the favorite song list ranking data, unnecessary display of the same favorite song image 840 for the same favorite song is prevented. You. In addition, since the same favorite music is not stored repeatedly in the upper limit number range, more types of music pieces are stored (registered) as favorite music in the limited upper limit number range, More types of favorite music images can be displayed.

  Specifically, when the same music as the music selected this time by the long press operation on the enter button 21B is included in the favorite music list ranking data, the older music selection date and time of the same music is cleared while the same music is cleared. It is also conceivable that the song is ranked first in the display order, and the display order of the remaining songs is shifted to a lower order as necessary. In this way, among the overlapping songs, the song with the new song selection date and time is ranked first in the song list, and if the song with the old song selection date and time is cleared, it is possible to prevent the same song from being included in the favorite song list order data. In the case where an upper limit is set for the number of songs stored as favorite song list ranking data, more types of songs can be stored as favorite song list ranking data. When the same music as the music selected this time by the long press operation on the determination button 21B is included in the favorite music list ranking data, the favorite music list ranking data may not be updated. Also in this case, the same music is included in the favorite music list ranking data, as in the case of clearing the music with the latest music selection date and time among the overlapping music and the music selection date and time with the oldest music selection date and time. Therefore, when an upper limit is set for the number of songs stored as favorite song list ranking data, more types of songs can be stored as favorite song list ranking data.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the favorite list selection image 83A is displayed on a separate screen from the music selection image 83 by a special operation (long press operation) on the determination button 21B of the selection determination unit 21 has been described. The selection image 83A may be displayed simultaneously on the same screen as the music selection image 83. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 117, the favorite selection image 83A may be displayed separately from the music selection image 83 by including the already-selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. In the image 83, the already-selected music image 831 may be omitted. Then, the favorite list selection image 83A is preferably arranged at a position adjacent to the temporary selection music image 832. When the music selection image 83 and the favorite list selection image 83A are simultaneously displayed on the same screen as described above, the operation for displaying the favorite music selection image 840 is unnecessary, and the image displayed first during the music selection validity period is not necessary. You can select your favorite song from. This reduces the time and effort required for the player to select a favorite song. In addition, by displaying the music selection image 83 together with the favorite music selection image 840, it is possible to easily select a past selection music that has not been registered as a favorite by the player.

  It is also conceivable to use the already-selected music image 831 of the music selection image 83 as the favorite music selection image 840. That is, for example, when music selection is performed by a special operation (for example, a long press operation or a continuous hit operation) on the determination button 21B of the selection determination unit 21, the selected music is displayed as the already-selected music image 831 while an operation other than the special operation is performed. When music is selected by (for example, a single-hit operation), by displaying the selected music as the unselected music image 833, it is possible to select whether to display the selected music as the already-selected music image 831 or not. Can be In this case, the plurality of selected music images 831 function as a favorite music list. It is also conceivable to display an image that explicitly or suggests that the selected music image 831 is a favorite music, for example, a character image such as “favorite” near the selected music image 831. As described above, when a music selection is performed by a special operation (for example, a long press operation or a continuous hit operation) on the determination button 21B, the selected music is displayed as the already-selected music image 831 to display the favorite music selection image 840. Operation is unnecessary, and a favorite music piece can be selected from the image displayed first during the music selection validity period. Thereby, the operation burden when the player selects the favorite music is reduced. Also, by displaying the favorite music as the already-selected music image 831, the types of images displayed in the music selection image 83 can be reduced. This prevents the music selection image 83 from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, the favorite music selection image is displayed in the favorite list image 83B in a specific period (for example, a period in a standby state in which neither the variable game nor the jackpot game is executed, or a period set other than the song selection valid period of the jackpot game). It is also conceivable that the music included as 840 can be customized. For example, the music selected by the player from the favorite list selection image 83A can be changed to the unselected music image 833 or the non-selected music image 834. On the contrary, the unselected music image 833 or the non-selected music image 834 is changed. It is possible to change to the favorite list selection image 83A. In this way, by making it possible to customize the music included in the favorite music selection image 840 in the favorite list image 83B in the specific period, it is forgotten that the music that is to be registered as the favorite music is made a favorite. For example, when a song that should not be registered as a favorite song is registered as a favorite, it is possible to register a player's original favorite song as a favorite song. In addition, when the player is replaced, the player after the replacement registers his or her favorite song as a favorite song at a timing such as before starting the game without a need to execute the jackpot game. It becomes possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first to ninth embodiments are possible within an applicable range.

[Summary of the Invention]
Hereinafter, the outline of the invention extracted from each of the above embodiments will be additionally described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, the description may be given with reference numerals for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to a specific configuration given the reference numerals. is not. Further, each configuration and each processing function described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Appendix A1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
Temporarily indicating that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by a player's determination operation on the operation means (21) for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). An image including a selected music image (832) and a selected music image (831) indicating that the music to be output by the audio output means (26) is already selected by the player. Is displayed on the image display means (341),
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. A gaming machine, wherein the music output is output from the audio output means (26) as a selected music.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, a selected music image indicating that the selected music has already been selected by the player as a music selection image for causing the player to select a music is displayed on the image display means. Is displayed. Therefore, the player can very easily find an image for selecting the already selected music from the music selection images when selecting the already selected music that has been selected before. Then, the player can tentatively select the selected tune and display it as the tentatively selected tune image by operating the operating means while checking the position of the selected tune image in the tune selection image. In addition, by performing a determination operation on the operation means in a state where the previously selected music piece previously selected is displayed as the tentatively selected music image, the selected music piece can be output from the audio output means. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the previously selected music piece with a small number of operations on the operation means, and output the selected music piece from the audio output means.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix A2]
The effect executing means (51) displays a predetermined number (for example, "10") of music selection images (83) that is a predetermined number smaller than the number of the plurality of music pieces (for example, "20") to the image display means. (341) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2, there are prepared so many songs that the image display means cannot display them all at once, and in a case where a song selection image for some of the plurality of songs is displayed. Even so, the already-selected music image for selecting the already-selected music is displayed, so that the already-selected music can be easily selected by a simple operation.

[Appendix A3]
The supplementary note A1 or the supplementary note, wherein the effect performing means (51) displays the provisionally selected music image (832) and the already selected music image (831) on the image display means (341) in a distinguishable manner. The gaming machine according to A2.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to attachment A3, wherein the effect performing means (51) displays the selected music image (831) in a display mode different from that of the provisionally selected music image (832).

[Appendix A5]
The effect executing means (51) displays the selected music image (832) by displaying an additional image indicating that the music is the selected music in at least a part of the periphery of the selected music image (831). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A3 or A4, wherein the image is displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be distinguishable from the temporarily selected music image (832).

[Appendix A6]
The effect executing means (51) displays the selected music image (831) in the predetermined area of the image display means (341) to display the selected music image (831) in the provisionally selected music image. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A3 to A5, wherein the gaming machine displays the image (832) so as to be distinguishable from the image (832).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A3 to A6, the selected music image is displayed in a form that can be distinguished from the tentatively selected music image, so that it is easier to find the selected music image from the music selected images. Therefore, the convenience in temporarily selecting and selecting the already-selected music is further improved.

[Appendix A7]
The said effect execution means (51) displays on said image display means (341) the said predetermined | prescribed upper limit number of the said selected music image (831) selected from two or more numbers on the said image display means (341). To A6.

[Appendix A8]
A storage unit (512) for storing selected music information on the selected music;
The effect executing means (51) displays the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) on the image display means (341) based on the selected music information stored in the storage means (512). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7, wherein the gaming machine is operated.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7 and Supplementary Note A8, the image display means displays less than or equal to the upper limit number of selected music images selected from two or more. That is, since a plurality of selected music images can be displayed, the convenience of provisional selection and selection of a plurality of selected music pieces that have been selected in the past is improved. On the other hand, by setting an upper limit on the number of the selected music images, the display of an excessive number of the selected music images is prevented. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected music piece based on an appropriate number of the already selected music images, thereby reducing the operation burden when selecting the already selected music piece.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A8, wherein, when a plurality of music selections are performed in the special game state, the storage unit (512) stores only the last selected music as a selected music. .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A9, when a plurality of music selections are performed in the special gaming state, only the music selected last is regarded as the already selected music. Therefore, even if a plurality of music selections are performed during the execution of one special game state, the final selection music becomes clear and the already-selected music image is occupied by the already-selected music for one special game state. Can be prevented. In addition, for example, when the user does not like the music once selected and reselects another music, it is possible to prevent the unfavorable music from being displayed as the already-selected music image and to select the newly selected music from the already-selected music. Convenience when selecting based on a music image is improved.

[Appendix A10]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be displayed first on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) sorts the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in descending order of selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A7 to A9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image (832).

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note A10, in the music selection image displayed first, the already-selected music image corresponding to the newly-selected music with the new selection date and time is displayed at a position close to the temporarily-selected music image. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find the most recently selected music piece, and can again select the most recently selected music piece by the number of operations on the operation means. As a result, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the most recently selected music piece again, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix A11]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be displayed first on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) sorts the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in descending order of selection frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A7 to A9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image (832).

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note A11, the already-selected music image corresponding to the already-selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection rate within a predetermined number of times) is displayed at a position near the temporarily-selected music image. That is, the already-selected music image is displayed as reflecting the recent tendency of the player to select music. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find the recently selected music that has been recently selected, and can again select the recently selected music with a small number of operations on the operation means. Thereby, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the recently selected music piece again, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the special game.

[Appendix A12]
The said effect execution means (51) displays on said image display means (341) all the said upper limit number of said selected music image (831) as a thing with respect to a different music, Additional notes A7 to Additional notes A11 characterized by the above-mentioned. A gaming machine according to any of the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A12, since the selected music images do not include a plurality of images corresponding to the same music, even when the display number of the selected music images has an upper limit, the music corresponding to the upper limit is set. The selected music images corresponding to the number of the selected music are displayed. Therefore, when the player repeatedly selects the same music and wants to select a selected music other than that music, the player can easily find the already-selected music to be selected. As a result, the operation burden when the player selects the previously selected music piece again is reduced, so that the player can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix A13]
When the display number of the selected music image (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit number, the display number is insufficient for the upper limit number (for example, “1” to “3”). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A7 to A12, wherein the non-selected song image (833) is displayed as the song selection image (83) according to (1).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A13, even when the number of already-selected music images to be displayed on the image display means is less than the upper limit, an unselected music image is displayed instead of the already-selected music image. Thereby, the specified number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix A14]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating that it is an unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music is further identifiably displayed on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A13, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A14, the player can distinguish and recognize the already-selected music image that has been selected previously and the unselected music image that has not been previously selected. By operating the operation means while checking, it is possible to tentatively select an unselected song and display it as a tentatively selected song image. Therefore, even when selecting a non-selected song instead of the already-selected song, the player can select the non-selected song with a small number of operations on the operation unit and output the unselected song from the audio output unit.

[Appendix A15]
The rendering executing means (51), when displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), displays the temporarily selected music image (832) with the selected music image (831) and the unselected music image (831). The gaming machine according to attachment A14, wherein the gaming machine is displayed between the selected music image (833).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A15, at least at the stage when the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means, both the already-selected music image and the unselected music image are adjacent to the provisionally-selected music image. For this reason, the player changes the tentatively selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means, thereby selecting either the previously selected music that has been selected before or the unselected music that has not been previously selected. Even if the user selects a music piece, the target music piece can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output unit.

[Appendix A16]
When displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) sets the plurality of initial provisionally selected music pieces for the initial provisional selection music image (832) to be displayed first. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A14 or supplementary note A15, wherein a selection is made from the unselected songs among the songs.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A16, the initial provisionally selected music piece is selected from the unselected music pieces, and the initial provisionally selected music piece that is the unselected music piece is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player. Can give an opportunity to communicate.

[Appendix A17]
When the tentatively selected song or the selected song is the already-selected song and the unselected song, the tentatively-selected song or the selected song is played from the different portion of the tentatively-selected song or the selected song. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A14 to A16, wherein the gaming machine outputs the output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17, by performing a determination operation on the operation unit in a state where the unselected music piece is displayed as the temporarily selected music image, the unselected music piece that has not been previously selected is replaced with the already selected music piece. It is possible to output to the audio output means from a different part of the music than the case where it is selected. This allows the player to listen to the selected music from different parts when the selected music is selected and when the unselected music is selected, so that the player outputs the selected music and the unselected music. The user can enjoy the music in a different way than when the music is output.

[Appendix A18]
When the tentatively selected music piece is the selected music piece, the effect execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the music piece from the music start part of the already selected music piece, and outputs the temporarily selected music piece to the unselected music piece. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17, wherein when the music piece is a selected music piece, the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected music piece from a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note A18, the player can listen to the tentatively selected music piece from the music start portion when the tentatively selected music piece is the already-selected music piece, and can perform rusting when the tentatively selected music piece is an unselected music piece. You can listen from the part. Therefore, regarding the tentatively selected song, the previously selected song can be enjoyed from the start portion. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the music that has not been selected before from the climax part of the music that has the highest climax, the player determines whether or not the temporarily selected music is the music of his choice. It will be easier.

[Appendix A19]
When the selected music piece is the selected music piece, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the selected music piece from a music start portion, and the selected music piece is the unselected music piece. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17 or A18, wherein the audio output unit (26) outputs the unselected music piece from a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A19, the player can listen to the selected music piece from the music start part when the selected music piece is the already selected music piece, and can start listening to the chorus part when the selected music piece is the unselected music piece. You can listen. Therefore, with respect to the selected music, the player can enjoy the music from the start part for the music selected before. On the other hand, the player can listen to music that has not been selected before from the climax part of the music that is the most exciting, so it is easy to determine whether the selected music this time is the music of his choice Become.

[Appendix A20]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
Display setting means (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the selected music image (831) in response to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by a player;
The effect executing means (51) includes:
A display setting screen which enables a display screen of the image display means (341) to be set in accordance with an operation on the operation means (21) by a player, whether or not to display the selected music image (831). (88, 98)
The display setting unit (51) is configured to perform the setting operation by a player by operating the operation unit (21) when the display screen is the display setting screen (88, 98). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A19, wherein the display setting is performed in accordance with setting contents set by a player.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note A20, it is possible to set whether or not to display the already-selected music image included in the music selection image. Therefore, the music selection image is displayed on the image display means in a display mode according to the player's preference. be able to. Thereby, the player can select the music to be output from the audio output means based on the music selection image in the display mode set by the player. Further, the player can select whether or not to display the selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, for example, when the music selection image includes the already-selected music image corresponding to the already-selected music selected by the previous player in the past, the player displays the music selection image that does not include the already-selected music image. be able to.

[Appendix A21]
A display setting storage unit (512) capable of storing setting history information on a setting history for the display setting;
The effect executing means (51) is provided as the display setting screen (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. ) To a display setting history screen (88) displaying a setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in
The display setting means (51) is configured to, when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88), perform a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the setting history image (881) by a player. The gaming machine according to attachment A20, wherein the display setting of contents set by a player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A21, the player performs the same display setting as the past setting content by performing the setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the display setting history screen. Can be. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to attachment A21, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the setting history image (881) including an image indicating a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22, the player can distinguish between the setting history of the player who has previously played the game and his / her own setting history by referring to the setting time, When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to give a possibility of selecting a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix A23]
An output for making an output start setting for starting the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from any of a plurality of output start parts predetermined according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player. Further comprising start setting means (51);
The effect executing means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) enabling the output start setting in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A22, wherein when the operation is performed, the output start setting for the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece is performed according to the setting content set by the player. .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, the output start portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song can be set, so that the tentatively selected song or the selected song can be output from the audio output means from a portion that matches the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to attachment A23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A24, the player can cause the tentatively selected song or the selected song to start outputting from the song start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from a portion that suits his or her taste. Here, the music start part or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. For this reason, the player selects whether the tentatively selected music or the selected music is the previously selected music by selecting the part for starting the output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the music start part and the chorus part. This makes it easy to determine whether a song has not been played or has not been heard before.

[Appendix A25]
Output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information on a setting history for the output start setting;
The effect execution means (51) is provided as the output start setting screen (87, 97) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (512) The display shifts to an output start setting history screen (87) displaying a setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
When the output screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) is operated by the player to perform the output start setting based on the setting history image (871). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23 or A24, wherein in the case, the output start setting having the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A25, when the display screen on the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation unit, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. Can be a start setting. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous settings, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to attachment A25, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A26, the player can refer to the set time, for example, to distinguish between the setting history of a player who has played a game before and his or her own setting history, and When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to give a possibility of selecting a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
Music selection information storage means (512) for storing music selection information relating to music selection by the player;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
The tune selection image (83) indicates that the tune is a tentatively selected tune that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a tune to be output by the audio output means (26). The temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable,
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. Output the selected music as the selected music from the audio output means (26);
The music selection information storage means includes, as the music selection information, provisionally selected music information relating to the provisionally selected music, and a previously selected music which has already been selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26). Stored selected music information and unselected music information related to unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music,
The unselected music information is the initial temporary selected music of the initial temporarily selected music image (832) initially displayed on the image display means (341) as the temporarily selected music image (832). A gaming machine characterized by including non-selected music information relating to non-selected music that has not been selected by the player at the stage when the selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341).

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, the non-selected music information related to the non-selected music is stored in the music selection information storage unit. Therefore, based on the non-selected music information, it is possible for the player to recognize the information on the non-selected music via the presentation means such as the image display means. This allows the player to recognize which of the plurality of music pieces is the non-selected music piece, and thus, despite being displayed on the image display means (341) as the initial temporarily selected music piece image. This eliminates the hassle of tentatively selecting or selecting a non-selected song that was not selected by the player.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the level of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix B2]
Information updating means (51) for updating the music selection information stored in the music selection information storage means (512);
The information updating means (51) executes an update for clearing information related to a song corresponding to the selected song from the non-selected song information when the selected song is the non-selected song. The gaming machine according to B1.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B2, since the non-selected music is treated as other music when the non-selected music is selected, the music selected by the player is displayed on the image display means as a non-selected music image. It is avoided that it is continued. This prevents the player from mistaking the previously selected song as a non-selected song and avoiding unintentionally avoiding the selection of the song.

[Appendix B3]
The information updating means (51) executes an update in which, when the selected music piece is the non-selected music piece, information on a music piece corresponding to the selected music piece is included in the already-selected music piece information. The gaming machine according to B2.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B3, in addition to preventing a previously selected song from being mistaken as a non-selected song, the selected song corresponding to the song because the song is treated as a selected song The image will be displayed on the image display means. This makes it possible to more reliably prevent the user from unintentionally avoiding the selection of the music.

[Appendix B4]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
As the music selection image (83), at least the provisionally selected music image (832), the selected music image (831) indicating the selected music, and the unselected music indicating the unselected music Displaying the image (833) on the image display means (341);
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B3, wherein the unselected song image (833) includes an identifiable non-selected song image (834) indicating the non-selected song.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B4, since an image including a non-selected music image is displayed as an unselected music image, the player does not select it even though it was initially displayed as a temporarily selected music image in the past. Since the non-selected music piece can be distinguished from other music pieces, the player can more reliably avoid unintended temporary selection of the non-selected music piece. In addition, since the non-selected music image is displayed, the user can search for a new favorite music while avoiding the non-selected music, so that even when the music selection is restricted to a relatively short time, the time limit can be reduced. It can be used effectively to find new favorite songs.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, since the selected music image and the unselected music are displayed as the music selection images, the player can not only distinguish and recognize the selected music and the unselected music but also select the selected music. Regardless of whether a tune or an unselected tune is selected, the target tune can be easily and efficiently selected with a small number of operations on the operation means and output from the audio output means.

[Appendix B5]
The effect executing means (51) is based on the non-selected music information stored in the music selection information storage means and has a predetermined upper limit number of the non-selected music images (834) selected from two or more. ) Is displayed on the image display means (341).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, since the upper limit is set on the number of the non-selected music images, an excessive number of the non-selected music images is prevented from being displayed, and the non-selected music is unnecessarily selected. Risk can be further reduced.

[Appendix B6]
The effect executing means (51) arranges and displays the non-selected music images (834) for the upper limit number of the non-selected music pieces in a position farthest from the temporarily selected music image (832) in the order of the latest non-selection date and time. The gaming machine according to supplementary note B5, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B6, since the non-selected music image corresponding to the new non-selected music at the non-selected date and time is displayed at a position far from the temporarily selected music image, the non-selected music that has not been selected most recently is selected. Risk can be reduced.

[Appendix B7]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
A predetermined number (for example, “10”) of music selection images (83) that is smaller than the number of the plurality of music (for example, “20”) is displayed on the image display means (341);
In the initial music selection image (83) displayed first on the image display means (341), the non-selected music image (834) is not displayed on the image display means (341), and the player operates the operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B4 to B6, wherein the non-selected music image (834) is displayed on the image display means (341) according to the following.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B7, the non-selected music image is not displayed in the initial music selection image initially displayed on the image display means. On the other hand, non-selected songs are less likely to be selected by the player. Therefore, since the non-selected music image is not displayed in the initial music selection image, the unselected music (excluding the non-selected music) that is more likely to be selected by the player than the non-selected music in the initial music selection image. Many can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required for selecting a song from unselected songs excluding the non-selected song, and to reduce the stress applied to the player in song selection. On the other hand, since the player can display the non-selected music image by operating the operation means, it is also possible to select a music from the non-selected music.

[Appendix B8]
An initial music arrangement determining means (51) for determining an initial arrangement of the plurality of music pieces for displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341);
The effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the music selection image (83) in accordance with the initial arrangement determined by the initial music arrangement determining means (51),
The initial music arrangement determining means (51) is configured to set the non-selected music piece to a position where the minimum number of times of operation on the operation means (21) necessary for making the non-selected music piece the temporarily selected music piece is the largest in the initial arrangement. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B4 to B7, wherein music pieces are arranged.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B8, the minimum number of times of operation on the operation means necessary for a non-selected music piece that is unlikely to be selected by the player (highly likely to avoid the selection by the player) to be a temporarily selected music piece Are arranged at the position where the number is largest. Therefore, similarly to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B7, in the initial music selection image, more unselected music (excluding non-selected music) that is more likely to be selected by the player than non-selected music can be displayed. it can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required for selecting a song from unselected songs excluding the non-selected song, and to reduce the stress applied to the player in song selection.

[Appendix B9]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
Display setting means (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the unselected music image (833) in response to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by a player;
The effect executing means (51) includes:
A display setting screen that enables a display screen of the image display means (341) to be set in accordance with a player's operation on the operation means (21), whether or not to display the unselected music image (833). (88, 98)
The display setting unit (51) is configured to perform the setting operation by a player by operating the operation unit (21) when the display screen is the display setting screen (88, 98). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B4 to B8, wherein the display setting is performed in accordance with setting contents set by a player.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment B9, the player can select whether or not to display the non-selected music image in the music selection image. For this reason, the player selects a music selection image that does not include the non-selected music image, for example, when the music selection image includes a non-selected music image for a non-selected music that the previous player did not previously select. Can be displayed.

[Appendix B10]
A display setting storage unit (512) capable of storing setting history information on a setting history for the display setting;
The effect executing means (51) is provided as the display setting screen (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. ) To a display setting history screen (88) displaying a setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in
The display setting unit (51) is configured to perform a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the setting history image (881) by the player when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88). The gaming machine according to attachment B9, wherein the display setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B10, the player performs the same display setting as the past setting content by performing the setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the display setting history screen. Can be. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to attachment B10, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the setting history image (881) including an image indicating a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B11, the player can distinguish between the setting history of the player who previously played the game and his / her own setting history by referring to the setting time, When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to give a possibility of selecting a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B12]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to first display the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341) as the temporary selection music image (832). 832) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B11, wherein an initial tentatively selected tune for the non-selected tune is selected from the unselected tunes, and the initial tentatively selected tune is output from the audio output means (26). .

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note B12, when the music selection image is displayed, the initial temporarily selected music to be displayed as the temporarily selected music image is first selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output unit. You. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece as the initial provisionally selected music piece in the process up to that point. An opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected songs can be secured.

[Appendix B13]
The gaming machine according to attachment B12, wherein the effect executing means (51) selects the initial tentatively selected music piece from music pieces other than the non-selected music piece among the unselected music pieces.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note B13, when displaying the music selection image, the initial provisionally selected music is selected from non-selected music other than the non-selected music. For this reason, the player selects the non-selected music that has not been selected by the player despite having been previously selected as the tentatively selected music by the effect execution means, and is again selected by the effect execution means and displayed as the initial temporarily selected music image. You are free from the hassle of doing things.

[Appendix C1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
The tune selection image (83) indicates that the tune is a tentatively selected tune that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a tune to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. Output the selected music as the selected music from the audio output means (26);
The tentatively selected song or the selected song, depending on whether the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a previously selected song that has already been selected by a player or a non-selected song other than the already selected song. A game machine that outputs the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece to the audio output means (26) from different portions of the game machine.

[Appendix C2]
The effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the provisionally selected music or the selected music from a music start portion when the provisionally selected music or the selected music is the already selected music. The gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, characterized in that:

[Appendix C3]
The effect executing means (51) outputs the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the chorus portion to the audio output means (26) when the provisionally selected music or the selected music is the unselected music. A gaming machine according to supplementary note C1 or supplementary note C2.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes C1 to C3, the selected music pieces are output from different parts of the music pieces depending on whether the already-selected music pieces are temporarily selected or selected and the unselected music pieces are temporarily selected or selected. Therefore, the player can enjoy the tentatively selected tune or the selected tune from different parts depending on whether the tentatively selected or unselected tune is selected or the tentatively selected or unselected tune is selected. For example, if the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a previously selected song, the already selected song can be heard from the song start portion, and if the temporarily selected song or the selected song is an unselected song, the unselected song is played. You can listen from the part. Therefore, for the already-selected tune having previously heard the chorus portion, it can be enjoyed from the tune start portion. On the other hand, for a song that has not been selected before, it is possible to listen to the climax portion of the song that has the highest climax, so that it is easy to determine whether the song is one that you like.

[Appendix C4]
The effect executing means (51), when displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), displays an initial temporary selection music image (832) to be displayed first as the temporary selection music image (832). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes C1 to C3, wherein an initial tentatively selected music piece for the plurality of music pieces is selected from the unselected music pieces among the plurality of music pieces.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to attachment C4, wherein the effect executing means (51) outputs the initial tentatively selected music piece from the chorus portion to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes C4 and C5, when displaying the music selection image, the tentatively selected music to be displayed as the temporarily selected music image is first selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is, for example, a rust portion. From the voice output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the selected music pieces, the player can be made to listen to the unselected music pieces in the process up to that point. In particular, when the initially provisionally selected music is output from the chorus portion, the chorus portion of the unselected music that has the highest climax can always be heard, and an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player can be secured.

[Appendix C6]
An output for making an output start setting for starting the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from any of a plurality of output start parts predetermined according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player. Further comprising start setting means (51);
The effect executing means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) enabling the output start setting in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C5, wherein, when an operation is performed, the output start setting for the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece is performed according to the setting content set by the player. .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C6, since the output start portion of the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece can be set, the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece can be output from the audio output means from a portion that matches the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix C7]
The gaming machine according to attachment C6, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C7, the player can cause the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece to start outputting from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from a portion that suits his or her taste. Here, the music start part or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. For this reason, the player selects whether the tentatively selected music or the selected music is the previously selected music by selecting the part for starting the output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the music start part and the chorus part. This makes it easy to determine whether a song has not been played or has not been heard before.

[Appendix C8]
Output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information on an output start setting history for the output start setting;
The effect execution means (51) is provided as the output start setting screen (87, 97) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (512) The screen is shifted to an output start setting history screen (87) displaying an output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
The output start setting means (51) is configured to perform, when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), an operation for performing the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871) by a player. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C6 or C7, wherein, when performed, the output start setting having the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C8, the player performs a setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. Can be a start setting. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous settings, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix C9]
The gaming machine according to claim C8, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C9, the player can distinguish between the output start setting history of the player who previously played the game and his / her own output start setting history by referring to the set time. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it is easy to obtain a prospect of selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix D1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
The tune selection image (83) indicates that the tune is a tentatively selected tune that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a tune to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. Output the selected music as the selected music from the audio output means (26);
A gaming machine, wherein, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the temporarily selected music piece output from the audio output means (26) is continuously output at a timing when the determination operation is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, the temporarily selected music piece is continuously output when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the selected music is output continuously without interruption from the provisional selection stage, so that the same portion of the music is output in a short time from the provisional selection stage to the music selection stage. Is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from listening to the chorus portion of the same music in a short time and to feel a sense of discomfort and disgust when the music is interrupted.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the selected music piece is the already selected music piece.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2, when the temporarily selected music piece is the already selected music piece, the already selected music piece is continuously and continuously output from the stage of the temporary selection. This prevents the chorus portion of the same song from being output redundantly in a short time from the stage of the tentative selection to the stage of selecting the song. Can be suppressed.

[Appendix D3]
When the tentatively selected music piece is the selected music piece, the effect execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output a music start part (for example, a singing start part (A melody part) of the selected music piece, The gaming machine according to supplementary note D2, wherein the game machine outputs the information from an intro part (prelude part).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D3, when the tentatively selected song is the already-selected song, the already-selected song is output from the song start portion, and when the selected song is the already-selected song, the tentatively-selected song continues. Output. In other words, when the selected music is selected, the music is output from the music start portion at the temporary selection stage, and even when the music is selected, the already selected music is continuously output from the temporary selection stage. This not only prevents the chorus portion of the same song from being output in duplicate in a short time from the selection stage to the song selection stage, but also at least temporarily starts the song start portion of the already-selected song at the temporary selection stage. I can hear it reliably. In addition, since the already-selected music is continuously output from the temporary selection stage, the player can increase the tension from the music start portion toward the chorus portion, and maintain the tension at a high level.

[Appendix D4]
The special game state includes a first special game state (a 5R normal jackpot game state and a 5R sure-change jackpot game state), and a second special game state (16R sure-change jackpot game state) in which the game time is longer than the first special game state. Including
The gaming machine according to attachment D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming state is the first special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D4, in the first special gaming state in which the game time is short, the player performs the tentative selection music output from the sound output means at the timing when the deciding operation is performed, and performs the deciding operation. You can continue to listen to the part that was output when it was played. That is, in the first special game state, the same portion of the music is output both during the temporary selection of the music and after the selection of the music during a short game time, or the music is output from a different portion again after the selection of the music. That has been avoided. As a result, the music can be continuously listened to within the short game time, so that the music can be enjoyed without stress even during the short game time.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to attachment D4, wherein the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the tentatively selected music piece from a chorus portion in the first special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D5, in the first special gaming state, the climax part of the tentatively selected song that has the highest climax can be heard by the player. An opportunity to convey the goodness of the selected song can be secured. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the climax portion of the temporarily selected music that has a high degree of excitement, it is easy to determine whether the temporarily selected music is a favorite music or a music previously selected and liked. In addition, when the game state is the first special game state, by outputting the tentatively selected music piece from the chorus portion, the player can surely listen to the chorus portion after the selection of the music piece after the tentative selection, and You can listen to music continuously from the part without stress.

[Appendix D6]
In the second special game state, when the deciding operation is performed, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to send the selected music to a music start portion (for example, a singing start portion (A melody portion). ), The game machine according to Supplementary Note D4 or Supplementary Note D5, wherein the game machine outputs the information from an intro part (prelude part).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D6, when the gaming state is the second special gaming state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, in the second special game state in which the game time is long, the player can listen to the music output from the audio output means when the determination operation is performed again from the music start portion. That is, in the second special game state, since the game time has enough time, the music including the chorus portion of the music can be sufficiently enjoyed from the music start portion.

[Appendix D7]
The said effect execution means (51) makes said audio | voice output means (26) output said temporary selection music from a music start part in said 2nd special game state, It is any one of addition D4 to addition D6 characterized by the above-mentioned. The gaming machine described.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D7, when the gaming state is the second special gaming state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, in the second special game state in which the game time is long, the player can listen to the music output from the audio output means when the determination operation is performed again from the music start portion. That is, in the second special game state, since the game time has enough time, the music including the chorus portion of the music can be sufficiently enjoyed from the music start portion. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the first special gaming state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music start portion as described above. Therefore, the player can determine whether the gaming state is the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state depending on whether the provisionally selected music is output from the chorus part or the music starting part. is there. Further, the game time is different between the first special game state and the second special game state, and generally the expected game value tends to be higher as the game time is longer. Therefore, the player can enjoy by paying attention to the output start portion of the temporarily selected music piece in order to determine whether or not the second special game state is more generally advantageous for the player.

[Appendix D8]
The effect executing means (51) is a selected music piece that has already been selected by the player as the music piece to be output by the audio output means (26) as the music piece selected image (83). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D7, wherein the music image (831) is further displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D8, the player tentatively selects the selected tune and displays the tentatively selected tune image by operating the operation unit while checking the position of the selected tune image in the selected tune image. Can be done. In addition, by performing a determination operation on the operation means in a state where the previously selected music piece previously selected is displayed as the tentatively selected music image, the selected music piece can be output from the audio output means. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the previously selected music piece with a small number of operations on the operation means, and output the selected music piece from the audio output means.

[Appendix D9]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating that it is an unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music is further identifiably displayed on the image display means (341). Display,
When displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), the plurality of initial provisionally selected music pieces for the initial provisional selection music image (832) to be displayed first as the provisional selection music image (832) are displayed. The gaming machine according to supplementary note D8, wherein a selection is made from the unselected songs among the songs.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D9, when the music selection image is displayed, the temporarily selected music to be displayed as the temporarily selected music image is first selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output unit. . Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player. Can give an opportunity to communicate.

[Appendix D10]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
An output start setting means for performing an output start setting of starting from the music start portion or the chorus portion according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player to start output of the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece. 51) is further provided,
The effect executing means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) enabling the output start setting in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes D1 to D9, wherein when an operation is performed, the output start setting is performed in accordance with the setting content set by the player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D10, the player can perform setting of the output start of the temporarily selected music or the selected music. Therefore, by setting the output start portion, the player can output the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from a favorite part of the player.

[Appendix D11]
Output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing output start setting history information on an output start setting history for the output start setting;
The effect execution means (51) is provided as the output start setting screen (87, 97) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (512) The screen is shifted to an output start setting history screen (87) displaying an output start setting history image (871B) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512),
When the output screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) performs an operation for performing the output start setting by the player based on the output start setting history image (871B). The game machine according to Supplementary Note D10, wherein when the game is performed, the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D11, when the display screen on the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation unit to output the same content as the past output start setting. Can be a start setting. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous output start setting, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix D12]
The gaming machine according to attachment D11, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871B) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D12, the player can distinguish between the output start setting history of the player who has played a game before and his / her own output start setting history by referring to the set time. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it is easy to obtain a prospect of selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
The tune selection image (83) indicates that the tune is a tentatively selected tune that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a tune to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. Output the selected music as the selected music from the audio output means (26);
When displaying the tentatively selected music image (832) on the image display means (341), the tentatively selected music piece has already been selected by the player as music to be output by the audio output means (26). If it is an unselected song other than the selected song, the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected song from the chorus portion,
A gaming machine, wherein when the selected music piece is the unselected music piece, the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected music piece from a music start portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1, the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus portion, and the selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, when an unselected song that has not been selected before is selected, the music start portion and rust portion of the unselected song can be heard by the player, so that the player can fully enjoy the unselected song. Can be told. On the other hand, the player does not listen to the rust portion already output at the stage of the provisional selection in a short time, and even if the time required for the special game is short, the unselected music that is the selected music is After selecting a song, the user can listen to the song from the start of the song, and can check again whether the unselected song matches his / her taste.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix E2]
The effect executing means (51) displays a predetermined number (for example, "10") of music selection images (83) that is a predetermined number smaller than the number of the plurality of music pieces (for example, "20") to the image display means. (341) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E2, there are prepared so many songs that the image display means cannot display them all at once, and in the case where a song selection image for some of the plurality of songs is displayed. Even so, the already-selected music image for selecting the already-selected music is displayed, so that the already-selected music can be easily selected by a simple operation.

[Appendix E3]
The effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to distinguishably display the temporarily selected music image (832) and the already-selected music image (831) indicating the temporarily selected music image. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1 or E2, characterized in that:

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to attachment E3, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the selected music image (831) in a display mode different from that of the provisionally selected music image (832).

[Appendix E5]
The attraction execution means (51) displays an additional image indicating the selected music on at least a part of the periphery of the selected music image (831), wherein the additional image is displayed. Gaming machine.

[Appendix E6]
The said effect execution means (51) displays the said selected music image (831) in the predetermined area | region in the said image display means (341), Either of the supplementary notes E3 to E5 characterized by the above-mentioned. Gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes E3 to E6, the already-selected music image is displayed in a form that can be distinguished from the temporarily-selected music image, so that it is easier to find the already-selected music image from the selected music images. Therefore, the convenience in temporarily selecting and selecting the already-selected music is further improved.

[Appendix E7]
The effect producing means (51) displays on the image display means (341) a predetermined upper limit number of the selected music images (831) selected from two or more numbers on the image display means (341). To E6.

[Appendix E8]
A storage unit (512) for storing selected music information on the selected music;
The effect executing means (51) displays the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) on the image display means (341) based on the selected music information stored in the storage means (512). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E7, wherein the gaming machine is operated.

  According to the gaming machines of Supplementary Note E7 and Supplementary Note E8, in the special gaming state, a music selection image including the selected music images of not more than the upper limit number selected from two or more is displayed on the image display means. That is, a plurality of selected music images can be displayed. Further, by setting an upper limit on the number of the selected music images, the display of an excessive number of the selected music images is prevented. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected music piece based on an appropriate number of the already selected music images, thereby reducing the operation burden when selecting the already selected music piece.

[Appendix E9]
The gaming machine according to attachment E8, wherein, when a plurality of music selections are performed in the special gaming state, the storage unit (512) sets only the last selected music as a selected music.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E9, when music selection is performed a plurality of times in the special game state, only the music selected last is regarded as the selected music. Therefore, even if a plurality of music selections are performed during the execution of one special game state, the final selection music becomes clear and the already-selected music image is occupied by the already-selected music for one special game state. Can be prevented. In addition, for example, when the user does not like the music once selected and reselects another music, it is possible to prevent the unfavorable music from being displayed as the already-selected music image and to select the newly selected music from the already-selected music. Convenience when selecting based on a music image is improved.

[Appendix E10]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be displayed first on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) temporarily selects the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in descending order of selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E7 to E9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image (832).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E10, in the music selection image displayed first, the already-selected music image corresponding to the newly-selected music with the new selection date and time is displayed at a position near the tentatively-selected music image. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find the most recently selected music piece, and can again select the most recently selected music piece by the number of operations on the operation means. As a result, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the most recently selected music piece again, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix E11]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be displayed first on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) temporarily selects the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in descending order of selection frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes E7 to E9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image (832).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E11, the already-selected music image corresponding to the already-selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection rate within a predetermined number of times) is displayed at a position near the temporarily-selected music image. That is, the already-selected music image is displayed as reflecting the recent tendency of the player to select music. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find the recently selected music that has been recently selected, and can again select the recently selected music with a small number of operations on the operation means. Thereby, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the recently selected music piece again, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the special game.

[Appendix E12]
The said effect execution means (51) makes the said image display means (341) display all of the said upper limit number of the said selected music image (831) as a thing with respect to a different music, Additional note E7-Additional note E11 characterized by the above-mentioned. A gaming machine according to any of the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E12, since the selected music images do not include a plurality of images corresponding to the same music, even when the display number of the selected music images has an upper limit, the music corresponding to the upper limit is set. The selected music images corresponding to the number of the selected music are displayed. Therefore, when the player repeatedly selects the same music and wants to select a selected music other than that music, the player can easily find the already-selected music to be selected. As a result, the operation burden when the player selects the previously selected music piece again is reduced, so that the player can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix E13]
When the display number of the selected music image (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit number, the display number is insufficient for the upper limit number (for example, “1” to “3”). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes E7 to E12, wherein the unselected song image (833) is displayed as the song selected image (83) indicating that the song is the unselected song. .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E13, even when the number of already-selected music images to be displayed on the image display means is less than the upper limit, an unselected music image is displayed instead of the already-selected music image. Thereby, the specified number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix E14]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating the non-selected music among the plurality of music is further displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes E1 to E13.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E14, the player can distinguish and recognize the previously-selected music image that has been selected previously and the unselected music image that has not been previously selected. By operating the operation means while checking, it is possible to tentatively select an unselected song and display it as a tentatively selected song image. Therefore, even when selecting a non-selected song instead of the already-selected song, the player can select the non-selected song with a small number of operations on the operation unit and output the unselected song from the audio output unit.

[Appendix E15]
The rendering executing means (51), when displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), displays the temporarily selected music image (832) with the selected music image (831) and the unselected music image (831). The gaming machine according to attachment E14, wherein the gaming machine is displayed between the selected music image (833).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E15, at least at the stage where the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means, both the already-selected music image and the unselected music image are adjacent to the provisionally-selected music image. For this reason, the player changes the tentatively selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means, thereby selecting either the previously selected music that has been selected before or the unselected music that has not been previously selected. Even if the user selects a music piece, the target music piece can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output unit.

[Appendix E16]
When displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) sets the plurality of initial provisionally selected music pieces for the initial provisional selection music image (832) to be displayed first. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E15, wherein a selection is made from the unselected songs among the songs.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E16, the initial provisionally selected music piece is selected from the unselected music pieces, and the initial provisionally selected music piece that is the unselected music piece is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player. Can give an opportunity to communicate.

[Appendix E17]
When the tentatively selected song or the selected song is the already-selected song and the unselected song, the tentatively-selected song or the selected song is played from the different portion of the tentatively-selected song or the selected song. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E16, wherein the gaming machine outputs the output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E17, by performing a determination operation on the operation means in a state where the unselected music pieces are displayed as the temporarily selected music images, the unselected music pieces that have not been selected before can be replaced with the already selected music pieces. It is possible to output to the audio output means from a different part of the music than the case where it is selected. This allows the player to listen to the selected music from different parts when the selected music is selected and when the unselected music is selected, so that the player outputs the selected music and the unselected music. The user can enjoy the music in a different way than when the music is output.

[Appendix E18]
In the supplementary note E17, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the music from the music start portion of the selected music when the provisionally selected music is the selected music. The gaming machine described.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E18, the player can listen to the tentatively selected music piece from the music start portion when the tentatively selected music piece is the already-selected music piece, and can perform rusting when the temporarily selected music piece is an unselected music piece. You can listen from the part. Therefore, regarding the tentatively selected song, the previously selected song can be enjoyed from the start portion. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the music that has not been selected before from the climax part of the music that has the highest climax, the player determines whether or not the temporarily selected music is the music of his choice. It will be easier.

[Appendix E19]
The effect executing means (51), when the selected music piece is the selected music piece, causes the audio output means (26) to output the selected music piece from a music start portion, and the selected music piece is the unselected music piece. The gaming machine according to Supplementary note E17 or E18, wherein in some cases, the unselected music is output from the chorus portion to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E19, the player can listen to the selected music piece from the music start part when the selected music piece is the already selected music piece, and can start listening to the chorus part when the selected music piece is the unselected music piece. You can listen. Therefore, with respect to the selected music, the player can enjoy the music from the start part for the music selected before. On the other hand, the player can listen to music that has not been selected before from the climax part of the music that is the most exciting, so it is easy to determine whether the selected music this time is the music of his choice Become.

[Appendix E20]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
Display setting means (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the selected music image (831) in response to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by a player;
The effect executing means (51) includes:
A display setting screen which enables a display screen of the image display means (341) to be set in accordance with an operation on the operation means (21) by a player, whether or not to display the selected music image (831). (88, 98)
The display setting means (51) is configured to execute the setting operation by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is shifted to the display setting screen (88, 98). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes E3 to E13, wherein the display setting is performed in accordance with setting contents set by a player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E20, since it is possible to set whether to display the specific image included in the music selection image, the music selection image can be displayed on the image display means in a display mode according to the player's preference. it can. Thereby, the player can select the music to be output from the audio output means based on the music selection image in the display mode set by the player. Further, the player can select whether or not to display the selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, for example, when the music selection image includes the already-selected music image corresponding to the already-selected music selected by the previous player in the past, the player displays the music selection image that does not include the already-selected music image. be able to.

[Appendix E21]
A display setting storage unit (512) capable of storing display setting history information on a display setting history for the display setting;
The effect executing means (51) is provided as the display setting screen (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. ) To a display setting history screen (88) displaying a setting history image (881) corresponding to the display setting history information stored in
The display setting unit (51) is configured to perform a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the display setting history image (881) by the player when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88). The gaming machine according to attachment E20, wherein the display setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E21, when the display screen of the image display unit is the display setting history screen, the player performs the setting operation on the operation unit, thereby performing the same display setting as the past setting contents. Can be. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E22]
The gaming machine according to attachment E21, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the display setting history image (881) including an image indicating a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E22, by referring to the set time, for example, it is possible to distinguish between the display setting history of the player who has been playing before and the display setting history of the player itself, When there is a display setting history to be selected in its own display setting history, it is easy to give a prospect of selecting a desired display setting history. Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E23]
An output for making an output start setting for starting the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from any of a plurality of output start parts predetermined according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player. Further comprising start setting means (51);
The effect executing means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) enabling the output start setting in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The game according to any one of Supplementary notes E1 to E22, wherein, when an operation is performed, the output start setting for the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece is performed according to the setting content set by the player. Machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E23, the output start portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song can be set, so that the tentatively selected song or the selected song can be output from the audio output means from a portion that matches the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix E24]
The gaming machine according to attachment E23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E24, the player can cause the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece to be output from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from a portion that suits his or her taste. Here, the music start part or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. For this reason, the player selects whether the tentatively selected music or the selected music is the previously selected music by selecting the part for starting the output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the music start part and the chorus part. This makes it easy to determine whether a song has not been played or has not been heard before.

[Appendix E25]
Output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing output start setting history information on an output start setting history for the output start setting;
The effect executing means (51) is provided as the output start setting screen (87, 97) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). (512) The screen is shifted to an output start setting history screen (87) displaying an output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512),
The output start setting means (51) is configured to perform, when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), an operation for performing the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871) by a player. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E23 or E24, wherein, when performed, the output start setting having the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E25, when the display screen on the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation unit, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. Can be a start setting. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous settings, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E26]
The gaming machine according to attachment E25, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E26, by referring to the set time, for example, the output start setting history of the player who previously played the game and the output start setting history of the player itself can be distinguished. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it is easy to obtain a prospect of selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix F1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
The tune selection image (83) indicates that the tune is a tentatively selected tune that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a tune to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. The selected music is output to the audio output means (26) as a selected music,
Causing the audio output means (26) to start outputting the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece from a first part of a plurality of predetermined output start parts;
When satisfying a predetermined condition on condition that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the staging means, the voice output means (26) outputs Wherein the output of the tentatively selected song or the selected song is started from a second portion of the output start portion different from the first portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from the first portion, but in a gaming situation where the actual gaming situation is more advantageous to the player than the gaming situation suggested by the directing means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from a second part different from the first part. In other words, the player can output a tentatively selected song or a selected song from a second portion different from the first portion, so that the current game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means. You can get to know the situation. Therefore, the operation for provisionally selecting or selecting a music is not merely an act of temporarily selecting or selecting a music, but an actual game situation in a game situation more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means. It can be enjoyed as an act to confirm whether or not there is. Thereby, a motivation to temporarily select or select a music piece can be provided to the player, and the player can actively participate in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming state includes a first gaming state, a second gaming state in which a probability that the main control means (41) determines to shift the gaming state to the special gaming state is higher than the first gaming state, Including the special game state,
The special game state is a first special game state in which the game state is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game state, and the game state is changed to the second game state after the end of the special game state A second special game state to be shifted,
The effect executing means (51) is configured to determine that the game state suggested by the effect means is a first special game state and that the actual game state is the second special game state. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, wherein the selected music is output from the second portion to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note F2, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second special gaming state, the selected music piece is output from the second part. That is, when the player selects a song, the selected song is output from the second portion, so that the current special game state is the second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. You can get to know that. Therefore, the deciding operation for selecting a song is not merely an act of selecting a song, but an act of confirming whether the second special game state is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. Can be. Thereby, the player can be motivated to positively select a music piece, and the player can actively participate in the special game.

[Appendix F3]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to select the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from the plurality of music pieces as a music piece to be output by the audio output means (26), which has already been selected by a player. The gaming machine according to Supplementary note F1 or F2, wherein the audio output unit (26) outputs the tentatively selected tune or the selected tune from the second portion on condition that the tune is an unselected tune other than a tune. .

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note F3, the selected music piece is output from the second part on the condition that the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is an unselected music piece in the second special game state. That is, when the tentatively selected or selected unselected music is output from the second part, the actual game situation is more than the game situation suggested by the production means. It can be easily known that the game situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the operation of temporarily selecting or selecting a music piece can be enjoyed not as an act of simply temporarily selecting or selecting a music piece, but as an act of confirming whether or not a game situation is advantageous for the player. Thereby, the player can be motivated to actively select or select an unselected music piece and listen to the unselected music piece, thereby securing an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player.

[Appendix F4]
When the tentatively selected song or the selected song is the unselected song, the first portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a chorus portion, and the second portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song is The gaming machine according to supplementary note F3, wherein the gaming machine is a music start portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F4, while the first part is a rust part, the second part is a music start part that is clearly different from the first part, so that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second part. When output from the portion, a clear sense of incongruity can be given to the player. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F5]
When the tentatively selected song or the selected song is the unselected song, the first portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a song start portion and the second portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song. The gaming machine according to claim F3, wherein R is a rust portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F5, while the first part is a music start part, the second part is a chorus part that is clearly different from the first part, so that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second part. When output from the portion, a clear sense of incongruity can be given to the player. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F6]
The effect executing means (51) is provided on condition that the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece is a selected music piece that has already been selected by a player as a music piece to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or F2, wherein an audio output unit (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece from the second part.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note F6, even when the already-selected song is provisionally selected or selected, the temporarily-selected song or the selected song is output from the second portion. That is, when the player selects or selects the already-selected music, the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the second part, so that the actual gaming situation is more than the gaming situation suggested by the production means. It can be easily known that the game situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the operation of temporarily selecting or selecting an unselected music piece can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting a music piece, but as an act of confirming whether or not a game situation is advantageous to the player.

[Appendix F7]
When the tentatively selected song is the already-selected song, the tentatively selected song or the first portion of the selected song is a song start portion, and the tentatively selected song or the second portion of the selected song is a chorus portion. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F6, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F7, while the first part is the music start part, the second part is a chorus part that is clearly different from the first part, so that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second music. When output from the portion, a clear sense of incongruity can be given to the player. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F8]
When the selected music piece is the already selected music piece, the first part of the selected music piece is a continuation part of the temporarily selected music piece that has been output from the audio output means (26) at the timing when the determination operation is performed. The gaming machine according to attachment F6, wherein the second part of the selected music piece is a chorus part or a music start part.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F8, while the first part is a continuation part of the selected music piece, the second music piece is a chorus part or a music start part that is clearly different from the first music piece. When output from the second portion, a clear sense of incongruity can be given to the player. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F9]
The effect execution means (51) is configured to display the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341) as the temporary selection music, and to initially display the temporary selection music image (832) as the temporary selection music image (832). Any one of the supplementary notes F1 to F8, wherein the audio output means (26) outputs the temporarily selected music piece from the second portion, provided that the music piece image (832) is an initial provisionally selected music piece. The gaming machine described.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F9, even when the player does not perform any operation on the operation unit, the initial temporarily selected music is output from the second portion when the music selection image is displayed on the image display means. Can be done. Therefore, even a player who does not temporarily select or select a music piece can be informed that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means.

[Appendix F10]
The special game state is a third special game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R certain jackpot game state) and a fourth special game state (16R certain jackpot game state) in which the game time is longer than the third special game state. Including
The effect executing means (51) includes:
In the third special game state, the tentatively selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion to the audio output means (26),
In the fourth special game state, the provisionally selected music piece is provided on condition that a suggestion effect indicating the third special game state is being executed as an effect to be executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.). Alternatively, the gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, wherein the selected music is output from the second portion to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10, the provisionally selected song or the selected song is in the second special game condition on the condition that the suggestion effect indicating the third special game state is being performed in the fourth special game state. Output from That is, the player selects the tentatively selected song or the selected song from the second portion, so that the current special game state is the fourth special game state having a longer game time than the third special game state, It is possible to know that the expected value of the game value that can be obtained is high. Therefore, the player can enjoy the act of tentatively selecting or selecting a song as an act of confirming whether or not the fourth special game state in which the expected value of the game value that can be acquired from the third special game state is higher. it can.

[Appendix F11]
When the gaming state is the fourth special gaming state, the tentatively selected music or the first part of the selected music is a music start part, and the tentatively selected music or the second part of the selected music is a chorus part. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10, wherein:

[Appendix F12]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10 or F11, wherein when the gaming state is the third special gaming state, the first part of the tentatively selected music piece is a chorus part.

[Appendix F13]
When the gaming state is the third special gaming state, the first part of the selected music piece is a continuation of the part output from the audio output means (26) at the timing when the determination operation is performed. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F10 or supplementary note F11, characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes F11 to F13, in the fourth special gaming state, the temporarily selected music piece or the first part of the selected music piece is the music start part, while the provisionally selected music piece or the second part of the selected music piece is not changed. By being a chorus part that is clearly different from the first part, it is possible to give a clear sense of incongruity to the player when the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the second part. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F14]
The said performance performing means (51) determines whether or not to output the selected music from the second part by a lottery performed in response to the determination operation of the operating means by the player as a trigger. To gaming machine according to any of supplementary notes F13.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F14, a gaming state in which the actual gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, the normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) gaming state) suggested by the rendering means (for example, the probable variable jackpot gaming state) In the case of (1), the inconsistency of the output start portion of the selected music can be generated by the simple operation of the lottery by the determination operation for selecting the music.

[Appendix F15]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note F14, wherein a predetermined upper limit is provided for the number of times of the lottery per execution of the special game.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F15, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly selecting a music piece in one special game.

[Appendix F16]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
Enabling selection of music to be output by the audio output means (26) within a predetermined selection validity period in the special game state;
The condition that the promotion effect that clearly indicates that the actual game situation is a game situation more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means is scheduled to be performed after the selection validity period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F15, wherein the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece from the second part.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F16, when the music is provisionally selected or selected within the selection validity period, the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the second portion, which is suggested by the production means. It is possible to know in advance that a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix G1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect execution means (51) is a music selection operation that indicates or indicates the gaming state on condition that a determination operation on the operation means (21) is performed by a player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by causing the effect means (26, 341 and the like) to execute effects (suggested effects 1 to 8, and fixed effects 1 to 4).

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, a music selection operation effect indicating or indicating a gaming state is performed by a player's operation for selecting a piece of music to determine an operation means. Therefore, the player can enjoy the decision operation for selecting the music as an act for confirming the game state based on the music selection operation effect, instead of the act of simply selecting the music. Thereby, the player can be motivated to actively select a music piece, and can actively participate in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix G2]
The special game state includes a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state), and a second special game state (5R certain variable jackpot game state, 16R certain variable jackpot game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. ),
In the music selection operation effect, an expectation degree suggesting effect (suggesting effect 1 to suggesting effect 8) indicating the expectation degree that the gaming state is the second gaming state, or the gaming state is the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, wherein the gaming machine is a defined performance (determined performances 1 to 4) that clearly indicates the fact.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G2, an expectation degree suggestion effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the gaming state is the second special gaming state, or a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the gaming state is the second special gaming state. By performing the setting to be executed, an expectation degree suggestion effect or a fixed effect is executed by the player's deciding operation on the operation means for selecting the music. Therefore, the deciding operation for selecting the music is not merely an act of selecting the music, but an act of confirming the degree of expectation of being in the second special game state based on the expected degree suggestive effect or the determined effect. You can enjoy as.
On the other hand, by performing the setting not to execute the expected degree suggestive effect or the confirmed effect, the expected degree suggestive effect or the determined effect is not executed even if the determination operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the special game while expecting that the game state is the second special game state without being disappointed with the content of the music selection operation effect.

[Appendix G3]
The effect executing means (51) is provided on condition that the selected music piece is an unselected music piece other than the already selected music piece that has already been selected by the player as the music piece to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1 or G2, wherein the gaming machine (26, 341 or the like) executes a song selection operation effect (suggested effect 1 to suggestive effect 8, fixed effect 1 to 4).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G3, since the music selection operation effect is executed on condition that the unselected music is selected, the player who desires to execute the music selection operation effect is not actively given to the player. The selected music can be selected. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to widely listen to various songs prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

[Appendix G4]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to perform the continuous hit operation or the long press operation on the operation means (21) when selecting a music from the music selection image, on condition that the effect means (26) is selected. , 341 etc.) to execute the music selection operation effect, the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G3.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G4, the expectation that the gaming state is the second special gaming state by performing a continuous hit operation or a long press operation on the operation means by the player when selecting a music piece A music selection operation effect such as an effect indicating a degree of expectation is suggested. Therefore, the act of selecting music is not limited to music selection, and the continuous playing operation or long-pressing operation is performed to determine the degree of expectation of the second special game state based on a music selection operation effect such as an effect degree suggestive effect effect. It can also be enjoyed as an act to confirm. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music.

[Appendix G5]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20),
The effect executing means (51) includes:
An instruction image (84) for instructing the first operation means (21) as the operation means (20, 21) operated by a player to select a music from the music selection image (83) is displayed on the music selection image. (83) and displayed on the image display means (341),
On the condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the determination operation has been performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84), the music selection operation effect is executed by the effect device. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is operated.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G5, it is expected that the gaming state is the second special gaming state by performing the deciding operation on the operating unit different from the operating unit instructed to select the music. A music selection operation effect such as an expectation effect effect that suggests a degree is executed. Therefore, the act of selecting a song is not limited to song selection, and the second special game state is established based on a song selection operation effect such as an effect indicating a degree of expectation by performing an operation on an operation device different from the instructed operation device. It can also be enjoyed as an act to confirm the degree of expectation of things. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music.

[Appendix G6]
The effect execution means (51) is configured to perform the music selection operation effect (the suggestion effects 1 to 2) when the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) during a predetermined selection validity period in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G1 to G5, wherein the suggesting effect 8, the fixed effects 1 to 4) are executed by the effect means (26, 341 or the like).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G6, a music selection operation effect such as an effect indicating a degree of expectation is performed by performing a determination operation for music selection in a predetermined period, so that the music selection operation is performed without sufficiently listening to the selected music. Unnecessary repetition of music selection for confirming whether or not an operation effect is executed can be suppressed.

[Appendix G7]
The effect execution means (51) is configured to perform the music selection operation effect (the suggestion effect 1 to the suggestion effect 8) when the number of times the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G1 to G6, wherein the effect means (26, 341 or the like) executes fixed effects 1 to 4).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G7, since the number of times the determination operation for selecting the music is performed is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the music selection operation effect is performed, and therefore, without sufficiently listening to the selected music, Unnecessary repetition of music selection for checking whether or not the selection operation effect is executed can be suppressed.

[Appendix G8]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
Further comprising an effect execution setting means (51) for setting an effect execution setting as to whether the effect means (341 or the like) executes the music selection operation effect,
The effect execution means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting in response to an operation performed by the player on the operation means (21). , 99)
The effect execution setting means (51) performs an operation for performing the effect execution setting by a player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89, 99). The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G1 to G7, wherein when the game is performed, the effect execution setting for the music selection operation effect is performed in accordance with the setting content set by the player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G8, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the music selection operation effect, so that the music selection operation effect can be executed according to the preference of the player. This allows the player to enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a manner that suits him.

[Appendix G9]
Further comprising effect execution setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information relating to effect execution setting history for the effect execution setting,
The effect execution means (51) is used as the effect execution setting screen (89, 99) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (512) The display is shifted to an effect execution setting history screen (89) displaying a setting history image (891) corresponding to the effect execution setting history information stored in (512),
The effect execution setting means (51) performs a setting operation for performing the effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history image (891) by a player when the display screen is the effect execution setting history screen (89). The game machine described in Supplementary Note G8, wherein when the game is performed, the effect execution setting having the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note G9, when the player performs a setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the effect execution setting history screen, an effect having the same content as the past effect execution setting is performed. Execution settings can be made. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix G10]
The gaming machine according to attachment G9, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image indicating a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89). .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G10, the player can distinguish between the effect execution setting history of the player who previously played the game and his or her own effect execution setting history by referring to the set time. Also, when there is an effect execution setting history to be selected in the own effect execution setting history, it is easy to give a possibility of selecting a desired effect execution setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix H1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
A game execution means (37) for executing a game in accordance with the result of the determination by the main control means (41);
Holding means (41) for holding the right to execute a game by the game execution means (37) up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Holding storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the held game held by the holding means (41);
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music from the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes, among the determination results for the reserved game stored in the reserved storage means (412), those for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state after execution of the reserved game. In this case, after the execution of the reserved game, the determination result for the reserved game stored in the reserved storage means (412) is provided on condition that a decision operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player. A special effect (determined effect 2 and finalized effect 4) indicating or explicitly indicating that the game state is shifted to the special game state is executed by the effect means (26, 341 etc.). Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, by performing a determination operation on the operating means by the player for selecting a music, a so-called hold series of shifting the game state to the special game state after execution of the hold game is performed. The special effects shown can be performed. Therefore, the determination operation for selecting a music piece can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting a music piece but as an action for confirming whether or not a held extended cottage is to be executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix H2]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to perform the continuous hit operation or the long press operation on the operation means (21) when selecting a music from the music selection image, on condition that the effect means (26) is selected. 341), the special effects (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 4) are executed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2, when a song is selected, a continuous hit operation or a long press operation is performed on the operation unit by the player, so that the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state after the execution of the reserved game. , That is, a special effect indicating that a so-called reservation series is performed. Therefore, the act of selecting music can be enjoyed not only as a music selection but also as an act for confirming whether or not a held extended villa is executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music.

[Appendix H3]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20),
The effect executing means (51) includes:
An instruction image (84) for instructing the first operation means (21) as the operation means (20, 21) operated by a player to select a music from the music selection image (83) is displayed on the music selection image. (83) and displayed on the image display means (341),
On the condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the determination operation has been performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84), the music selection operation effect is executed by the effect device. The gaming machine according to attachment H1 or H2, wherein

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note H3, when the deciding operation is performed on an operation unit different from the operation unit instructed to select a music, the gaming state is changed to the special state after the execution of the reserved game. A special effect indicating that a so-called reservation extended villa to be shifted to a game state is performed may be executed. Therefore, the act of selecting music can be enjoyed not only as a music selection but also as an act for confirming whether or not a held extended villa is executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix H4]
The effect execution means (51) causes the effect means (26, 341 etc.) to execute the special effects (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 4) on condition that the selected music piece is the unselected music piece. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes H1 to H3, characterized by features.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4, the special effect is executed on condition that the unselected song is selected. Therefore, the player who wants to execute the special effect is actively given the unselected song. Can be selected. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to widely listen to various songs prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

[Appendix H5]
The effect executing means (51) performs the special effect on the condition that the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) during a predetermined period in the special game state. 26, 341). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H4.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H5, the special effect is performed on condition that the determination operation for the selection of the music is performed in the predetermined period, so that the special effect is performed without sufficiently listening to the selected music. Unnecessary repetition of music selection for confirming whether or not the music can be suppressed can be suppressed.

[Appendix H6]
The effect executing means (51) performs the special effect on the condition that the number of times the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. 341), the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H5.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note H6, the special effect is performed on the condition that the number of times the determination operation for selecting the music is performed is equal to or less than the predetermined number, so that the selected music is not sufficiently listened to. In addition, it is possible to suppress unnecessary selection of music pieces for checking whether or not a special effect is performed.

[Appendix H7]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
Further comprising an effect execution setting means (51) for setting an effect execution setting for causing the effect means (341 or the like) to execute the special effect;
The effect execution means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting in response to an operation performed by the player on the operation means (21). , 99)
The effect execution setting means (51) performs an operation for performing the effect execution setting by a player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89, 99). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes H1 to H6, wherein when the game is performed, the effect execution setting for the special effect is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the special effect, so that the special effect can be executed according to the preference of the player. This allows the player to enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a manner that suits him.

[Appendix H8]
Further comprising effect execution setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information relating to a setting history for the effect execution setting,
The effect execution means (51) is used as the effect execution setting screen (89, 99) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. A transition is made to an effect execution setting history screen (89) displaying a setting history image (891) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
The effect execution setting means (51) performs a setting operation for performing the effect execution setting based on the setting history image (891) by the player when the display screen shifts to the effect execution setting history screen (89). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, wherein, when performed, the effect execution setting with the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note H8, the player performs the setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the effect execution setting history screen, thereby producing the same effect as the past effect execution setting. Execution settings can be made. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix H9]
The gaming machine according to attachment H8, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image indicating a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89). .

  According to the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H9, by referring to the set time, for example, it is possible to distinguish between the effect execution setting history of the player who previously played and the effect execution setting history of the player himself. Also, when there is an effect execution setting history to be selected in the own effect execution setting history, it is easy to give a possibility of selecting a desired effect execution setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix I1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether to shift the game state to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
A new song adding means (51) for adding a new song to the plurality of songs when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
Temporarily indicating that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by a player's determination operation on the operation means (21) for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying an image including the selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the deciding operation is performed, the music temporarily selected is output from the audio output means (26) as a selected music,
When the new music piece is added to the plurality of music pieces by the new music piece adding means (51), the initial provisional selection for the initial provisionally selected music image (832) displayed first as the provisionally selected music piece image (832) A gaming machine wherein the new music piece is selected as a music piece, and the image display means (341) displays the initial provisionally selected music piece image (832).

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note I1, when a new song is added to a plurality of songs that can be output from the audio output unit by the new song adding unit, an image corresponding to the new song is displayed as an initial temporarily selected song image. You. In this way, the image corresponding to the newly opened music is displayed on the image display means as the initial temporarily selected music image, so that the newly opened music can be easily selected.

[Appendix I2]
The effect executing means (51), when displaying an image corresponding to the new music on the image display means (341) as the initial tentatively selected music image (832), causes the audio output means (26) to output the new music. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, wherein the gaming machine outputs music.

  According to the gaming machine according to the supplementary note I2, when an image corresponding to the new music is displayed on the image display means as the initial temporarily selected music image, the new music is output from the sound output means. As described above, when the image corresponding to the initial provisionally selected music image is displayed on the image display means, the new music is output from the sound output means, so that the player can listen to the new music every time a music is added. Is secured. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the new music from being buried in a plurality of music pieces that can be selected by the player without being heard by the player.

[Appendix I3]
The game according to attachment I2, wherein, when the initial tentatively selected music piece is the new music piece, the effect execution means (51) outputs the chorus portion of the new music piece to the audio output means (26). Machine.

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note I3, when the initial temporarily selected music piece is a new music piece, the new music piece is output from the chorus portion. Here, the chorus part is a characteristic part compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. Therefore, the player can hear a characteristic portion of the new music when a new music is added by outputting the new music from the chorus portion. This makes it easier for the player to determine whether the newly added music is a favorite music.

[Appendix I4]
When the new song is added to the plurality of songs by the new song adding unit (51) due to satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the effect execution unit (51) arrives first after the new song is added. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I3, wherein an image for the new song is displayed on the image display means (341) as the initial tentatively selected song image during the song selection valid period.

  According to the gaming machine according to the supplementary note I4, an image corresponding to the new music is displayed as an initial temporarily selected music image in the image display means during the music selection validity period that first arrives after the new music is added. In this way, the initial tentatively selected music image for the new music is displayed in the music selection validity period that first arrives after the new music is added, so that the new music is added and the new music is selected in the next music selection validity period that comes in. It becomes possible to choose. Thereby, the player can listen to the new music at the fastest timing after the new music is added.

[Appendix I5]
The plurality of songs include a selected song that has already been selected by the player as a song to be output by the audio output means (26), and an unselected song other than the selected song,
The performance executing means (51), when there is no addition of the new music between the end of the previous music selection effective period and the start of the current music selection effective period, deletes the initial provisionally selected music into the unselected music. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I4, wherein the gaming machine is selected from the selected music pieces.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I5, if there is no new song added between the end of the previous song selection effective period and the start of the current song selection effective period, the initial provisionally selected song starts from the unselected song. The initially tentatively selected tune that has been selected and that has not been selected is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player. Can give an opportunity to communicate.

[Appendix I6]
When the effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display an image for the new music as the initial tentatively selected music image (832), the initial tentatively selected music image (832) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I5, further comprising displaying an additional image (839) that explicitly or suggests that the following is true.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note I6, when an image corresponding to the new music is displayed on the image display means as the initial provisionally selected music image, an additional image that indicates or suggests that the initial provisionally selected music image is a new music is displayed. You. By explicitly or suggesting that the music is a new music, the player can easily grasp that the music is a new music. This makes it easier for players who are interested in the new music to select a new music, so that the new music is not buried in the music list without being heard by the player. Is suppressed.

[Appendix I7]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the additional image (839) during a period from the start to the end of the music selection validity period that first arrives after the new music is added. The gaming machine according to attachment I6, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I7, the additional image is displayed on the image display means during a period from the start to the end of the first valid song selection period after the new song is added. By displaying the additional image in the period from the start to the end of the first valid song selection period after the new song is added, the new song is selected in the valid song selection period. Can also grasp that the music is a new music, it is easy to provisionally select or select a new music again.

[Appendix I8]
The effect execution means (51) displays the additional image on the image display means (341) from the start of the first valid song selection period after the new music piece is added until the new music piece is selected by the player. (839) The gaming machine according to attachment I6, wherein the gaming machine displays (839).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I8, the additional image is displayed on the image display means from the start of the first music selection valid period that arrives after the new music is added until the new music is selected. As described above, the additional image is displayed during the period from the start of the music selection valid period to the selection of the new music, so that the additional image is displayed until the new music is output as the selected music. This prevents unnecessary images from being displayed even after a new music piece is selected by the player.

[Appendix I9]
The effect executing means (51) displays the additional image on the image display means (341) during a music selection effective period that arrives after the new music is added first and before the new music is added next. (839) The gaming machine according to attachment I6, wherein the gaming machine displays (839).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I9, the additional image is displayed on the image display means during a music selection valid period that arrives between the time when a new music piece is added first and the time when a new music piece is next added. In this way, the additional image is displayed during the music selection valid period that arrives between the time when the new music is added first and the time when the new music is next added, so that the additional image is always displayed for the latest additional music. Is displayed. As a result, the player can always keep track of the latest added music, so even for songs that were added during the previous music selection validity period but were not selected by the player, the music selection validity period after the new music addition was added. Next, selection can be made based on the additional image until a new song is added. That is, the player can easily search for additional music based on the additional image when he or she wants to listen to the additional music later, even if the music is not normally listenable, even if it is not the music selection validity period in which the music was added. .

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I9, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the special game.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I10, the predetermined condition for adding a new song is satisfied during execution of the special game. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game in this manner, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the special game in which the player's interest tends to decrease.

[Appendix I11]
The gaming machine according to attachment I10, wherein the predetermined condition is to clear a game executed in the special game.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I11, the predetermined condition for adding a new song as a song that can be output by the player from the audio output unit is to clear a game executed in a special game. By clearing the game executed in the special game in this way, a new song is added, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the jackpot game in which the player's interest tends to decrease, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Is improved. In addition, since the predetermined condition is that the game is clear, it is easy to attract the player's interest, so that the interest of the game is further improved.

[Appendix I12]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I11, wherein the new music piece is excluded from the plurality of music pieces when power is turned on or off.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note I12, when the power is turned on or off, a new music piece is excluded from a plurality of music pieces that can be selected by the player. In this way, the new music is removed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or off, so that the new music can be listened to as music limited to that day. As a result, the music added by the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is given to the player as a privilege only for the day, for example, when the player on the next day listens to the music newly added by the player on the previous day without any difficulty. Can be eliminated.

[Appendix I13]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to add the first music as the new music to the plurality of music by the new music adding means (51) when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and then, as the new music, When a second song different from the first song is added, an image including the initial tentatively selected song image (832) for the second song and an image from which the first song can be selected is used as the song selection image (83). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes I1 to I12, wherein the gaming machine displays the image on the image display means (341).

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note I13, when the second music is added after the first music is added, in addition to the initial temporarily selected music image for the second music that is the new music added this time, the first music is added. Is displayed on the image display means so that the first music piece, which is the new music piece added to the first music piece, can be selected. Therefore, the player can select not only the new song (second song) added this time but also the new song (first song) added earlier, and the new song (first song) added earlier. Can be output from the audio output means. Thereby, even when a new music piece is added, it is possible to listen to a new music piece added in the past.

[Appendix I14]
The said effect execution means (51) displays the image which can select the said 1st music at the position adjacent to the said initial provisionally selected music image (832) with respect to the said 2nd music, Additional description I13 characterized by the above-mentioned. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine related to the appendix I14, when the second music is added after the first music is added, in addition to the initial provisionally selected music image for the second music that is the newly added music, the first music is added. Is displayed at a position adjacent to the initial tentatively-selected music image. Therefore, when a new music piece (second music piece) is added, the player can easily grasp the newly added music piece (first music piece). Thus, when the player wishes to listen to a new song that has been previously added and remains unselected later, the previously added song can be easily selected and output from the audio output unit. Will be possible.
[Appendix I15]
The plurality of songs include a selected song that has already been selected by the player as a song to be output by the audio output means (26), and an unselected song other than the selected song,
The effect executing means (51) includes, as the music selection image (83), at least one unselected music image (833) for the unselected music adjacent to the initial provisionally selected music image (832) for the second music. The gaming machine according to attachment I14, wherein the gaming machine is displayed at a position where the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment I15, at least one unselected song image (833) for the unselected song is displayed at a position adjacent to the initial provisionally selected song image (832) for the second song that is a newly added song. You. That is, in the image display means, both an image enabling the selection of the first music piece, which is a new music piece added earlier, and an unselected music piece image are arranged at positions adjacent to the initial provisionally selected music piece image. For example, an image that allows the user to select the first song that is a new song added earlier, an initial temporarily selected song image, and an unselected song image are arranged in this order. Therefore, it becomes easy to select any of the previously added new song, the newly added song, and the unselected song.

[Appendix J1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether to shift the game state to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
A new song adding means (51) for adding a new song to the plurality of songs when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
As the music selection image (83), a selected music image (831) indicating that the music has already been selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26); An image including an unselected music image (833) indicating that the music is an unselected music other than the selected music, is displayed on the image display means (341);
When the new song is added to the plurality of songs by the new song adding unit (51), the new song is displayed on the image display unit (341) as the unselected song image (833). A gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, when a new song is added to a plurality of songs, an unselected song image for the new song is displayed in the song selection image. When a new song is added as described above, the new song is displayed as an unselected song image in the song selection image, so that the new song is selected as the initial temporarily selected song and the new song is output from the song output unit. Can be suppressed. This makes it possible to provide a pleasure of temporarily selecting or selecting a new music piece according to the player's intention, while preventing a new music piece from being output against the intention of the player.

[Appendix J2]
When the new song is added to the plurality of songs by the new song adding unit (51) due to satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the effect execution unit (51) arrives first after the new song is added. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, wherein an image for the new song is displayed on the image display means (341) as the unselected song image (833) during the song selection valid period.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note J2, an image corresponding to the new song is displayed as an unselected song image in the image display means during the first song selection valid period after the new song is added. In this way, by displaying the unselected song image for the new song in the song arrival validity period that first arrives after the new song is added, the new song can be displayed in the song arrival validity period that first arrives after the new song is added. It becomes possible to choose. Thereby, the player can listen to the new music at the fastest timing after the new music is added.

[Appendix J3]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
Temporarily indicating that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by a player's determination operation on the operation means (21) for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying an image further including the selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
In the initial music selection image (83) that is the music selection image (83) displayed first, the unselected music image (833) for the new music is replaced with the unselected music image (833). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1 or J2, wherein the gaming machine is displayed at a position closest to the initial temporarily selected music image (832) displayed first as the temporarily selected music image (832).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J3, the unselected music image for the new music in the initial music selection image is displayed at a position closest to the initial provisionally selected music image. As described above, the unselected music image corresponding to the new music is arranged at a position closest to the initial tentatively selected music image in the initial music selection image, so that the player can easily recognize that the new music has been added. At the same time, the number of operations for provisionally selecting and selecting a new open music is minimized, so that operations for provisionally selecting and selecting a new music are reduced.

[Appendix J4]
The effect executing means (51), when the tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), outputs the music for the tentatively selected music image (832) to the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to attachment J3, wherein the game machine outputs the information.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J4, the temporarily selected music is output from the audio output unit. Therefore, when a new song is provisionally selected, the new song can be output from the audio output unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the newly added music from being buried in the music list without being heard by the player.

[Appendix J5]
When displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) includes the new music in the image for the new music in the music selection image (83). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes J1 to J4, wherein an additional image that indicates or suggests that the game machine is displayed is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note J5, when an image corresponding to the new music is displayed on the image display means in the music selection image, an additional image that explicitly or suggests that the image corresponds to the new music is displayed. By explicitly or suggesting that the music is a new music, the player can easily grasp that the music is a new music. This makes it easier for players who are interested in the new music to select a new music, so that the new music is not buried in the music list without being heard by the player. Is suppressed.

[Appendix J6]
The effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the additional image during a period from the start to the end of the first valid music selection period after the new music is added. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J5.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J6, the additional image is displayed on the image display means during a period from the start to the end of the music selection effective period that first arrives after the new music is added. Since the additional image is displayed during the period from the start to the end of the first valid song selection period after the new song is added, the new song is temporarily selected or selected during the valid song selection period. Even so, it can be grasped that the song is a new song, so that it becomes easy to temporarily select or select the new song again.

[Appendix J7]
The effect execution means (51) displays the additional image on the image display means (341) from the start of the first valid song selection period after the new music piece is added until the new music piece is selected by the player. (839) The gaming machine according to attachment J5, wherein the gaming machine displays (839).

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note J7, the additional image is displayed on the image display means from the start of the first valid song selection period after the new song is added until the new song is selected. As described above, the additional image is displayed during the period from the start of the music selection valid period to the selection of the new music, so that the additional image is displayed until the new music is output as the selected music. This prevents unnecessary images from being displayed even after a new music piece is selected by the player.

[Appendix J8]
The effect executing means (51) displays the additional image on the image display means (341) during a music selection effective period that arrives after the new music is added first and before the new music is added next. (839) The gaming machine according to attachment J5, wherein the gaming machine displays (839).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J8, the additional image is displayed on the image display means during the music selection valid period that arrives between the time when a new music piece is added first and the time when a new music piece is next added. In this way, the additional image is displayed during the music selection valid period that arrives between the time when the new music is added first and the time when the new music is next added, so that the additional image is always displayed for the latest additional music. Is displayed. As a result, the player can always keep track of the latest added music, so even for songs that were added during the previous music selection validity period but were not selected by the player, the music selection validity period after the new music addition was added. Next, selection can be made based on the additional image until a new song is added. That is, the player can easily search for additional music based on the additional image when he or she wants to listen to the additional music later, even if the music is not normally listenable, even if it is not the music selection validity period in which the music was added. .

[Appendix J9]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to J8, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the special game.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J9, the predetermined condition for adding a new music piece is satisfied during execution of the special game. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game in this manner, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the special game in which the player's interest tends to decrease.

[Appendix J10]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J9, wherein the predetermined condition is to clear a game executed in the special game.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10, the predetermined condition that a new song is added as a song that can be output by the player from the sound output means is to clear the game executed in the special game. By clearing the game executed in the special game in this way, a new song is added, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the jackpot game in which the player's interest tends to decrease, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Is improved. In addition, since the predetermined condition is that the game is clear, it is easy to attract the player's interest, so that the interest of the game is further improved.

[Appendix J11]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes J1 to J10, wherein the new music piece is excluded from the plurality of music pieces when power is turned on or off.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note J11, when the power is turned on or off, a new song is excluded from a plurality of songs that can be selected by the player. In this way, the new music is removed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or off, so that the new music can be listened to as music limited to that day. As a result, the music added by the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is given to the player as a privilege only for the day, for example, when the player on the next day listens to the music newly added by the player on the previous day without any difficulty. Can be eliminated.

[Appendix K1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether to shift the game state to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
In a music selection valid period in which a music to be output by the audio output means (26) can be selected from the plurality of music, the music already selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26) as the music selection image (83). A selected music image (831) indicating that the selected music has been selected, and an unselected music image (833) indicating that the music is an unselected music other than the selected music. Is displayed on the image display means (341), and
When a plurality of music selections are made by the player in the same music selection validity period, the last selected music that is selected last in the music selection validity period and the midway selection music other than the final selection music are displayed in the already-selected music image. (831) A gaming machine characterized by being displayed as (831).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K1, when a plurality of music pieces are selected by the player during the same music selection validity period, the last selected music piece and the halfway selected music piece are displayed as the already-selected music piece images. When a plurality of music selections can be made in this way, not only the last selected music but also the midway selection music is displayed as the already-selected music image, so that the player can select the music selected during the music selection valid period. Since it is possible to confirm and select based on the display mode of the selected image, it is easy to select a previously selected halfway-selected song.

[Appendix K2]
The effect executing means (51) displays the selected music image (831) for two or more upper limit selected music pieces in the image display means (51) when a plurality of music pieces are selected in the same music selection valid period. 341) The gaming machine according to supplementary note K1, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K2, when a plurality of music pieces are selected in the same music selection valid period, two or more upper limit number of selected music pieces are displayed as the already-selected music image. In this way, by displaying two or more upper limit number of the selected music images in the same music selection valid period, the ratio of the selected music images in the music selection images can be defined. This prevents the music selection image from being filled with the selected music images, or prevents the number ratio of the selected music selection images in the music selection images from becoming unnecessarily large. Can be displayed at an appropriate numerical ratio.

[Appendix K3]
The effect execution means (51), when a song exceeding the upper limit number is selected in the same song selection validity period, the selected song image (831) for the upper limit number of selected songs with new song selection date and time. The gaming machine according to supplementary note K2, wherein the game is displayed on an image display means (341).

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note K3, when music pieces exceeding the upper limit number are selected in the same music selection validity period, the selected music image corresponding to the new upper limit number of selected music pieces at the music selection date and time is displayed. Here, when a plurality of music selections are made during the same music selection validity period, there is a high possibility that the music with the new music selection date and time is the music that the player prefers. Therefore, when a song exceeding the upper limit number is selected in the same song selection validity period, the selected song image for the new upper limit number of selected songs at the song selection date and time is displayed, so that the songs close to the player's preference are already selected. It can be displayed as a selected music image.

[Appendix K4]
When a music piece is selected by the player during the same music selection validity period, the effect execution means (51) displays the selected music image (831) for the music piece on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K2 or K3, wherein, when there is, the selected song image (831) for the same song is restricted from being displayed on the image display means (341) in an overlapping manner.

[Appendix K5]
When a music piece is selected by the player during the same music selection validity period, the effect execution means (51) displays the selected music image (831) for the music piece on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to claim K4, wherein, when there is, the selected music image (831) for the same selected music as the music whose selection date is older is deleted from the image display means (341).

[Appendix K6]
When a music piece is selected by the player during the same music selection validity period, the effect execution means (51) displays the selected music image (831) for the music piece on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to claim K4, wherein the selected music image (831) for the same selected music as the new music with the new selected date and time is not displayed on the image display means (341).

  According to the gaming machines of Supplementary Note K4 to Supplementary Note K6, when a music piece is selected by the player in the same music selection validity period, when a selected music image for the music piece is displayed on the image display means, It is possible to prevent the already-selected tune image for the same tune from being displayed redundantly as the tune image, and to display the already-selected tune images for more types of tunes.

[Appendix K7]
A selected song storage means (51) capable of storing at least two selected songs selected in the same song selection validity period;
A selected song updating unit (51) for updating the selected song stored in the selected song storage unit (51) when the player selects a song during the same song selection valid period;
A selected music storage means (51) capable of storing a specified number of the selected music pieces set to be equal to or more than the upper limit number;
A selected song updating unit (51) for updating the selected song stored in the selected song storage unit (51) based on the selected song stored in the selected song storage unit (51);
Further comprising
The effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the selected music image (831) for the selected music stored in the selected music storage means (51). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K1.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K7, when a plurality of music pieces are selected in the same music piece selection effective period, two or more upper limit number of selected music pieces are displayed as the already-selected music piece images. In this way, by displaying two or more upper limit number of the selected music images in the same music selection valid period, the ratio of the selected music images in the music selection images can be defined. This prevents the music selection image from being filled with the selected music images, or prevents the number ratio of the selected music selection images in the music selection images from becoming unnecessarily large. Can be displayed at an appropriate numerical ratio.

[Appendix K8]
The selected song updating means (51) stores, in the selected song validity period, the selected music pieces of the upper limit number new in the music piece selection date and time in the selected music piece storing means (51) when the music pieces exceeding the upper limit number are selected. The gaming machine according to attachment K7, wherein the gaming machine is stored.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment K8, when a song exceeding the upper limit is selected in the same song selection validity period, the new upper limit number of selected songs of the song selection date and time are stored. By storing the new upper limit number of selected music pieces of the music selection date and time in this way, the selected music image corresponding to the new upper limit number of selected music pieces of the music selection date and time is displayed. Here, when a plurality of music selections are made during the same music selection validity period, there is a high possibility that the music with the new music selection date and time is the music that the player prefers. Therefore, when a song exceeding the upper limit number is selected in the same song selection validity period, the selected song image for the new upper limit number of selected songs at the song selection date and time is displayed, so that the songs close to the player's preference are already selected. It can be displayed as a selected music image.

[Appendix K9]
The selected song updating unit (51) is configured to, when a song is selected by the player during the same song selection valid period, store the selected song as the selected song in the selected song storage unit (51); The gaming machine according to attachment K7, wherein the same music is restricted from being repeatedly stored in the selected music storage means (51).

[Appendix K10]
The selected song updating unit (51) is configured to, when a song is selected by the player during the same song selection valid period, store the selected song as the selected song in the selected song storage unit (51); The selected tune stored in the selected tune storage means (51) and having the same selected date and time as the old one is deleted, and the selected tune is stored in the selected tune storage means (51) as a selected tune. The gaming machine according to K9.

[Appendix K11]
The game according to supplementary note K9, wherein the selected music updating means (51) does not update the selected music storing means (51) when a music is selected by the player during the same music selection validity period. Machine.

  According to the gaming machines of Supplementary Notes K9 to K11, it is restricted that the same music piece is redundantly stored in the selected music piece storage means. In this way, by restricting the same music piece from being redundantly stored in the selected music piece storage means, it is possible to prevent an image of the same music piece from being displayed as the already-selected music piece image. It is possible to display the type of the selected music image.

[Appendix K12]
The selected music updating means (51) updates the selected music stored in the selected music storing means (51) after the elapse of the music selection validity period, wherein the selected music is updated. The gaming machine described in Crab.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment K12, the selected music storage unit is updated after the elapse of the music selection validity period. In this way, the selected music storage means is updated after the elapse of the music selection validity period, so that the selected music image in the next music selection validity period is selected based on the latest selection history of the player in the previous music selection validity period. Music can be displayed. This makes it possible to display the already-selected music image reflecting the player's preference.

[Appendix K13]
The said selected music updating means (51) deletes the said selected music memorize | stored in the said selected music storage means (51), after updating the said selected music storing means (51), The supplementary note K12 characterized by the above-mentioned. Gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K13, the selected music stored in the selected music storage unit after updating the selected music storage unit is deleted. Here, the update of the selected music storage means is executed after the elapse of the music selection validity period. Therefore, the selected music stored in the selected music storage unit is deleted every music selection valid period. As a result, the selected music in the music selection valid period is stored for each music selection valid period, so that the selected music in each music selection valid period can be appropriately displayed as the already-selected music image.

[Appendix L1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether to shift the game state to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
In a music selection valid period in which a music to be output by the audio output means (26) can be selected from the plurality of music, the music already selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26) as the music selection image (83). Causing the image display means (341) to display an image including a selected music image (831) indicating that the music has been selected;
When a plurality of music selections are made by the player during the same music selection validity period, the last selected music piece selected last in the music selection validity period is displayed as the already-selected music image (831), and the music other than the last selected music piece is selected. A gaming machine which limits display of an intermediately selected song as the selected song image (831).

  By the way, when the midway selection music piece is the already selected music piece, the already selected music piece image corresponding to the midway selection music piece is displayed in the music selection image. However, at the stage of the provisional selection, it was selected because he had a feeling that he liked it.However, he actually listened to the song, judged that it was not his favorite song, and finally selected another song to perform multiple songs. It is assumed that a selection is made. That is, the midway selection music piece may not be the music piece that the player likes. Therefore, if the midway selection song is not the player's favorite song and is displayed as the already-selected song image, the player may feel frustrated or disgust if he or she accidentally selects the midway selection song. I am concerned. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L1, when a plurality of music selections are made by the player during the same music selection validity period, the last selected music is displayed as the already-selected music image, and the midway selection music is displayed. It is not displayed as a selected music image. Since the halfway-selected song is not displayed as the already-selected song image in this way, it is possible to suppress the player's irritation and disgust caused by the halfway-selected song being displayed as the already-selected song image.

[Appendix L2]
The plurality of songs further include unselected songs other than the selected songs,
The music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by a player's determination operation on the operation means (21) for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Further including a selected music image (832);
In the case where the effect executing means (51) displays the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341),
An initial tentatively selected tune for the initial tentatively selected tune image (832) displayed first as the tentatively selected tune image (832) is selected from first unselected tunes among the unselected tunes, and the initial tentatively selected tune is selected. Output to the audio output means (26),
The halfway selected song is displayed as a second unselected song image (non-selected song image 834) indicating that it is a second unselected song (unselected song) other than the first unselected song among the unselected songs. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L1, wherein the gaming machine is operated.

  By the way, when the midway selection music is not set as the already-selected music, the midway selection music may be selected as the initial provisional selection music during the music selection validity period, and the initial provisional selection music image for the midway selection music may be displayed in the music selection image. . However, at the stage of the provisional selection, it was selected because he had a feeling that he liked it.However, he actually listened to the song, judged that it was not his favorite song, and finally selected another song to perform multiple songs. It is assumed that a selection is made. That is, the midway selection music piece may not be the music piece that the player likes. Therefore, if the midway selection music piece is not the music piece that the player likes, and is selected as the tentative selection music piece, the player may be frustrated or disliked. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine according to the supplementary note L2, the midway selection music piece is handled as a second unselected music piece that is not selected as the initial provisionally selected music piece. This prevents the midway selection song from being selected as the initial tentative selection song, thereby suppressing the player's frustration and disgust caused by the midway selection song being selected as the initial tentative selection song. Will be possible.

[Appendix L3]
When a plurality of music pieces are selected by the player during the same music selection validity period, the effect execution means (51) converts the second unselected music piece image (834) for an upper limit number of the halfway selected music pieces into the image. The gaming machine according to attachment L2, wherein the gaming machine is displayed on a display means (341).

  According to the gaming machine related to the appendix L3, when a plurality of music pieces are selected in the same music piece selection validity period, the second unselected music piece images corresponding to the upper limit number of the halfway selected music pieces are displayed on the image display means. By limiting the number of the second unselected music images displayed on the image display means to the upper limit in this way, it is possible to secure a certain number of the first unselected music images. This prevents the number of first unselected songs from being unnecessarily reduced, thereby preventing the same song from being repeatedly selected as the initial temporarily selected song.

[Appendix L4]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to, when a song exceeding the upper limit number is selected in the same song selection valid period, select the second unselected song image ( 834) is displayed on the image display means (341).

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note L4, when a song exceeding the upper limit number is selected in the same song selection validity period, the second unselected song image corresponding to the new upper limit number of midway selection songs of the song selection date and time is displayed on the image display means. Is displayed. By displaying the second unselected music image corresponding to the new upper limit number of halfway selected music pieces of the music selection date and time, the same halfway selected music piece is displayed as both the already selected music piece and the second unselected music piece image. Is prevented.

[Appendix L5]
The plurality of songs further include unselected songs other than the selected songs,
The music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by a player's determination operation on the operation means (21) for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Further including a selected music image (832);
The plurality of music pieces are selected as initial tentatively selected music pieces for the initially tentatively selected tune image (832) displayed first as the already-selected tunes, the tentatively selected tunes, and the already-selected tentatively selected tune images (832). Music storage means (51) for storing a first unselected music piece among unselected music pieces and a second unselected music piece among the unselected music pieces not selected as the initial provisionally selected music piece;
The effect executing means (51) includes:
Displaying the music selection image (83) based on the music storage means (51) during the music selection effective period;
When displaying the music selection image (83), the tentatively selected music is output to the audio output means (26), and a second unselected music image indicating that the halfway selected music is the second unselected music The gaming machine according to supplementary note L1, wherein the gaming machine is displayed as (non-selected music image 834).

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note L5, the midway selection music piece is handled as the second unselected music piece that is not selected as the initial provisionally selected music piece. This prevents the midway selection tune from being selected as the initial tentative selection tune. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irritation and disgust of the player due to the midway selection music being selected as the initial provisional selection music.

[Appendix L6]
A selected song storage means (51) capable of storing at least two selected songs selected in the same song selection validity period;
A selected song updating unit (51) for updating the selected song stored in the selected song storage unit (51) when the player selects a song during the same song selection valid period;
Music updating means (51) for updating the selected music and the second unselected music stored in the music storage means (51) based on the selected music stored in the selected music storage means (51); ,
The gaming machine according to attachment L5, further comprising:

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note L6, when a plurality of music pieces are selected in the same music selection validity period, two or more upper limit number of selected music pieces are stored in the selected music piece storage means. Therefore, the number of the second unselected music pieces (intermediately selected music pieces) stored in the selected music piece storage means is also defined to be less than the upper limit number, so that a certain number of the first unselected music pieces can be secured. This prevents the number of first unselected songs from being unnecessarily reduced, thereby preventing the same song from being repeatedly selected as the initial temporarily selected song.

[Appendix L7]
The selected song updating means (51) stores, in the selected song validity period, the selected music pieces of the upper limit number new in the music piece selection date and time in the selected music piece storing means (51) when the music pieces exceeding the upper limit number are selected. The gaming machine according to supplementary note L6, wherein the gaming machine is stored.

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note L7, when a song exceeding the upper limit is selected in the same song selection validity period, the new upper limit number of selected songs of the song selection date and time are stored. By storing the new upper limit number of selected music pieces of the music selection date and time in this way, the same selected music piece is prevented from being displayed as both the already-selected music piece and the second unselected music piece image.

[Appendix L8]
The supplementary note L6 or the supplementary note, wherein the music updating means (51) updates the selected music piece and the second unselected music piece stored in the music piece storage means (51) after the music selection validity period elapses. The gaming machine according to L7.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment L8, the music storage unit is updated after the elapse of the music selection validity period. By updating the music storage means after the expiration of the music selection validity period as described above, the music selection image in the next music selection validity period is selected based on the latest selection history of the player in the previous music selection validity period. And the second unselected music image can be displayed. This makes it possible to display a music selection image reflecting the player's preference.

[Appendix L9]
The said selected music updating means (51) deletes the said selected music memorize | stored in the said selected music storage means (51), after updating the said selected music storing means (51), Additional description L8 characterized by the above-mentioned. Gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note L9, the selected music stored in the selected music storage unit after the update of the selected music storage unit is deleted. Here, the update of the selected music storage means is executed after the elapse of the music selection validity period. Therefore, the selected music stored in the selected music storage unit is deleted every music selection valid period. As a result, the selected music in the music selection valid period is stored for each music selection valid period, so that the selected music in each music selection valid period can be appropriately displayed as the already-selected music image.

[Appendix M1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether to shift the game state to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341) during a music selection effective period, and the music selection image (83) is displayed. 83) an effect executing means (51) for outputting the selected music piece selected by the player to the audio output means (26),
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
A normal determination operation (for example, a single-hit operation) or a special determination operation (for example, a long press operation) different from the normal determination operation on the operation unit (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output unit (26) When the selected music to be output by the audio output means (26) is determined from the plurality of music by the continuous tapping operation), the selected music is output from the audio output means (26);
When the selected music is determined by the special determination operation on the operation means (21), a specially selected music image (839) indicating the selected music selected by the special determination operation is displayed on the image display means (839). 341), and
A gaming machine, wherein when the player selects the specially selected music piece based on the specially selected music piece image (839), the specially selected music piece is output to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M1, when a music is selected by a special determination operation different from the normal determination operation on the operation means, the specially selected music image is displayed, and the specially selected music image is output from the audio output means. Music to be played can be selected. That is, the player can selectively display a specially selected music image for a favorite music by performing a special determination operation at the time of selecting a music, and output the specially selected music from the audio output means. This allows the player to perform a special decision operation by himself and selectively display his favorite music as a specially selected music image so that he can select a music, so he can select a previously selected favorite music from many music. This makes it easier to determine and select a favorite song of the previously selected player without performing the cumbersome operation of performing the operation.

[Appendix M2]
The said special determination operation is long press operation which operates the said operation means (21) continuously for more than predetermined time, or continuous hitting operation which operates the said operation means (21) several times, The supplementary note M1 characterized by the above-mentioned. Gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M2, it is possible to display a specially selected music image in which a selected music can be selected by performing a long-press operation or a continuous hit operation on the operation unit as a special determination operation for selecting a music. it can. That is, the player can display a specially selected music image in which a specially selected music can be selected by a simple special determination operation on the operation means.

[Appendix M3]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
In the music selection valid period, the music selection image (83) and the display screen transition image (83A) for displaying the special selection music image (839) by the selection operation on the operation means (21) are displayed as the images. Means (341) to display
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M1 or M2, wherein the specially selected music image (839) is displayed when the display screen transition image (83A) is selected.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M3, when the display screen transition image is selected on the screen on which the music selection image and the display screen transition image are displayed, the screen is shifted to the screen on which the special selection music image is displayed. Since the music selection image and the special selection music image are displayed as separate screens as described above, when the special selection music is selected based on the special selection music image, the music is incorrectly selected from the music selection image. Is prevented.

[Appendix M4]
The game according to Supplementary note M1 or M2, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the specially selected music image (839) on the same screen as the music selection image (83) during the music selection effective period. Machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M4, the specially-selected music image is displayed on the image display means together with the music selection image during the music selection valid period. Since the specially selected music image is displayed on the same screen as the music selection image in this manner, an operation for displaying the specially selected music image is unnecessary, and the specially selected music image displayed first during the music selection validity period is not displayed. The player's favorite music can be selected based on this. This reduces the time and effort required for the player to select a favorite song.

[Appendix M5]
When the selected music is determined by the normal determination operation on the operation means (21), the effect execution means (51) has already been selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to attachment M4, wherein the image display means (341) displays the selected music image (831) indicating that the music has been selected.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment M5, the music selection image includes the already-selected music image, and the specially-selected music image is displayed together with the already-selected music image. By displaying the already selected music image together with the specially selected music image in this way, it is possible to easily select a past selected music that has not been selected as a specially selected music by the player.

[Appendix M6]
Special selection music storage means (51) for storing the special selection music selected by the special determination operation,
The effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the specially selected music image (839) on the basis of the specially selected music piece stored in the specially selected music piece storage means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes M1 to M5, characterized by features.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M6, when a special determination operation is performed on the operation means, the specially selected music piece is stored in the specially selected music piece storage means, and based on the specially selected music piece stored in the specially selected music piece storage means. The music output from the audio output means can be selected by the specially selected music image displayed. That is, the player can selectively store a favorite music by performing a special determination operation when selecting a music, and output the music from the audio output unit. As a result, the player can selectively register and select his or her favorite music by performing a special decision operation by himself / herself, so that the player has to perform a troublesome operation of selecting a previously selected favorite music from many music. In addition, it becomes easy to determine and select a favorite song of a previously selected player.

[Appendix N1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether to shift the game state to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
A normal determination operation (for example, a single-hit operation) or a special determination operation (for example, a long press operation) different from the normal determination operation on the operation unit (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output unit (26) When the selected music to be output by the audio output means (26) is determined from the plurality of music by the continuous tapping operation), the selected music is output from the audio output means (26);
When the selected music piece is determined by the special determination operation on the operation means (21), the specially selected music image (839) within the upper limit of two or more indicating that the selected music piece is the selected music piece selected by the special determination operation ) Is displayed on the image display means (341),
A gaming machine, wherein when the player selects the specially selected music piece based on the specially selected music piece image (839), the specially selected music piece is output to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N1, when a music is selected by a special determination operation different from the normal determination operation on the operation means, the upper limit number of specially selected music images is displayed, and the number of specially selected music images within the upper limit number of 2 or more is displayed. The music output from the audio output means can be selected by the specially selected music image. In other words, the player performs a special decision operation when selecting a song, selectively displays the specially selected song image for the favorite song up to the upper limit number, and outputs a song selected from the upper limit number of the specially selected song images by voice. It can be output from the means. This allows the player to perform a special determination operation by himself and selectively display up to the maximum number of favorite songs as a specially selected song image to select a song. The determination and selection of the favorite music of the previously selected player becomes easy without performing the troublesome operation of selecting the music.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix N1, it is possible to display two or more upper limit number (plural) specially selected music images. This makes it possible to select and output a song from a plurality of specially selected songs based on the plurality of specially selected song images. Further, by setting an upper limit on the number of specially selected music images that can be displayed, all or most of the plurality of selectable music images can be prevented from being displayed as specially selected music images. As a result, it is possible to display a song having a higher interest of the player as a specially selected song image within the upper limit number range, so that a more interesting favorite song can be easily selected.

[Appendix N2]
The effect executing means (51), when the specially selected music piece exceeding the upper limit number is selected, displays the specially selected music image (839) of the new upper limit number of music selection date and time on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to supplementary note N1, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of attachment N2, when a specially selected music piece exceeding the upper limit number is selected, a specially selected music image corresponding to the new upper limit number of specially selected music pieces at the music selection date and time is displayed. By displaying the new upper limit number of specially selected music images of the music selection date and time in this way, the selection history of the specially selected music piece of the player is reflected, and the specially selected music image that matches the interest of the player can be displayed. it can.

[Appendix N3]
The effect executing means (51) displays, when the specially selected music piece is selected, the specially selected music image (839) for the same specially selected music piece as the specially selected music piece on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to attachment N1 or N2, wherein if the same is selected, the same specially selected music image (839) is restricted from being displayed on the image display means (341) redundantly.

[Appendix N4]
The effect executing means (51) displays, when the specially selected music piece is selected, the specially selected music image (839) for the same specially selected music piece as the specially selected music piece on the image display means (341). In this case, the duplicated specially selected music image (839) having the oldest selection date and time is deleted from the specially selected music image (839), and the specially selected music image (839) corresponding to the newly selected specially selected music image is deleted. The gaming machine according to attachment N3, wherein the game is displayed on the image display means (341).

[Appendix N5]
The effect executing means (51) displays, when the specially selected music piece is selected, the specially selected music image (839) for the same specially selected music piece as the specially selected music piece on the image display means (341). The special selected music image (839) corresponding to the special selected music having the new selected date and time is not displayed on the image display means (341). Machine.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes N3 to N5, overlapping display of the specially selected music image on the image display means is restricted. As described above, the same specially selected music image is prevented from being displayed unnecessarily for the same specially selected music image by limiting the same specially selected music image from being redundantly displayed on the image display means. Is done. In addition, by restricting the same specially selected music image from being displayed repeatedly in the range of the upper limit number, it is possible to display the specially selected music image for more types of music in the limited upper limit number range. Can be.

[Appendix N6]
Special selection music storage means (51) capable of storing two or more upper limit numbers of the special selection music selected by the special determination operation,
The effect executing means (51) stores a specially selected music image (839) that enables a player to select the specially selected music piece from the plurality of music pieces during the music selection validity period, by using the specially selected music piece storage means (51). The gaming machine according to attachment N1, wherein the image display means (341) displays the specially selected music piece stored in the image display means (341).

  According to the gaming machine of attachment N6, when the special determination operation is performed on the operation means, the specially selected music piece is stored in the specially selected music piece storage means, and based on the specially selected music piece stored in the specially selected music piece storage means. The music output from the audio output means can be selected by the specially selected music image displayed. That is, the player performs a special determination operation when selecting a song to selectively store the favorite songs having an upper limit of 2 or more, and outputs a song selected from the upper limit of 2 or more specially selected songs. It can be output from the output means. With this, the player can selectively register and select the upper limit number of favorite songs by performing a special determination operation by himself, so a cumbersome operation of selecting a previously selected favorite song from many songs. , It becomes easy to determine and select a favorite song of the previously selected player.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to attachment N6, the specially selected music storage means can store the specially selected music of an upper limit number of 2 or more. Since the specially selected music storage means can store the upper limit number of two or more specially selected music pieces, it is possible to store a plurality of music pieces as specially selected music pieces and display a plurality of specially selected music piece images. It becomes possible to do. This makes it possible to select and output a song from a plurality of specially selected songs based on the plurality of specially selected song images. Further, by setting the upper limit number of specially selected music pieces stored in the specially selected music piece storage means, it is possible to prevent all or most of a plurality of selectable music pieces from being registered as specially selected music pieces. As a result, it is possible to store (register) a song with a higher interest of the player as a specially selected song in the range of the upper limit number, and thus it is possible to easily select a favorite song with a higher interest. .

[Appendix N7]
When the special selection music piece is selected by the special determination operation, a special selection music piece updating means (51) for updating the special selection music piece stored in the special selection music piece storage means (51) is further provided.
When the specially selected music piece exceeding the upper limit number is selected, the specially selected music piece updating means (51) stores the specially selected music piece with the new upper limit number of music selection date and time in the specially selected music piece storage means (51). The gaming machine according to attachment N6, wherein the gaming machine is stored.

  According to the gaming machine of attachment N7, when a specially selected song exceeding the upper limit number is selected, the new upper limit number of specially selected songs of the song selection date and time are stored. By storing the new upper limit number of specially selected songs of the music selection date and time, the selection history of the specially selected songs of the player is reflected, and the specially selected songs that match the interest of the player can be stored.

[Appendix N8]
The specially-selected song updating means (51) is configured such that when the specially-selected song is selected, the same specially-selected song is stored in the specially-selected song storage unit (51). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N6 or N7, wherein the specially selected music piece is restricted from being redundantly stored in the selected music piece storage means (51).

[Appendix N9]
The specially-selected music updating means (51) is configured to, when the specially-selected music is selected, store the same specially-selected music as the specially-selected music in the specially-selected music storing means (51), The present invention is characterized in that duplicated specially selected songs having an old selection date and time stored in the specially selected song storage means (51) are deleted, and the newly selected specially selected song is stored in the specially selected song storage means (51). The gaming machine according to attachment N8.

[Appendix N10]
The specially-selected music updating means (51) is configured to, when the specially-selected music is selected, store the same specially-selected music as the specially-selected music in the specially-selected music storing means (51), The gaming machine according to attachment N8, wherein the specially selected music storage means (51) is not updated.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes N8 to N10, it is restricted that the specially selected music piece is redundantly stored in the specially selected music piece updating means. By limiting the same specially selected music piece from being redundantly stored in the specially selected music piece updating means as described above, the same specially selected music piece image for the same specially selected music piece may be displayed unnecessarily. Is prevented. In addition, since the same specially selected music piece is limited from being repeatedly stored in the upper limit number range, more kinds of music pieces can be stored as special selected music pieces in the limited upper limit number range (registered ), More kinds of specially selected music images can be displayed.

[Appendix N11]
The said special determination operation is a long press operation which operates the said operation means (21) continuously for a predetermined time or more, or a continuous hitting operation which operates the said operation means (21) several times, Additional notes N1-N10. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N11, a specially selected music image in which a selected music can be selected by performing a long press operation or a continuous hit operation on the operation unit as a special determination operation for selecting a music can be displayed. it can. That is, the player can display a specially selected music image in which a specially selected music can be selected by a simple special determination operation on the operation means.

[Appendix O1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether to shift the game state to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
A new song adding means (51) for adding a new song to the plurality of songs when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
Temporarily indicating that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by a player's determination operation on the operation means (21) for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying an image including the selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the deciding operation is performed, the music temporarily selected is output from the audio output means (26) as a selected music,
When the new music piece is added to the plurality of music pieces by the new music piece adding means (51), the initial provisional selection for the initial provisionally selected music image (832) displayed first as the provisionally selected music piece image (832) Selecting the new song as the song and causing the image display means (341) to display the initial temporarily selected song image (832);
After the first music is added as the new music to the plurality of music by the new music adding means (51) due to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, a second music different from the first music is added as the new music. In this case, as the music selection image (83), the image including the initial provisional selection music image (832) for the second music and the image from which the first music can be selected is displayed on the image display means (341). A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of Additional Note O1, when a new music (second music) is added to a plurality of music that can be output from the audio output means by the new music addition means, the new music is supported as an initial temporarily selected music image. Is displayed. In this way, the image corresponding to the newly opened music is displayed on the image display means as the initial temporarily selected music image, so that the newly opened music can be easily selected.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note O1, when the second music is added after the first music is added, in addition to the initial temporarily selected music image for the second music that is the new music added this time. Then, an image enabling selection of the first music piece, which is the new music piece added earlier, is displayed on the image display means. Therefore, the player can output not only the newly added new music (second music) but also the previously added new music (first music) from the audio output unit. Thereby, even when a new music piece is added after a new music piece is added, it is possible to listen to a new music piece added in the past.

[Appendix O2]
The staging execution means (51) displays an image from which the first music piece can be selected at a position adjacent to the initial provisionally selected music piece image (832) for the second music piece. Gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note O2, when the second music is added after the first music is added, in addition to the initial tentatively selected music image for the second music that is the new music added this time, the first music is added. Is displayed at a position adjacent to the initial tentatively-selected music image. Therefore, when a new music piece (second music piece) is added, the player can easily grasp the newly added music piece (first music piece). This makes it possible to easily select a previously added song and output it from the audio output means, for example, when the player wishes to listen to a previously added new song that has not been selected yet. Becomes possible.

[Appendix O3]
The plurality of songs include a selected song that has already been selected by the player as a song to be output by the audio output means (26), and an unselected song other than the selected song,
The effect executing means (51) includes, as the music selection image (83), at least one unselected music image (833) for the unselected music adjacent to the initial provisionally selected music image (832) for the second music. The gaming machine according to supplementary note O2, wherein the gaming machine is displayed at a position where the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment O3, at least one unselected song image (833) for the unselected song is displayed at a position adjacent to the initial provisionally selected song image (832) for the second song that is a newly added song. You. That is, in the image display means, both an image enabling the selection of the first music piece, which is a new music piece added earlier, and an unselected music piece image are arranged at positions adjacent to the initial provisionally selected music piece image. For example, in a music selection image, an image enabling selection of a first music that is a new music added earlier, an initial provisionally selected music image, and an unselected music image are arranged in this order. Therefore, it becomes easy to select any of the previously added new song, the newly added song, and the unselected song.

[Appendix P1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether to shift the game state to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
A new song adding means (51) for adding a new song to the plurality of songs when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
When the new music is added to the plurality of music by the new music adding means (51), the new music can be selected as the music to be output by the audio output means (26) in the music selection image (83). Display the new song selection image
When the new music selection image is displayed on the image display means (341), an additional image (839) that explicitly or suggests that the music corresponding to the new music selection image is the new music is displayed. Gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note P1, when a new music selection image for a new music is displayed on the image display means, an additional image that indicates or suggests that the music for the new music selection image is a new music is displayed. By explicitly or suggesting that the song is a new song, the player can easily grasp that the song is a new song. This makes it easier for players who are interested in the new music to select a new music, so that the new music is not buried in the music list without being heard by the player. Is suppressed.

[Appendix P2]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the additional image (839) during a period from the start to the end of the music selection validity period that first arrives after the new music is added. The gaming machine according to supplementary note P1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note P2, the additional image is displayed on the image display means during a period from the start to the end of the first valid song selection period after the new song is added. In this way, the additional image is displayed during the period from the start to the end of the first valid song selection period after the new song is released, so that the newly opened song is provisionally selected or selected during the valid song selection period. Even later, it is possible to grasp that the song is a newly opened song, so that it becomes easy to temporarily select or select the newly opened song again.

[Appendix P3]
The effect executing means (51) displays the additional image (839) on the image display means (341) from the start of the first valid music selection period after the new music is added until the new music is selected by the player. ) Is displayed, the gaming machine according to supplementary note P1 or supplementary note P2.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment P3, the additional image is displayed on the image display means from the start of the first valid song selection period after the new song is added until the new song is selected. As described above, the additional image is displayed during the period from the start of the music selection valid period to the selection of the new music, so that the additional image is displayed until the new music is output as the selected music. This prevents unnecessary images from being displayed even after a new music piece is selected by the player.

[Appendix P4]
The effect executing means (51) displays the additional image on the image display means (341) during a music selection effective period that arrives after the new music is added first and before the new music is added next. A gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes P1 to P3, wherein (839) is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note P4, the additional image is displayed on the image display means during a music selection valid period that arrives between the time when a new music piece is added first and the time when a new music piece is next added. In this way, the additional image is displayed during the music selection valid period that arrives between the time when the new music is added first and the time when the new music is next added, so that the additional image is always displayed for the latest additional music. Is displayed. As a result, the player can always keep track of the latest added music, so even for songs that were added during the previous music selection validity period but were not selected by the player, the music selection validity period after the new music addition was added. Next, selection can be made based on the additional image until a new song is added. That is, the player can easily search for additional music based on the additional image when he or she wants to listen to the additional music later, even if the music is not normally listenable, even if it is not the music selection validity period in which the music was added. .

[Appendix P5]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
Temporarily indicating that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by a player's determination operation on the operation means (21) for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying an image including the selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
When the new music piece is added to the plurality of music pieces by the new music piece adding means (51), the initial provisional selection for the initial provisionally selected music image (832) displayed first as the provisionally selected music piece image (832) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes P1 to P4, wherein the new music piece is selected as a music piece, and the initial provisionally selected music piece image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341).

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note P5, when a new song is added to a plurality of songs that can be output from the audio output unit by the new song adding unit, an image corresponding to the new song is displayed as an initial temporarily selected song image. You. In this way, the image corresponding to the newly opened music is displayed on the image display means as the initial temporarily selected music image, so that the newly opened music can be easily selected.

[Appendix P6]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
As the music selection image (83), a selected music image (831) indicating that the music has already been selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26); An image including an unselected music image (833) indicating that the music is an unselected music other than the selected music, is displayed on the image display means (341);
When the new song is added to the plurality of songs by the new song adding unit (51), the new song is displayed on the image display unit (341) as the unselected song image (833). A gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes P1 to P4.

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note P6, an unselected music image corresponding to a new music is displayed in the music selection image. By displaying the new music as an unselected music image in the music selection image in this way, it is possible to prevent the new music from being selected as the initial provisionally selected music and from outputting the new music from the music output means. This makes it possible to provide a pleasure of temporarily selecting or selecting a new music piece according to the player's intention, while preventing a new music piece from being output against the intention of the player.

10: gaming machine 20: operation button 20a: operation switch 21: selection determination section 21A: selection button 211: upper selection button 212: lower selection button 213: left selection button 214: right selection buttons 211a to 211d: selection operation switch 21B: Set button 21Ba: Set operation switch 26: Speaker 331: Main control unit 332: Sub control unit 341: Symbol display unit 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Voice lamp controller 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 61: MPU
611: ROM
612: RAM
83: music selection image 831: selected music image 832: provisionally selected music image 833: unselected music image 834: unselected music image 83A: favorite list selected image 83B: favorite list image 839: additional image 840: favorite music selected image

Claims (6)

Main control means for determining whether to shift the game state to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition,
Image display means in which an effect by an image is executed, and effect means including sound output means in which an effect for outputting music is executed,
A music selection image for causing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means during the music selection valid period, and a selection selected by the player based on the music selection image Effect execution means for outputting a song to the audio output means,
Operating means operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means based on the music selection image displayed by the image display means,
With
The effect executing means,
The selection to output from the plurality of songs by the audio output unit by a normal determination operation on the operation unit or a special determination operation different from the normal determination operation by the player for selecting a music to be output by the audio output unit. When a song is determined, the audio output unit outputs the selected song,
When the selected music is determined by the special determination operation for the operation means, a special selection music image indicating that the selected music is selected by the special determination operation is displayed on the image display means,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the player selects the specially selected music piece based on the specially selected music piece image, the specially selected music piece is output to the audio output means.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the special determination operation is a long-press operation of continuously operating the operation unit for a predetermined time or more or a continuous hit operation of operating the operation unit a plurality of times. 3. The effect executing means,
In the music selection valid period, the image display means displays the music selection image and a display screen transition image for displaying the specially selected music image by a selection operation on the operation means,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specially selected music image is displayed when the display screen transition image is selected.   3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect executing unit displays the specially selected music image on the same screen as the music selection image during the music selection valid period. 4.   In the case where the selected music piece is determined by the normal determination operation on the operation means, the effect execution means is a previously selected music piece that has already been selected by the player as the music piece to be output by the audio output means. 5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the selected music image is displayed on the image display means. Further comprising a special selection music storage means for storing the special selection music selected by the special determination operation,
The said effect execution means displays the said special selection music image on the said image display means based on the said special selection music piece memorize | stored in the said special selection music storage means, The any one of Claim 1 to 5 characterized by the above-mentioned. The gaming machine described in Crab.

Images